11/10/19

Half Way There – A Vancouverite Baby Boomer’s Almanac

God grant me the serenity to accept the things I cannot change, the courage to change the things I can, and the wisdom to know the difference.

The Serenity Prayer – Reinhold Niebuhr

Chapter One

Since I’m perhaps nearing my end I thought I’d start at the beginning.

Some of the oldest human relics that have ever been found were fertility figurines carved from stones over fifty-thousand years ago. They depicted women with a figure of big bum, big belly and breasts. Not understanding yet that sex produces children, the men were no doubt in awe of what a woman could do that they could not. Women on the other hand were attracted to men who were confident, athletic, brave, a good provider, respected among the tribe, and handsome, with nice eyes. This was because women were selective as to which sperm they wanted, and because such men protected and provided for them. Thus, in nature and in human tribal cultures untouched by modern western ideology, males predominately do the wooing. There’s a perfectly logical reason for this, eggs are more valuable than the dime a dozen sperm. Most females are limited by how many eggs they have at birth, while males are only limited by the numbers of females they can have sex with. For example, for some women today, a pregnancy can simply be a too costly and time consuming responsibility to take on, especially if one is single, and if a decision is made to become pregnant, she at least should be selective as to whose sperm she wants, whether the survival of the species depends on it or not, unlike a Bonobo chimpanzee.

The Bonobo, kin to the other chimpanzees who lived on the other side of the river as it were, spend much of their time fondling, rubbing, and engaging in intercourse. Primatologist Frans de Waal described the difference between chimpanzees and bonobos as being, “Chimps use violence to get sex, while bonobos use sex to avoid violence.”

After studying them for years, Vanessa Woods describes the bonobo’s world as being where all your relatives “think sex is like a handshake”. And if left alone, they live high quality, nearly stress-free lives. Their world is one where everyone takes care of each other, especially the young, and where both males and females, share the babysitting duties, and don’t necessarily care who the father was. When having sex they cuddle, kiss, hold hands and gaze into one another’s eyes, perhaps even fluttering their eye lashes. While jealousy, is considered an ugly trait. Even before eating, instead of prayers, they all have a quickie before sitting down and empathically passing the food around smiling at each other. Then afterwards no doubt all take a nap. I would.

It’s perhaps not so surprising that for bonobos, chimps, humans and dolphins, all of whom might be the smartest of all mammals, promiscuity is the norm. Regardless, because whether by love, lust or instinct, when a male animal and a female animal have sex and do not use protection, there is a good chance a baby may be conceived.

In early 1958, somewhere in the Fraser Valley, British Columbia, my father’s performance reached its crescendo when the floodgates were thrown aside allowing nearly one hundred million sperm cells, the smallest cells in a human, to be ejected as semen, along with a part of his soul, and perhaps a quick pang of sadness that so often happens. Similar perhaps to how the vast majority of women have feelings of sadness or the “baby blues” after giving birth because maybe it’s that feeling that a human that grew inside her belly is now gone. In the there and then, the race was on, as the frantic sperm started swimming like crack addicted tadpoles, bobbing and weaving forward, with their long tails flowing behind. Others undoubtedly swam around like chickens with their heads cut off. Each one affected, or not, by how stressed out the father was, which could impact their future behaviour, just as a mother’s stress at fertilization can affect the egg.

Within five minutes, the hardier sperm made their way from my mother’s vagina, through to her cervix where, because it had been a couple of weeks since her last period, she happened to be ovulating. So her body had made the mucus in her cervix become more fluid and more elastic, allowing the sperm to pass through like going through a slippy-slide, and enter the uterus even more rapidly, as they wiggled their way forward in a mad frenzy bouncing off the walls and each other.

In the 17th century, Antonie van Leeuwenhoek, was the first to observe sperm in action using a microscope. He called them “animalcules” or little animals, because of his belief that each sperm contained a fully formed but very tiny human being.

Once past the uterus, the horde of sperm still left dwindled dramatically. Similar perhaps to animal kingdoms, and early human tribes, where the weak, lost and stupid are usually the first to go – the survival of the fittest for the survival of the species.

Of the millions, perhaps only a very few were left to swim into the funnel-shaped ends of two Fallopian tubes. Door number one was a dead end, while behind door number two an egg (ovum) my mother’s ovaries had released, lay in wait. The largest cell in a human body, the egg, can be fertilized for twelve to twenty-four hours after it is released. It then makes its way down the Fallopian tube where it waits for a sperm to come walking through the door. As per chance, one of my father’s sperm picked door number two and sperm and egg would meet.

Picking the right door was easy, but only because of sheer luck, while the hard part came when confronting the egg that happened to be there. Back in my father’s scrotum, rumours among the sperm had run rampant that the egg was a tough nut to crack. If unable to gain entry after throwing all one has at it, relentlessly squirming like mad, a sperm runs out of juice after five days and are eventually expelled, as is the egg if it finds no suitors or anyone capable of entering. If one or sometimes two or more sperm make entry into the egg, the combination of such cells is a process that’s known as fertilization or conception. The whole process is undoubtedly nature’s way of ensuring only the healthiest sperm fertilizes an egg, through a sort of equality of opportunity over equality of outcome situation, to provide the best chances of having a healthy baby.

Once inside, the sperm’s twenty-three chromosomes paired up with the egg’s twenty-three chromosomes, and ta-da a human cell called a zygote. Within this newly formed cell are genes that had been passed down over untold generations from both parents lineage. Twenty-two of these pairs, called autosomes, look the same in both males and females, while the twenty-third pair is the sex chromosomes. Since all eggs have an X chromosome, the sperm’s contribution was a Y chromosome, thus I became a boy. If my father had shot off an X chromosome, I would have been a girl. In very few cases, or about as common as someone having red hair, some are born intersex. Meaning someone born with any of several variations in sex characteristics, including chromosomes, gonads, sex hormones, or genitals. While the well used adage, “a woman born into a man’s body or a man born into a woman’s body” is false, for human sexuality is binary. Gender identity on the other hand are thoughts and feelings of our emotional system that do not match with one’s assigned sex, which are not hard-wired within us, they are developed.

Lining the Fallopian tube, tiny silk-like hairs, swaying back and forth like a bed of kelp in a current, move the fertilized zygote through the tube toward the uterus. A journey which took about three to five days, all the while the cells of the zygote began to divide repeatedly like an out of control virus. Upon reaching the uterus, the cells continued to divide, becoming a hollow ball of cells called a blastocyst. In two to three days the blastocyst implants itself into the lining of the uterus, usually near the top, side, front or back. The wall of the blastocyst is only one cell thick except in one area where it is three to four cells thick, and over the next few days the cells in the thicker part develops into an embryo, while the thinner outer cells burrow into the wall of the uterus and develop into the placenta. As the placenta develops, wire-like vessels, including two arteries and one vein, will branch out from its surface, much like the wires from a car battery, and entwine together to eventually form a 55 to 60 centimetre long umbilical cord which is plugged into us through our belly-button. The cord will supply us with everything we need, such as nutrient uptake, thermo-regulation, waste elimination, and gas exchange via the mother’s blood supply, to fight against internal infection, and to produce hormones which support pregnancy. Placentas are a defining characteristic of placental mammals, from mice to elephants, to whales and apes.

Most organs begin to form in the ever growing embryo, now the size of a pea, three weeks after fertilization/conception, which equals five weeks of pregnancy, because doctors date pregnancy from the first day of the woman’s last menstrual period, which is typically two weeks before conception. Sticking with “since conception” henceforth, the heart and major blood vessels had already begun developing, around the 16th day. And by the 21st day someone flips on a light switch and the heart starts beating and pumping fluid through blood vessels. The first red blood cells appear the next day, while blood vessels continue to develop in both the embryo and placenta.

By the fourth week the embryo elongates, the first suggestion off a human shape, while the lungs continue to mature, as they do right up to nearly the time of delivery. Along the dorsal side of the embryo the cells had already begun to form a neuroectoderm, basically a neural plate of cells which looks like a flap of skin which transforms into a neural groove or fold, then eventually into a neural tube. This is where the central nervous system and the spinal cord will reside, topped off with a chemical electrical brain. Other cells start to arrange themselves around where the spinal cord and developing brain will emerge, mainly the face, nose, ears and eyes. All important because they all are where the brain will receive its information to operate. And still other cells will form into the skeletal structure needed to protect such vital areas. By the end of the week the heart and other organs continue to form, and the structures necessary to the development of the eyes and ears develop, while small buds show where the arms and legs are going to be. The embryo begins to take on a C-shaped curvature, like a little dolphin without the beak or dorsal fin, but soon sharing similar bone structures in our hands and their flippers.

Once the neural tube is formed, it slowly fills with cerebrospinal fluid. Its walls contain neural stem cells, which drive brain growth as they divide multiple times. Over the many weeks, some of the cells will gradually stop dividing and differentiate into neurons and glial cells, which are the main cellular components of the central nervous system. Neurons are generated from neural stem cells and progenitor cells, through the process of neurogenesis. These neurons will never divide again for the lifetime of the organism, and migrate to different parts of the developing brain to self-organize into different brain structures. Once the neurons have reached their regional positions, they extend nerve fibres, tiny antennas as it were, which allow them to communicate with other neurons via synapses, which are small gaps separating the neurons, basically they’re neurotransmitters containing mitochondria and other cell organelles.The first sparks of life begin to flash in synaptic communication between each other, which eventually will lead to the establishment of functional neural circuits that mediate sensory and motor processing, and make up one’s future behaviour.

As it develops over the next few months, the brain also divides into three sections, the hind-brain, the mid-brain, and the fore-brain. These simple sacks would eventually enlarge and further divide into other future sections, such as the cerebral cortex, thalamus, cerebellum and medulla, according to what XX or XY chromosome one has. On average and not in all cases, other changes in the brain include that males typically have a larger amygdala which is the centre for aggression and physical action, while females will typically have a larger and faster maturing prefrontal cortex which is responsible for inhibiting aggression, and is closer linked to verbal functions. But although females are slower to act out in anger physically, their verbal response is often just as hard-hitting, deep cutting, and harder to stop. And while a male’s brain circuits use more testosterone and vasopressin, the female brain uses more estrogen and oxytocin, which affects each other’s behaviour in their future.

By six weeks after conception the embryo has grown to the size of a kidney bean. Depressions that will give rise to nostrils become visible, and the beginnings of the retinas form. Lower limb buds that will become legs appear, and the arm buds that sprouted last week now take on the shape of paddles. Fingers began to form, and small swellings outlined the future shell-shaped parts of the ears, and the eyes become ever more obvious. The upper lip and nose have formed. The trunk and neck begin to straighten. By the end of this week, the embryo is only about 11 to 14 millimetres long, about half the diameter of a quarter.

Seven weeks after conception, the arms grow enough to where elbows appear. Toes are visible and welts where eyelids will appear form. The head is large but doesn’t have much of a chin. By the eight week the head has become more round, and we can bend our elbows. Toes and fingers lose their webbing and become longer. The eyelids and external ears continue to develop. The umbilical cord is now clearly visible, while the embryo from head to tail is less than 18 milometers long, about the diameter of a penny.

At the end of the eighth week after conception, the embryo becomes a fetus. It’s at this point that the chance of a miscarriage or birth defect was at its highest. Eight to ten of the fetus’ main organs are already formed. The exceptions are the brain and spinal cord, which continue to form and develop throughout the pregnancy. Ankles, wrists, and fingers begin forming, bones appear, and the genitals and inner ear begin to develop. The heartbeat can be seen via ultrasound, and the fetus begins to make involuntary movements.

Nine weeks after conception our heads make up about half the length of the fetus, but the body will soon catch up. Our faces become broader, widely separating the eyes, our eyelashes are still fused to our heads, with ears set low. We slowly begin to take on the features of our parents, and their parents, and their parent’s parents and so on and so on, who knows how far back in time, their genes continuing to combine and to create, passing on traits, abilities, and perhaps even the memories of souls, going back thousands of years.

In our closed mouths, buds for future teeth appear. Red blood cells are beginning to form in the liver, and by the end of the week our external genitalia begin to go either one of two ways; a penis and a pair of testicles or a clitoris and labia majora to protect the vulva. The intestines begin to form in our abdomen, while our skin is almost transparent. The average fetus at this point is about 61 millimetres long or the length of the short side of an old Canadian dollar bill or the size of a small peach, and fills the entire uterus, leaving it to slowly be pushed outward as the fetus grows.

More than ninety per cent of abortions in Canada and the United States (US) are carried out on embryos at six to fourteen weeks, with six per cent between fourteen and twenty weeks, and two per cent at a later stage. Of the abortions carried out beyond twenty weeks, most are due to a direct threat to the mother’s life or the detection of a very serious birth defect. Even though way before this stage and no matter from rape, incest, syringe or test-tube, women today also have the options of the “morning-after” pill and other chemical means. The majority of abortions are carried out because of economic reasons, because often there is no husband or partner.

In Canada, before it became legal in 1969, abortion could be legally performed only to save the life of the woman, to do so for any other reason was illegal. Former Chief Coroner of Ontario, Morton Shulman, recalls that, “while the pregnant daughters of the rich were sent to reliable physicians who did abortions for cash, with some of them performing twenty to thirty abortions a week, everyone else’s options were either performing the abortion on themselves or be assisted by a nurse abortionist.” The preferred method over others too ghastly to mention, was pumping Lysol into the mother’s womb. The mortality rate was high and the infection rate over 50 per cent. A doctor in Chicago was said to have performed over 70,000 abortions over his 40 year career.

Today abortion in Canada is legal at all stages of pregnancy as long as a committee of doctor’s sign off that it was necessary for the physical or mental well-being of the mother. While some non-legal obstacles exist, Canada is one of only a few nations with no legal restrictions on abortion, with regulations and accessibility varying between provinces, much the same as in the US with their states. Today the majority of women who do have an abortion have at least two, with many having three over their lifetime. In many developed nations a woman, on average, will have just less than one abortion over their lifetime. But, overall, abortion rates are dropping. Notably, abortion rates are similar in countries where abortion is highly restricted and where it is broadly legal: The abortion rate is 37 per 1,000 women in countries where abortion is prohibited or permitted only to save the life of the woman, and 34 per 1,000 women in countries where abortion is not restricted. As such, legal restrictions do not eliminate the numbers of abortions.

In early 2019, New York State passed a law, joining four other states, where an abortion is allowed right up to the ninth month, and a doctor is no longer needed to perform the procedure, but instead can be performed by a nurse or clinic employee. Additional states are currently hoping to pass laws where an abortion may be performed, not only up to natural dilation, but further – even after the baby is born, where the woman and doctor, after first making the baby “comfortable” can then decide to abort. Performing what was once called infanticide. At the same time other states are trying to outlaw abortions entirely.

I personally have no problem with abortions that are medically and morally necessary, but I am against using such a medical procedure as birth control, for stem cell misuse or for whatever mood one happens to be in at that time. And the fact that up to the present day, fathers are not included in the decision making, but then sadly and more often than not, there is no father in the picture anymore. And of course the instilled and accepted belief that it’s none of a man’s business what a women wants to do with her body. So I shall now shut up, and if this is the case of “my body my choice”, and all things being equal, then it is also my mind my choice, my business my choice, and my money my choice.

Moving through our eleventh week, our eyebrows, eyelashes, fingernails, and the neck all form, while the skin has a wrinkled appearance. The arms and legs can bend, the kidneys start working and produce urine, and the fetus can swallow. Although electrical brain activity is first detected between the third and fifth week, it is considered primitive neural activity rather than the beginning of conscious thought. But the sparks really start going off at around 15 weeks, then begin to multiply ever more quickly around week 28, as it accumulates new cells throughout the pregnancy and continues, for the first year of life after birth.

By the halfway mark of a pregnancy, in the 18th week after conception (20th week of the pregnancy), a first-time mother may feel the first fluttering movements of kicking, squirming or turning, known as the “quickening”. This has got to be an amazing moment which a man could not understand where you feel a human growing inside you and it reacts to your touch. The fellow in the Aliens movie, who had that creature tear itself out of his chest, had to have felt something was growing inside him. Maybe he thought it was just a bad case of gas. But I digress. More interestingly, women who have been pregnant before, typically feel movements about two weeks earlier than women who are pregnant for the first time. Coincidentally perhaps, the same time the quickening is going on the fetus starts to hear sound vibrations. maybe we are already movin’ to the groovin’? Now eight to twelve centimetres long, an ultra-sound is able to reveal our sex, and take a picture of us so our parents can magnet it to their fridge.

One hundred and fifty days in we open our eyes for the first time. Eyes that people will later say look just like our mother’s or father’s or even grandparents. And though we become ever more active, chasing dragons no doubt, we also begin to sleep and waken on a more regular cycle. Lanugo, a fine hair, and a waxy coating called vernix, cover and protect our thin fetal skin.

At twenty-six weeks after conception, we have a 90 per cent chance of survival outside the uterus if provided with high-quality medical care, because though our lungs are completely formed, they don’t function yet. As such, these premature births are the leading cause of death for children under the age of five.

We are now able to hiccup, and are more sensitive to sound, and respond to noises and voices heard, which at this time, is mostly the sounds of our mother’s body. These include her beating heart, the air moving in and out of her lungs, her growling stomach, food being digested and expelled, and even the sound of blood moving through the umbilical cord. Recordings taken in the uterus reveal that noises from outside of the womb are muted by about half. Mostly because, there’s no open air in the uterus only amniotic fluid and it’s inside our mother’s body, making most noises muffled. The most significant sound we hear in the womb is our mother’s voice. Soon we will recognize it from other sounds, and in many cases when the father is speaking to the womb through the entire pregnancy; his voice will also be recognized. Recordings have also shown that when the mother or father is speaking, we are more alert and attentive; we cock an ear as it were.

Through the next few weeks we really start packing on the weight. Bones harden, except for the skull, which remains soft and flexible to make delivery easier. Whatever gender, our bones would grow similarly, except for sometimes longer lengths, bone densities, and the skull shape of a male and the pelvis of the female. If the average person ever found a human skeleton in the woods which had its pelvis and skull missing, they would be hard-pressed to distinguish whether the skeleton was male or female.

From about the 34th week after conception to birth in the 38th week, we continue to put on weight, and start preparing for what is to come, by ever so slowly turning into a head-down position. Our lungs are now fully mature and they prepare themselves for functioning on their own. During the later stages of the pregnancy our mothers gratefully give us our first buzz by infusing us with an increase in abundance of oxytocin, a hormone that brings feelings of contentment, reductions in anxiety, and feelings of calmness and security.

While my father was dutifully caring, providing for, and protecting my mother, she physically and mentally experienced all that is being pregnant. And astoundingly, do it three more times over the next four years. Take a break, and then in 1967 do it again, with the baby of the family arriving in 1973 to make it a six-pack.

In the first few months of pregnancy the hormonal changes, such as rising levels of estrogen and chorionic gonadotrophin brings on waves of nausea and vomiting. And despite its name, morning sickness can occur any time of day. The hormone progesterone increased sleepiness, and as her uterus grew and pressed on her bladder, trips to the bathroom were frequent. Her breasts more tender and swollen, her areolas, the skin around each nipple, darkened and enlarged. Her digestive system slowed down to increase the absorption of beneficial nutrients. But such reduced digestive system motility, caused heartburn, constipation, bloating and gas. Her heart worked harder by increasing its beat to pump more blood to the uterus which supplied it to the fetus, and gave her face a rosier complexion. Maybe this is where the craving for ice-cream came in. As well as the physical changes throughout the pregnancy, she would have experienced emotional highs and lows with mood swings running the gamut, from loving the world to wanting to kill somebody.

With her enlarged uterus pushing against her diaphragm, in the final trimester of pregnancy, she was possibly short of breath with less room for the lungs to expand. Her ankles, hands, feet and face may have swelled as she retained more fluids, while her blood circulation slowed. She may have also had more backaches and hip pain as these joints relax in preparation for delivery, and never ever able to get comfortable. Her face might have developed dark patches of skin, and stretch marks may appear on her belly, thighs, breasts and backside. She may also notice varicose veins on her legs. Her breasts may have experienced some leakage of colostrum, a yellow liquid, as they get ready for breastfeeding.

Nearing the big moment, we the fetus usually drop lower in our mother’s abdomen and become suspended upside down. False labor, known as Braxton-Hicks contractions, may have begun to occur as it got closer to our due date. During the final weeks of pregnancy it would have become harder to find a comfortable sleeping position, so mothers are usually extremely tired. As delivery approaches, some women love the whole experience of being pregnant and waddle around proudly, while others may feel like enough already, get on with this.

Then at a certain time, a very tiny unheard alarm bell goes off somewhere and the door is thrown aside and the dam bursts. The only womb we had ever known empties. Our mother begins to feel abdominal cramps or back pain that last around half a minute and occur every ten to thirty minutes. The cramps become stronger and closer together, while the mother’s cervix begins to rapidly dilate up to about five centimetres.

As our warm aquarium of pulsating organs and muffled noises empties itself, our soft skull is sucked by the flow down to a drain at the bottom, and the entrance to the birth canal. The sides of which slowly start to knead, squeeze and relax, pushing and pulling us through, like an anaconda swallowing a deer.

The contractions get strong enough where the mother has to bear down and “puussh” through them, in between either cursing their man, madly chewing ice cubes or chomping down on a stick. This stage could last anywhere from twenty minutes to two hours. And though most babies are born head first, about four per cent are born feet or butt first, and are known as breech births, or born face first facing up which is called posterior. In such cases, the obstetrician may need to recommend a Caesarean or C-section, or the use of forceps (for posterior births), as the best means of delivery. This is done by making an incision in the mother’s abdomen and uterus, so the baby can be taken directly out instead of travelling through the birth canal. A truly out of body experience. Caesarean sections are done most often when the mother has had a previous baby by Caesarean delivery or the baby’s health might suffer if born vaginally. The two out of three women who do undergo vaginal births instead of caesarean, of course, avoid having major surgery and its associated risks, such as severe bleeding, scarring, infections, reactions to anesthesia and more longer-lasting pain, and have a much longer hospital stay and recovery time.

The biggest disappointment in caesarean births is the millions of immune cells (types of white blood cells) in the mother which slowly make their way to the birth canal during the later stages of pregnancy. In some form of celebration of the birth, they line the route, as it were, and lie in wait while expanding their size. As the baby passes through they make contact and cling on, and slowly enter the skin, and make their way to the baby’s bone marrow, and join other immune cells already there. It is where cells of the immune system originate from, and some mature. The “muscles” of the newborn’s immune system then migrate to guard the peripheral tissues, and circulate in the blood and in a specialized system of vessels called the lymphatic system. Ever ready to attack any foreign bodies they can use their plasma membrane to engulf any bacteria or large particle, then ingest or degrade it. Caesarean births not only miss out on such a benefit, but destroy the hopes of millions of immune cells because the headliner didn’t show up.

As we get squeezed down the ever expanding birth canal each time our mother bears down and pushes, typically our head is facing either hip of our mother, but we slowly begin to rotate and face her bottom. We then intuitively hold our arms to our sides bow our head and rest our chin on our chest and humbly ready ourselves for our grand entrance into the world. Still hiding behind the curtain and waiting for the lights to come on. This position will allow the crown of our skull to go through the birth canal first, until that is when the back of our neck presses against our mother’s pubic bone. Here we genetically know to extend our neck, as if we are looking up at something and without even an excuse or a pardon me, slide by the bone by dropping one of our shoulders. By this time, the cervix has reached its full dilation of ten centimetres, the approximate diameter of a bagel, or a coffee can.

Once again we turn our head to restore its normal relationship with the shoulders, which are still at an angle, as if we are escaping from a straight jacket. Our shoulders repeat the corkscrew movements of our head, which can be seen in the final movements of the fetal head just before we emerge, by those attentively watching and ready to catch us. Undoubtedly the most painful part for the mother, who may experience an intense stretching and burning, is when our head pops out in the act of crowning. This final stage, where our head is out but our body isn’t, can take anywhere from 5 to 30 minutes. A lifetime for the mother perhaps, with the final birth of her baby the greatest moment in life, possibly erasing any pain just endured.

We are then thrust into the spotlight and have to breathe air for the first time, with an umbilical cord trailing behind us, still attached to the placenta, which hasn’t arrived yet as it usually emerges about 10 to 12 minutes later. Luckily, being human and somebody grabbed us as we came out and not just dropped to the ground then licked clean by the mother as other animals do, we instantly have to learn how to adjust to temperature changes, to suck and swallow, though pooh and pee already comes naturally. The next few days are all about shock and awe, and radical adjustment. With the only thing needed to be kept warm and fed. Henceforth, all things learned are based on needs, experiences, then later by trial and error. And contrary to the popular belief of many today, being born does not ensure morality, good intentions or credibility.

Most medical authorities today suggest the infant be placed skin-to-skin on the mother’s chest for an hour or two immediately after birth. Any initial observations of the baby can be done while the baby remains close to the mother. Babies born in hospitals used to be removed from their mothers’ shortly after birth and brought in only at feeding times. The idea was that newborns would be safer in the nursery and that the separation would offer the mother more time to rest. This is what my mother experienced. Studies about immediate nakedidity between mother and babe have shown that such timely touching promotes neuro-behaviors and results in deeper and more fulfilling bonds with satisfaction of basic biological needs, especially feeding. The World Health Organization states that “the process of childbirth is not finished until the baby has safely transferred from placental to mammary nutrition.”

It is said that even a brief separation before the baby has had its first feeding from his or her mother’s breast can disturb the bonding process. Most newborns may be interested in breastfeeding within one hour after birth or even immediately, and will need to feed every three to four hours, even though the maternal milk production doesn’t really begin to flow until two to three days after birth. In the interim, the mother produces colostrum, a type of milk with high concentrations of nutrients and antibodies. Over the first few days, we poop what all mammalian infants poop, a greenish-black, tarry, sticky substance resembling thick extremely compressed motor oil, and which even has a name, meconium. It is composed of everything the fetus, now infant, ingested during the time spent in the uterus, such as intestinal skin cells, amniotic fluid, bile, and water.

Our first health-care evaluation is the Apgar evaluation, usually carried out one minute after birth and then again, five minutes later. They check our heart rate, breathing, muscle tone, reflexes and skin color, and score each of them from zero to ten to get a baseline. At the five minute mark, the same evaluation is taken. In more than 98 per cent of births, the Apgar score reaches seven out of ten. The other cases either need further medical care or at the least close monitoring.

Over the next 24 hours, the trials and tribulations of further “newborn screening” begin. We get washed, our weight and length is measured, and we are administered eye drops. Back in my day silver nitrate was used routinely, but burned a baby’s eyes while trying to prevent infection. Now erythromycin is commonly used. An antibiotic used for the treatment of a number of bacterial infections, including respiratory tract infections, skin infections, Chlamydia infections, pelvic inflammatory disease, and syphilis. In fact, sexually transmitted diseases are the main causes of newborn eye infections.

Rumour has it that as newborns we have poor vision with eyes that can’t focus or look far. The difference between boy’s and girl’s eyes, as in other mammals, is that typically male retinas are thicker, and have more magnocellular cells, which are distributed across the entire retina and are responsible for tracking the movement of an object, whether prey or the throwing of a rock. While the female retina is thinner and has more parvocellular cells, which are concentrated around the center of the retina, and responsible for identifying objects and analyzing texture and color. It is said that this is why females take more interest in people’s faces, while males are attracted to anything that moves. This also shows up in recent studies where males typically have much quicker auditory and visual reaction times than females. Could this be why men play video games and women snapchat?

As already mentioned, many of the behavioural distinctions between male and female come from our hormonal differences and how parts of our brains are used differently during development. One interesting, quirky difference is when we move around in our environments. Females use the cerebral cortex, the part responsible for thinking, perceiving and understanding language, and can get around by using landmarks, while men use the hippocampus, the area of the brain that is pre-wired for spatial navigation, and think in terms of how many blocks or kilometres and how far from here to there.

Our brain consists of about 73 per cent water, with dense sponges of white and grey matter, both of which are major components of the central nervous system. White matter forms the deepest parts of our brains, and is entwined throughout the spinal cord. It is composed of bundles which connect various gray matter areas (nerve cell bodies) to each other. White matter affects our learning, and coordinates communication between different brain regions. It’s like a large relay switch, modulating and connecting all the brain’s different signals of nerve impulses between neurons, then distributing them accordingly. Grey matter on the other hand, is found throughout the brain, brain stem, cerebellum, and spinal cord. It consists of cell bodies such as glial cells, the babysitters of neurons who protect and feed them oxygen, and the already mentioned synapses which permit a neuron to pass an electrical or chemical signal to another neuron, and finally, capillaries to supply the blood to the brain. Grey matter includes regions of the brain involved in muscle control, and sensory perception, such as seeing and hearing, memory, emotions, speech, decision making, and self-control.

Upon maturity our brains will weigh on average 1.3 kilograms and contain about one hundred billion neurons. And though only around two per cent of our total body weight, the brain uses 20 per cent of our oxygen and calories, thus like any other organ, the brain is affected by our lifestyle, diet, and the amount that we exercise. Putting aside the old wives tale about us only using ten per cent of our brains, modern science and medical imaging show the majority of the brain is almost always active. Our brains have evolved to use its entirety, in order to use the least amount of energy while correlating and processing the most information possible.

The sensory and motor regions of the brain mature first, followed by other cortical regions. The frontal and parietal cortices mature around the age of twelve years, the temporal lobes around sixteen years, and the superior temporal cortex being the last to mature. Female’s brains reach maturity usually a year earlier than those of males the same age. But it doesn’t end there, the brain’s maturation continues, where males tend to exhibit grey matter of increased volume but lower density than that of females. As it is, the latest research shows that the brain doesn’t fully mature until it is around twenty-six years old, if one is lucky.

Both males and females will also develop two emotional systems, based on the chemistry going on in our bodies: the mirror neuron system (MNS) and the temporal-parietal junction system (TPJ). The MNS is responsible for emotional empathy for others, while the TPJ guides cognitive empathy and the ability to distance oneself from another person’s emotions by focusing analytically on solving a problem. Both sexes start their empathy process in the MNS, but the male brain quickly switches over to the TPJ. These emotional differences will unfortunately play out later when a woman tells her man about a problem she has and is in need of emotional support and comforting. If he doesn’t see a solution to her problem, he doesn’t see the need to talk about it any longer. But then, we are supposed to be logical and not emotional, yet we are, because we’re often chosen as leaders of communities, societies, and countries, including our own families, while being too emotional is often deemed as a weakness. No matter our emotions, we are each born to have the balance needed for the survival of our species. But not all humans are well balanced, hence, survival of the fittest.

About 1.7 per cent of people born will have emotional systems which will make them either gay men or lesbian women. This has been occurring over the history of our species. I grew up having a gay uncle who was one of my most important mentors through to my teens, and who taught me much about being a man.

If one were to add bisexuality and transgender, which are both not biological but psychological, the current LBGTQ community in some Western countries is about 4.5 per cent of the population. As to the transgender movement, there are arguments being made today that it is an attempt to make it a civil right to have a mental illness, much like there is discussion lately that perhaps pedophilia should be listed as a sexual preference.

Our basic emotions are actually not a thing at all, and there are only four of them, arousal, pleasant, unpleasant, and calm. And since we are electromagnetic and electrical organisms, these basic emotions operate on their own separate frequency. Though unable to travel through solid objects, such frequencies are felt when we interact with one another. They are the vibes we get from one another from the sparkling giddiness of romance to the undertone of unease and danger, “cutting the air in the room like a knife”. The frequencies are also based on our five physical sensors: of taste, sight, hearing, touch, and smell, which along with the senses of balance, pain, hunger, thirst, and temperature contributes to our experience of our surroundings, and only shows us a three-dimensional universe. Our behaviour on the other hand will come from inherited traits, while our perceptions of things, comes from information received, experiences, and our consciousness. When such fields are in balance we are healthy, when they are not, we experience disease – physically, mentally, emotionally, and psychologically. Insidiously modern technology, particularly 5G (fifth generation cellular network technology), can manipulate these frequencies, scrambling them to induce feelings of arousal, conviviality, meanness, friendliness, anger, and even experience extreme pain, without our awareness. The previous four generations of cellular transmitters used between one to five gigahertz (GHz), 5G on the other hand operates from 24 to 90 GHz and uses millimetre waves, not cellular. These waves have a shorter range than microwaves so their antennas will have to be everywhere. A typical urban street will have to have them atop every fourth or so light pole. The 5G waves also cannot travel through solid objects, such as trees, so in many urban areas they will have to be the first to go. To date, cases of both people and insects alike getting sick due to nearby 5G towers is already on the rise. But they do have quicker internet.

Further to the differential qualities of men and women, brain scans, controlled studies, basic biology, chemistry, evolutionary psychology, and anthropology, all demonstrate that men and women are physically and mentally different. We absorb, process, and deliver information differently. And though we are all one consciousness but having different experiences, we also evolved with different priorities, and are immersed in different combinations of hormones. This leads to a varied interpretation and perception of reality, which is the root of the problems between male and female, within our families, and in the lives of our children. To remedy it, all one has to do is embrace the differences empathically, where equality only exists in compromising. Accept the reality that often and in many ways, men and women have pre-determined biological and psychological roles. Our differences are not always mutually exclusive, but we must face the fact that in some evolutionary way we complement each other so very much, and must not allow such a symbiotic nature of man and woman to be destroyed.

Back to the poking and prodding of male and female babies, it is currently possible to collect two types of stem cells during childbirth: amniotic stem cells and umbilical cord blood stem cells. Amniotic stem cells can be taken when we are still in the womb, from the amniotic fluid which surrounds us, and can be obtained through routine prenatal testing without the need for abortion or fetal biopsy. Umbilical cord blood stem cells on the other hand, are collected from the blood of the placenta and the attached umbilical cord, but are also found in various maternal tissues and organs including blood, bone marrow, skin and liver.

The use of fetal cells has been highly controversial because firstly, on many levels it’s an ethical issue. The tissue is known to often be obtained from the fetus following induced abortion. And because the supposedly “best” stem cells are from a fetus’s or newborn’s spine, not from their blood, they are very valuable, thus are often misused for anti-aging purposes or private medical matters by those who can afford it. And though both embryonic and adult derived stem cells from ethical sources, are being studied as possible treatments of a number of conditions including hematopoietic and genetic disorders, in many countries it is still deemed unethical. Canada, the UK and Japan derive stem cells from bone marrow, while the US and their prominently evangelical led Food and Drug Agency (FDA) are against stem cell use and consider it an illegal drug, but certain states allow adult stem cell use. And though several applications to begin human trials of embryonic stem cell-based therapies have been approved, there are many steps required for such approval. Yet in Panama, stem cell therapy has been done for 16 years and has had excellent results. But if embryonic stem cell harvesting continues it could still be many years before therapies based on embryonic stem cells are widely available.

In adults, stem cells are found throughout the body. They are the handy repairmen, running around fixing anything that needs it and each having the potential to develop into many different types of cells in the body. They are especially attracted to inflammation which they immediately attempt to lessen. They also modulate the immune system, and stimulate regeneration, thus most stem cell therapy today is used to battle auto-immune diseases, and inflammation of joints. Adult stem cells have also been found to be able to replace neurons damaged by spinal cord injury, stroke, Alzheimer’s, Parkinson’s disease or other neurological problems, possibly produce insulin in the treatment of diabetes. Imagine having the ability to replace or restore any tissue or organ in the human body.

As to how useful stem cells may be in the future, consider that by 65 years of age we’ve lost approximately 90 per cent of our adult stem cells. But is eternal life possible or desirable? Some say it is, especially those who can afford the “best” stem cell therapy available. Then consider that in January 2019, 97 year old Prince Philip, the husband of Queen Elizabeth II of England, and who had just had recent hip surgery, supposedly pulled out from a driveway in his Land Rover Freelander and was t-boned by a small KIA car. The collision was enough to send his vehicle rolling across the road, or as a bystander described, it “somersaulted across the road”. In the KIA, a woman broke her arm and the driver had cuts to her knees, while thankfully the ten-month old baby in the back seat was alright. Prince Philip’s vehicle ended up lying on its driver’s side, where a passerby, after first checking on the occupants of the KIA, pulled Prince Philip out of his vehicle, totally unscathed. He blew negative on the breathalyser and said the sun was in his eyes. Checked over and sent home. On a similar note, one of the many who have travelled to places such as Panama where stem cell therapy is allowed was a 92 year old who needed a wheelchair to get around, had problems with his prostrate, lungs, kidneys, hips, heart, had trouble talking, and orthopedic problems. He was injected with ethically obtained adult stem cells and over the next few months and following years he was soon walking, his ailments healing, pain dissipated, his speech and eyesight improved, and his cognition improved. He’s now 99 years old, and supposedly even has his libido back. In both cases they both may have looked a thousand years old, wrinkled and nearly dead, but inside they undoubtedly were not. Similarly, just watch Mick Jagger prowling about upon a stage wailing his heart out, singing songs he has been singing for over fifty years, and how is it, no disrespect, that Keith Richards is still alive.

Back to us wee ones in the neo-natal nursery, another procedure and another reason to cry, is because we are often given an injection of vitamin K. This started when forceps deliveries were common, to help prevent bleeding in the brain due to the extra trauma to the baby’s head from using basically pliers to pull us out. But, despite the fact that forceps deliveries have changed, and occur less frequently, vitamin K is still given to prevent bleeding problems. Some countries have newer policies of when to provide vitamin K as opposed to doing it routinely.

The onslaught continues, while I can’t imagine what was done in previous centuries and eons to keep us alive, especially when in the past the infant mortality rate was atrocious. Ever onward, a small blood sample is taken by poking us in the bottom of the foot to screen for some serious, but often very rare metabolic diseases, including Phenylketonuria (PKU) a genetic disorder. What exactly is being tested for varies by state or province. We are pricked within the first twenty-four hours and then often need to return in a week for an addition test.

Then there is the universal immunization against Hepatitis B, even if our mothers test negative for it. Hepatitis B is a viral infection that can lead to chronic liver infections, as well as such things as cirrhosis and hepatocellular carcinoma. Some ask why babies are given vaccines for Hepatitis-B, when it is picked up through unprotected sex and needle use. Then by the time they are teens they no longer have protection when they do become sexually active. Upon birth a baby is given 250 macro-grams of the neuro-toxin aluminum. The highest daily adult dosage is 50 macro-grams. This vaccine is mandatory where available and is given either at birth or at the two month check up. In California, a child who is vaccinated for Hepatitis-B can go to school, but a child that does not cannot.

It is strongly advised that children get vaccinated starting at two months of age and that the recommended schedule be followed. The pharmaceutical companies that come up with these vaccines promise they protect children against diseases that can cause serious illness, long-term disability and death. All together from birth to six years old we receive fourteen vaccination shots. Playing the field so to speak, just in case and you never know, Chickenpox, Diphtheria, Haemophilus influenzae type b, Hepatitis B, Influenza, Measles, Meningococcal, Mumps, Pertussis (whooping cough), Pneumococcal, Polio, Rotavirus, Rubella and Tetanus. Today the big Pharma lobbyists are pushing their respective governments to call for mass medication “prevention” programs, and claim they will improve the health of citizens, while also pushing for heavy medication upon children and teens, while their brains are still developing. As of 2018, vaccine manufacturers, specifically Merck, share in the over $85 billion of the “outsourced healthcare logistics market”. This is expected to increase to $105 billion by 2021. Merck is also interestingly enough, a major backer of the transgender movement.

Not all vaccinations are bad, but they do disrupt and/or degrade our immune system. Though eating a healthy balanced diet builds a healthy immune system, few are able to accomplish this today. And in our toxic world one needs a fortified immune system. As it is, people with allergies, infections, cancers, asthma, suicide, anxiety, depression and autism are all on the rise, with vaccine auto-immunity causing chronic health problems. In a recent report of which 3,345 cases were studied, 715 were not vaccinated; there was only one case of autism. Another report showed that people who were on a vaccine-friendly plan (choosing certain vaccinations) only one out of 440 patients was autistic. Yet the American Center for Disease Control states there is one case of autism for every 45 people not vaccinated. In the 1980s medical students were not even taught about autism. Personally, growing up I do not recall ever meeting or seeing an autistic person. In the 1990s it started to become an issue, mostly because vaccinated children are sicker than non-vaccinated children.

And finally most of us are given a hearing test using wee little headphones or microphones, to see how we react to sounds. But before being released out into the world, some of us boys were taken aside, and for either cultural, religious, or social reasons, had our foreskins cut off.

The practice of circumcision is thought to be at least fifteen thousand years old. Today circumcision is probably the most common surgical procedure on children worldwide, yet it is not a medically necessary procedure. It’s most common in the US, parts of Africa and the Middle East, while less common in Europe and other countries. The most common reasons for removing the foreskin off the head of penises are religious traditions and trends. The religious laws of both Judaism and Islam require that boys be circumcised. Jewish boys get to go through the experience when they are eight years old, for Muslim boys between seven and nine. Other reasons to circumcise include, the myth that it will reduce the likelihood of developing herpes or syphilis or other medical conditions or infections, the desire of some fathers to have their sons look like them, personal choice, and aesthetic preference. And in Canada, at least in BC, such a procedure is not free either. As for the later I know a fellow who had to have a circumcision for a medical issue, when he was twenty-seven. He said he cursed his parents every morning when he would awake with a morning need to go pee hard-on, which kept tearing the stitches. I’ve heard and read other stories where having a foreskin adds to the sexual experience for the man, yet not having one is more attractive to females.

The procedure is most often performed from twenty-four to seventy-two hours after birth. We boys are splayed out on our backs, with arms and legs secured, like being readied for dismemberment or beheading, by the English in the 13th century. An anesthetic is given via injection or cream, to numb the penis, the foreskin is opened, adhesions are removed, and the foreskin is separated from the glans (the bulb). After that, a circumcision device may be placed over the bulb and the foreskin is cut off. There are three different types of such devices commonly used and all look like devices invented and used during the European inquisitions around the same 13th and 14th centuries to torture people. They include the “Gomco clamp”, the “Plastibell device”, and the ever popular, “Mogen clamp”. Each device works by cutting off circulation to the foreskin to prevent bleeding when the doctor cuts the foreskin. The entire procedure takes about fifteen to thirty minutes. Afterwards, bewildered by the pain and trauma, our mothers are told to expect us to be “fussy” over the seven to ten days it takes to heal.

For females there is no reason whatsoever for any circumcision to be performed, though today in the Western world the cutting has been replaced with piercings, tattoos and such. Unless of course you happen to live east to west from Somalia to Senegal, and north to south from Egypt to Tanzania, in Africa, which covers twenty-seven countries, as well as Indonesia, Iraqi Kurdistan and Yemen, and many immigrant communities in North America, Europe and the Commonwealth, where female genital mutilation is prevalent and customary. Recent estimates show that about two hundred million women have undergone the procedures. Girls are most commonly cut shortly after birth to age fifteen, with most cut when they turn five.

The procedures are generally performed by a traditional circumciser or “cutter”, in the girls’ homes with or without anaesthesia. The cutter is usually in no way a medical professional, but often an older woman, town barber or butcher, or cleric who uses non-sterile devices, including knives, razors, scissors, glass, sharpened rocks and fingernails, which they often use multiple times without cleaning between jobs. While procedures differ according to the country or ethnic group, they include removal of the clitoral hood and clitoral glans; removal of the inner labia; removal of the inner and outer labia, and the closure of the vulva. In this last procedure, known as infibulation, a small hole is left for the passage of urine and menstrual fluid. Later the vagina is opened for intercourse and opened further if needed for childbirth.

Back once again to our births, and perhaps wanting to forget what was just read by slowly uncurling our toes and exhaling, twenty-four to forty-eight hours after a vaginal birth, with no complications from mother or baby, we get to go home. For a caesarean birth, if no complications, it’s a forty-eight to seventy-two hours wait until discharge. According to our biology, anatomy, and chromosomes we will be designated either a boy or a girl, and later according to psychological and chemical differences, a very few will be boys who feel like girls and girls who feel like boys. Only later will society dictate one’s gender according to a set of expectations, standards, and characteristics about how men and women are supposed to act.

I was born at Royal Columbian Hospital in New Westminster, and weighed in at seven pounds six ounces, to a twenty year old 11th generation Scottish American/Canadian mother and a twenty-two year old 3rd generation Belgian-Canadian father. Their lineages were simple hard working folk, farmers, ranchers, and pioneers. And often were restrained and respected leaders in their communities.

My father drove my mother, with me in her arms, home safely in his 52’ Chevy with no seat belts or due dated baby car seat, listening to either Conway Twitter or Elvis on the radio. They would quickly have to learn how to hold me and support my neck with, I’m sure, mostly my Mom having to change all my diapers, bathe, dress, and swaddle, soothe, and goo-goo gaa-gaa to me. Then there is the feeding, and burping, which for some weeks, is at least every two to three hours, including over night, with graveyard shifts. The cleaning around our belly buttons after being unplugged, and for many males, caring for our healing circumcisions. Our temperatures are taken, and turkey basters filled with water are used to clear our nasal passages when needed. We cried and we laughed and began to learn things because every moment was new. It was in many ways perhaps the best days of our lives, if we could only remember.

11/4/19

The Innards and Machinations of Agenda 21

Part Two of Inside Agenda 21 and 30

A 35 page Dense Essay

“If you don’t have a plan, you become part of somebody else’s plan.” Terence McKenna

Much like when the old snake oil merchant used to ride into town. Agenda 21’s goals and targets were deemed critically important for both, the great improvement in our personal lives and for the world being transformed into a better place. And all to be accomplished by 2030 or it’s all over, all bets off the table. So they bark from atop their loudly lit wagon instilling fear into our hearts.

It is a conspiracy, not a theory, but fact. Agenda 21 is an inventory and control plan of all things; food, land, water, energy, minerals, plants, animals, construction, all means of production, information, and all people. It is a plan for the destruction of representative government, and for unelected regional boards to take its place. It is mostly driven because the current and past lifestyle consumption patterns of a once large affluent middle class (the baby boomers) are no longer sustainable. Consumption patterns that the globalists created, but now deemed a problem. A classic “problem reaction solution”, where a problem is purposely created, and when the public react and scream for something to be done, the solution becomes the perceived or otherwise problem. So because of our meat intake, consumption of frozen processed convenient food, use of fossil fuels, use of motor vehicles, air-conditioning, a huge inventory of small electrical appliances and suburban housing, but a few examples, the globalists will make it sustainable not by getting rid of such things, but by controlling such things. There are many ways they are going to go about this; one of the ways is to move everyone into surveillance managed and controlled cities and regional centers. But first, and because absolute power is being able to control what people think about what happens, the Agenda’s first tenet is all about people. The agenda is “determined to end poverty and hunger, in all their forms and dimensions, and to ensure that all human beings can fulfill their potential in dignity and equality and in a healthy environment”. As to how to go about this, to be determined by a select few.

The Agenda’s second tenet concerns the planet Earth, where they “are determined to protect the planet from degradation, including through sustainable consumption and production, sustainably managing its natural resources and taking urgent action on climate change, so that it can support the needs of the present and future generations”.

Moving on to prosperity, they “are determined to ensure that all human beings can enjoy prosperous and fulfilling lives and that economic, social and technological progress occurs in harmony with nature”. Tenet four is all about peace, “to ensure that all human beings can enjoy prosperous and fulfilling lives and that economic, social and technological progress occurs in harmony with nature”.

The final tenet lies with partnership, to ensure that the purpose of the new Agenda is realized. “To mobilize the means required to implement this Agenda through a revitalized Global Partnership for Sustainable Development, based on a spirit of strengthened global solidarity, focused in particular on the needs of the poorest and most vulnerable and with the participation of all countries, all stakeholders and all people”.

The drivers of these tenets are four main sections of the Agenda. (My comments within the parenthesis).

-Social and Economic Dimensions, meaning “combating poverty (combating the poor), especially in developing countries, changing (controlling) consumption patterns, promoting health (numbing pain), achieving a more sustainable (smaller) population, and sustainable settlement in decision making” (they will decide for us).

-Conservation and Management of Resources for Development, which covers “atmospheric protection (through geo-engineering projects), combating deforestation, protecting fragile environments (by forcefully removing people from them), conservation of biological diversity (control private property), control of pollution (only in Western nations) and the management of biotechnology, and radioactive wastes”.

-Strengthening the Role of Major Groups, (through diversity) including the roles of children and youth, women, NGOs, local authorities, business and industry, and workers; and strengthening the role of indigenous peoples, their communities, and farmers (by subsidizing them all).

-Means of Implementation, “science, technology transfer (control patents), education, international institutions and financial mechanisms”, which will all be covered below.

Much of the Agenda is being implemented at the local level. In 1990, the International Council for Local Environmental Initiatives (ICLEI) or Local Governments for Sustainability was formed. It is an international organization that helps to implement Agenda 21 concepts across the world. Building a global network of cities, towns and regions committed to building a sustainable future.

Today, the ICLEI network includes more than 1,750 local and regional governments in more than 100 countries. The only requirements for ICLEI membership are a self-defined commitment to climate protection and the payment of annual membership dues based on population size. They also give out millions of dollars in grants, but you must first cede any decision making to them. Hundreds if not thousands of city and town councils abide by their directions.

While European countries, especially the Scandinavian countries have generally been the most obedient and accepting of Agenda 21, the US has nearly half of the ICLEI’s global membership of 1,200 cities, (528 cities/75 per cent of their cities), all promoting sustainable development at a local level. Australia is second with over 90 of its municipalities adopting the Agenda’s plan. The ICLEI representatives/handlers in these communities assist local governments to push for change along five interconnected “pathways” that cut across sectors and jurisdictional boundaries, and which enable “local and regional governments to think and design solutions in a holistic and integrated way, creating change across entire urban systems”. The pathways they push include, “low emission, nature-based, circular, resilient, and equitable and people-centered developments”.

While Agenda 21 has infiltrated at the local level, the 2030 Agenda is more a global plan. As mentioned earlier, the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development was adopted by 193 UN member states in September 2015. The remaining three of the world’s 196 countries, Kosovo, the Vatican and the State of Palestine, are not a part of the UN so were not allowed to vote. So basically it was all in, and here we go. Notably, looking around the world over the past four years, since its inception , I can’t be the only one who thinks somebody has cranked up the crazy meter. Especially after the shock created when just over a year after 2030 Agenda was signed, instead of the expected Hillary, President Trump was elected.

The globalists plan for transforming the world relies on 17 points. With the word “sustainability” to be repeated to death so that we can all believe. And not wanting to take up too much of your time, I’ll give an overview of each point, with examples, and hopefully you get the drift. It may perhaps answer some of the, often befuddling decisions being made in our towns, communities, cities and regions.

1. “End poverty everywhere.”

By way of welfare, food stamps, housing subsidies, universal basic income (UBI), Planned Parenthood, abortion, and other handouts. In fact, the overall poverty rate is actually dropping globally, mostly because of free-market capitalism, not socialism. Socialism is where everyone except the elite make $30,000 per year. Capitalism, and not corporatism, is where some can make $50,000 and some can make millions, if they worked hard enough for it. And the rest live on welfare, unemployment insurance, disability, or the soon to be universal basic income.

While capitalism at it’s base is where natural resources, energy and human labour go in one end and commodities and waste comes out the other, it is the opposite of how nature and ecosystems work. When resources are depleted the game is over. The planet is indifferent to our existence for it doesn’t need us to survive. But capitalism, not fascist corporatism-globalism, is still our best bet. It has been estimated that at the end of the 18th century, when industrialization began to rise and eventually bring forth labour laws that modernized and humanized the workplace and eradicated most child-killing diseases, about 90 per cent of the planet’s population at the time (800 million people) lived in poverty. The average life expectancy was 30 years. Today less than 10 per cent of the global population of 7.7 billion live in poverty, with the average life expectancy 70 years.

While the problem with socialism, especially Bolshevism, is it does not take into account human nature, nor the fact we are not equal. It operates by taxing the wealthy and making everyone poor, except of course for the elite at the top, who control all industry and commerce. Instead everyone is treated the same, no matter who you think you are. At the same time, being an individual has been programmed into us so much because it has paradoxically been used to only divide us. Eventually, if your not paid for being an individual, being one will be looked down upon.

In reality under present corrupt economic and government policy, more and more people are falling deeper into debt and extreme poverty. Because the present economy in most developed nations, only works for 30 per cent of the population, with tens of millions of people already mathematically eliminated. Statistical fraud by the government on poverty, cost of living and unemployment, cannot cover up the fact that the overwhelming majority of the population is on a fast track to impoverishment.

In the US there are only enough full-time jobs for 50 per cent of the working-age population, and half of the full-time jobs pay under $35,000 per year. “In current conditions, it is nearly impossible for perhaps 70 per cent of the working-age population are hard-pressed to earn enough income to afford the basic necessities without taking on ever-increasing levels of debt. And in many cases unable to ever pay back because there are not enough jobs that generate the necessary income to keep up with the cost of living”. Ergo, hamsters on a wheel in a cage.

The US government’s inane policies and actions in dealing with the growing epidemic of poverty couldn’t be more blatant. Cut billions of dollars from assistance programs and pour billions of dollars into the military, subsidizing corporations, and the prison industry. To also control the impoverished by militarizing the police. The private prison industry in the US is currently growing at an insane 1600 per cent rate. This is not a typo. Even though technology can now make it so we can be imprisoned, and monitored just as much, in our own homes. As it is, the US has the largest prison population in the world. Especially since in many inner-cities, poverty has become criminalized, with an assembly line of incarceration now in place. From birth, by a lack of family values, and indoctrinated through the public school system. Besides, the globalists feel that there’s no point in educating the poor because there is nothing for them to do. All told, in the US, 42 percent of children born to poor families will still be in poverty as adults, a higher percent than in any other advanced nation.

There is enough wealth in the world today to eliminate poverty. That there is poverty makes no economic sense whatsoever. It costs society more to have poverty than it costs to eliminate it. That is the insanity of the current system. Political candidates and parties spend billions of dollars to be elected to represent the poor. At the same time, the planet doesn’t have the resources for every human on it’s surface to become “middle class”.

Universal basic income conveniently, is where everyone, regardless of their earnings or employment, receive regular checks from their government instead of receiving any benefits. To be eligible, one must have citizenship, and vetted, as for one’s availability for the labour market and/or the willingness to perform community services. Those for it believe it will offset and counter the jobs lost due to automation and computerization by taxing private business. And will “free humanity from the burden of working hard”. Such a scheme could also replace the complex arrangement of government benefits, rebates and tax rebates. And supposedly everyone will have at least enough to eat, have available fresh water, able to clothe themselves, and able to rent a roof over their heads.

Currently, only about 9 per cent of jobs are at risk of disappearing because of automation, with unskilled workers the most vulnerable. Some estimates suggest 50 per cent of jobs will be automated in 10 years. A very recent study (Sept.2019) showed that most who are for UBI are 18 to 29 years old. The study also shows that 75 per cent in the US, 53 per cent in the UK and only 49 per cent in Canada would be willing to pay any extra taxes to fund such a project. The majority in the study, in all three of these countries, agreed that companies who switch to automation should have to pay more in taxes to do so. Which they gladly will pay of course, because of the money saved by going automated, while the government will add the incoming money to their coffers, perhaps even using it to subsidize fossil fuel companies, while people will still lose their jobs.

Many believe that UBI will reduce the incentive to work, or for one to live up to their potential. It would no doubt be inflationary, and that by attempting to move people out of poverty might simply raise the poverty line. It is a scheme, which will make the majority of the population permanent wards of the state. There is also concern that by reducing taxable income for the many will reduce a government’s ability to cover other expenses, like health care or a universal basic income. There is also worry that it will cause perpetual economic stagnation, higher interest rates, currency depreciation, and onerous tax hikes. And though some countries are already trying the idea, in April 2018, and only two years after Finland implemented such an experiment, they have decided to shut it down. Mostly because it became a question of where’s the money going to come from.

Yes, for some, being able to rent a roof over their head and able to lock the front door, have enough to eat, have medical insurance, afford internet access fees, hydro, and the opportunity to attend the occasional gatherings of friends and family would relieve much stress. And having the freedom to spend eight or more hours a day doing something you have a passion for and would like to share with others, would be wonderful. But which also means having a work ethic, and the dedication and discipline to do such a thing. And yes, with the option of still working in a job you really enjoy or climbing some corporate ladder, one can fill one’s boots, and make all the money you think you’ll need. Won’t necessarily bring happiness, but makes it easier to pretend you are, and at least will keep you busy.

In reality, things will stay much the same. The gifted, creative and driven will continue walking their roads, while the majority will take what is given, and spend more time online, and in front of an ever enlarging TV screen, and soon will be staring at the wall. Any money left over wasted buying a better phone, then spending the better part of the day staring at it. Indulging in as many distractions as one can. Filling up each moment of one’s day. Perhaps gaining ever more weight, needing more health care, and giving more money than they did before to the wealthiest people on the planet by buying their stuff and once again racking up debt. All to be told what to watch, what game to play, what to wear, what story to follow, what to eat and drink, and how to act and think.

There will still be serious mental and physical health issues, fewer people educated, addictions running rampant and increasing distractions. The problem with such a concept as UBI is the same problem with Gross Domestic Product (GDP), (the sum of the market values, or prices, of all final goods and services produced in an economy during a period of time). Work is not just a means of subsistence, it is a moral psychological necessity for individual and community well being. But universal basic income is not just another type of socialism either; instead it’s just another type of control to keep the status quo docile and tamed. Just like the soon to be, negative interest rate, and making physical currency illegal. It’s all created to benefit some and harm many others, but most importantly, to control the herd.

2.“End hunger by achieving food security and improved nutrition and promote sustainable agriculture.”

Meaning, giving the poor, food that will bring them heart disease and cancer, thus simply getting rid of the hungry. Promote Genetically Modified Organisms (GMO), a laboratory process where genes from the DNA of one species are extracted and artificially forced into the genes of an unrelated plant or animal. The foreign genes may come from bacteria, viruses, insects, animals or even humans. Most engineering genetic pollination and cross species genetic experiments, are all carried out with no idea of long term consequences. But many tests where rats are fed strictly GMO food, by the 3rd generation they are all sterile, as will all who follow. The globalists are giddy about such an outcome.

The World Economic Forum, based in Cologny-Geneva, Switzerland, is an NGO, founded in 1971, with a membership of 1,000 multinationals corporations. Through a partnership between the Earth Bio-Genome Project and the Earth Bank of Codes are collaborating to sequence the DNA of all life on earth. It was estimated to take ten years and cost $4.7 billion.

In June 2018, one of the world’s most morally corrupt corporations, the chemical and medicinal suppliers, Bayer AG, purchased the other most morally corrupt corporation in the world, the agrichemical giant, Monsanto, for $66 billion, thereby controlling over one quarter of the global medicinal and agriculture industry, and are ever increasing the usage of ever more deadly herbicides and genetically modified food. A recent report (2019) found that roughly of all produce sold in the US has pesticide residue on it, even after it is washed. Especially most fruit, whether nectarines, apples, grapes, peaches, cherries and pears. The Center for Disease Control (CDC) figures at least 90 per cent of North Americans have detectable pesticide levels in their urine and blood.

Another scathing new report from Food & Water Watch, outlines the madness of Monsanto. Their seeds are genetically engineered to withstand the massive, growing amounts of herbicides and pesticides, and artificial growth hormones, created and used by themselves. Such genetically modified seeds are grown on over 282 million acres worldwide, including 40 per cent of US farmland. In the US alone Monsanto earns over $11 billion in net sales, while spending over $60 million over the past two years lobbying the US government. The report found that indeed, as we’ve known for decades now, “Monsanto has become synonymous with the corporatization and industrialization of our food supply.”

Automation and technological centralization will undoubtedly take over the food industry, while tillage (plowing) of land, will probably soon be not allowed, and portrayed as an “unsustainable” practise by humans. With sadness is the fact that we will then have destroyed future generation’s ability to grow and harvest food, as well as collecting seeds for future harvests, by erasing such knowledge from our social memory. As we have already done by removing our knowledge and ability to hunt and forage to provide the necessities needed to survive.

Just over one hundred years ago about 80 per cent of the people on the planet were still living rural, in counties, towns, and on farms. The rest lived in the big-cities. Farming was hard work, some risk, and for most it became a passion. Truly providing for family and community. The smell of hay, dirt and manure, and killing animals which were raised, to eat them and use their hides.

Today, recent calculations show that there is about 1.9 hectares of arable land per person to supply the food and resources and absorb that human’s waste over a year. In reality, the average human on the planet uses about 2.3 hectares worth. Comparatively, the average American needs about 9.7 hectares for their resources and waste, the average African, less than half a hectare. Canada, with more land to grow food than every other country in the world, except one (Russia), has to import more than 80 per cent of all the fruit, vegetables, and nuts, she consumes. In the 1970’s the province of British Columbia, grew 75 per cent of it’s own food, today (2019) and because of globalism, it barely grows 5 per cent.

Actual food has become nothing but a commodity and is not distributed on the basis of need but in accordance with market demand. In other words, the paying consumer rather than the hungry human is the target of corporate food production. And though humanity produces more food than at any other time in history; we waste 40 per cent of it. And in most cases the reason for it is because of our expectations and demand for high-quality food that must be pleasing to the eye. Similar to how humans interact with each other, North American supermarket chains reject over 30 per cent of all fruits and vegetables because they aren’t attractive enough.

Canadians alone waste over $31 billion dollars worth of food every year, 47 per cent of which gets wasted at home. At the same time over 13 per cent of Canadians (4 million people) do not have reliable access to adequate amounts of safe, good-quality, nutritious food. Along with extreme inequality and distribution, one of the main reasons being they are poor, and because the food that is good for you, as with all things good for us, is not cheap.

Meanwhile, and yet another paradox, nearly 800 million people in the world are starving. That’s about one in nine people on Earth. The vast majority of the world’s hungry people live in developing countries, where 12.9 per cent of the population is undernourished, yet at the same time there are over one billion people in the world who are obese, and over 1.6 billion people who are overweight.

Globally, only 10 companies control almost every large food and beverage brand. And speaks volumes on our consumption habits and health. They include;

Nestlé ($87 billion annual revenue), and among many other items, owns Gerber baby food, Perrier, DiGiorno, Hot Pockets, and candy brands including Butterfinger and KitKat. And seem to have a global monopoly on bottled water.

PepsiCo ($63 billion) which in addition to Pepsi and other sodas, also owns brands such as Quaker Oatmeal, Cheetos, and Tropicana.

Unilever ($59 billion) has a diverse list of brands including Axe body spray, Lipton tea, Magnum ice cream, and Hellmann’s mayonnaise.

Coca-Cola ($44 billion) is moving beyond soda, with beverage brands including Dasani, Fuze, and Honest Tea. And are also trying to gain a monopoly on bottled water.

Mars ($33 billion) is best known for its chocolate brands, such as M&M, but it also owns Uncle Ben’s rice, Starburst, and Orbit gum.

Mondelez ($30 billion), this snack-centric company’s brands include Oreo, Trident gum, and Sour Patch Kids.

Danone ($25 billion) is best known for yogurts like Activa, Yocrunch, and Oikos. They also sell medical nutrition products and bottled water.

General Mills ($17 billion) produce cereals like Cheerios and Chex, but also owns brands like Yoplait, Hamburger Helper, Haagen-Dazs, and Betty Crocker.

Associated British Foods ($16 billion). This British company owns brands such as Dorset Cereals and Twinings tea, as well as the retailer Primark.

And Kellogg’s ($13.5 billion) which owns Froot Loops, Frosted Flakes, and non cereal brands including Eggo, Pringles, and Cheez-It.

And while millions of small farmers are still producing the majority of the planets’ food, the transnational companies who favour global food chains rather than local, and their chemical-intensive industrial farming practices, are gaining ever more ground. To affirm, between 2003 and 2013, 33 per cent (4 million) of private farms in the European Union disappeared. Gobbled up by corporations. Today only three per cent of the chemical-intensive industrial farms control over 50 per cent of the European Union’s agricultural land. The same thing is happening in America where bankrupt farms are not purchased by other farmers but by corporations. Farmers all over the globe are having their livelihoods taken away from them, and are sadly taking their own lives. American farmers now have the highest suicide rate of any other profession in the US (84.5 per 100,000), more than four times the rate of the general population. And even though not one new food staple has been developed from a wild plant since prehistoric times, today biotech and agribusiness corporations, such as Monsanto, have taken out patents on crop seeds, genetically modified or not, and even some animals, which they claim to have “invented”.

The world’s largest crop today is not as in the past, a cereal, it is sugarcane – surprise. Corn is the second largest food crop, with rice number three. But rice is the most important grain, as it provides over one-fifth of the calories consumed by humans worldwide. As to calories, today about four billion people live on a plant-based diet, while about two billion live on a meat-based diet.

Though not a grain, but a legume, soybean is another important crop to humanity but is unfortunately being grown where rain forests once stood, with over 80 per cent of its production being used to feed livestock. But by far the world’s biggest feed-grain is corn. Yes, it and bubble gum being two of the few things able to pass through a digestive system unscathed.

The US is the leading producer and exporter of corn, accounting for four-fifths of the total world grain harvest. They use 56 per cent of their available water to grow such crops. Globally the US corn crop exceeds China’s rice and wheat harvests combined, with twice as much corn grown than rice. Thirty-seven per cent of all corn production is used for creating ethanol, with bio-fuel production having grown 300,000 per cent (again, not a typo) in the last ten years, converting ever more land from farming food to production of fuel. Approximately one bushel (approx. 30 L) of corn produces 10.5 liters of ethanol, nearly 8 kg of waste (which is used for livestock feed) and 8.1 kg of carbon dioxide. With over 10 per cent of corn production going to syrup, sweeteners, starch, beverage alcohol and cereals, while the rest continues to be used as simple filler for manufactured foods and for feeding livestock.

The predominate insecticide (neonicotinoids) used on many corn and soy crops, affects bees and other insects’ central nervous system, and is considered one of the main causes for the loss of more than 30 per cent of bees across North America. China and the Europe are also experiencing bee colonies dying off, as well as further loss from mites, viruses, climate conditions and habitat loss. What is now called colony collapse disorder might be the start to imminent extinction for the honey bee, which plays an important role in pollination. Its extinction alone would be disastrous for the food chain.

Today, animal pastureland which corrals and processes the world’s 20 billion chickens, 1.6 billion cows and bulls, and one billion pigs and sheep, now accounts for over 40 per cent of the planet’s usable surface. The bulk of which, is in China, US, India and Australia. Not counting the trillions of fish, crustaceans and molluscs harvested or caught, the total biomass of the world’s livestock is nearly twice that of humanity. Weighing twice as much as we do, taking twenty times as much land and crops, and using hundreds of times more water to grow.

To grow a half a kilogram of edible animal products on say one acre of land, you could instead grow twelve to twenty times the amount in kilograms of edible vegetables, fruit, and grain. Today, nearly 2,000 cattle, chickens, pigs and sheep are slaughtered every second for food, about 500 billion a year, and worth about $1 trillion a year. With humanity eating 25 per cent more meat than five years ago, it is estimated that the demand for meat will double over the next fifteen to twenty years, and that by 2050, as our population rises along with land costs, real meat will be a luxury item. While fake meat will not be, and “soylent green” not so far-fetched. Soon meat will be taxed as much as cigarettes, gas, and sugar.

The Environmental Working Group (EWG) recently analyzed data which the National Antimicrobial Resistant Monitoring System (2015) received after testing 47,000 pieces of meat sold in supermarkets, including beef, chicken, pork and turkey. And though the tests were conducted in the US, much of the same meat is sold throughout the world. Where animals enclosed within corporate factory farms, live in such stressful, crowded and unsanitary conditions they must be fed huge quantities of antibiotics to survive, and grow more quickly. The data shows antibiotic resistant bacteria in 79 per cent of turkey samples, 71 per cent of pork chops, 62 per cent of beef and 36 per cent of chicken parts. Suffice to say, children, pregnant women, older adults or the immune compromised, beware.

Today there has been extensive research on synthetic agriculture, where molecules replace dirt, animals, land, and hard work. But before something like this can go forward, certain fundamentals should be met, Such as affordability, nutrition, and taste. When this criterion is met we’ll all buy into it in the name of “sustainability”.

3. “Ensure healthy lives and promote the well being of all people at all ages” (pharmaceutically).

An industry that is not about curing anything, but instead, is all about making money to mitigate the pain and trying to stave off death. Globalism has created a health care system that has become simply disease treatment, operating with a lack of resources for the mentally ill, and a manufactured ignorance about addiction because people aren’t willing to go through the “hell and back” stage it takes to recover. Throw in rising costs of living, the lowering of our morals, the destruction of the family, modern homelessness, and our consumption habits.

In the seventies, the globalists got many liberal and democratic governments to start shutting down facilities for the mentally ill, because they thought it would save them money. Instead the costs to deal with the increasing homeless and mentally-ill population, including the bulk of time and services spent by the police, medical personal, the court system and the health ministries, are over ten-fold over when they were living in places to keep them safe. Locking them all up on some remote island would be as much or far more costly. But as time went on, modern homelessness became where we stopped seeing people and instead started to only see problems. The causes are many, but are most all symptoms of a much deeper crisis. The society we live in and the continuing process of dehumanizing much of the population. The globalist’s have also instilled mass victimization, obedience, and hinder any upward mobility based on merit alone. And when we stray we are locked up in prisons, or driven broke defending our innocence.

Tens of millions of people in the developed world who have been suffering mentally, could have perhaps been cured by now if it were not for the doctor and pharmaceutical salesmen induced prescription epidemic of drugs such as methylphenidates, a dopamine re-uptake inhibitor drug, which include the brand names, Ritalin, Concerta, Daytrana, Metadate and Methylin. Along with, anti-psychotic tranquilizing drugs, from Thorazine, Haldol, Prolixin, Clozapine, Abilify, Clozapine, Fanapt, Geodon, Invega, Risperdal, Saphris, Seroquel and Zyprexa. The most popular by far, are the anti-depressants, Prozac, Paxil, Zoloft, Celexa, and Lexapro. All simply distracting the pain instead of dealing with it. Whether depression or addiction from lack of spiritual care, trauma, or chemical imbalances, far too many people today are facing illness and grief by finding comfort and meaning through pills. Sadly the medicated are also less inclined to do something new, like to change and become a better person.

In the US, over 95 million people take prescription painkillers for chronic pain. But then for over fifty years now, “many people, usually middle-aged and elderly women, were prescribed opioid medications for the often most trivial conditions, personality inadequacies and social influences”. And then when sufficiently addicted, health insurance runs out and people have to get their supply elsewhere to feed the addiction. Getting big-Pharma to monopolize the opioid industry, and control the Afghan opium fields using the US military for nearly twenty years now, was brilliant. Especially now, when after people’s prescriptions runs out on their “pain relief”, they go the cheap route, heroin from the Afghan poppy fields.

The current cost for their prescription drug created opioid epidemic is more than $78 billion a year. The majority of this money is going to the makers of the prescription painkillers, by not fixing an injury, instead making it so we just don’t feel it, because we’re high. Other countries are also experiencing rising costs and deaths attributed to the opioid epidemic. But then, alcohol and tobacco are together, more than four times as costly to economies as the combined costs of opioids and cannabis. Americans are now dying more by overdoses than car accidents and guns. The highest drug-related death rates in the world today are in the US, Canada, and Mexico. In reality most people aren’t necessarily addicted to alcohol, porn, gambling or opioids and other drugs; they are addicted to escaping reality. And is why the supposedly War on Drugs, is actually a War on People.

Two recent studies showed that in Canada, and the US, over 60 per cent of the populations couldn’t cover a $500 emergency repair bill. Nor afford a single pill of a life-saving drug, such as for hepatitis, anti-infection, or the new multiple-sclerosis (MS) pill ($300,000 for a years prescription).

AARP (formerly the American Association of Retired Persons), a US-based non-profit interest group with more than 38 million members as of 2018, and whose stated mission is “to empower people to choose how they live as they age”, recently completed a study of 115 specialty drugs and found that the average cost of a year’s worth of prescriptions was over $50,000, three times more than the average Social Security benefit. Although it’s true that most people don’t pay the full retail cost of medicine, the portion paid by insurance companies is ultimately passed on to consumers through higher premiums. The companies claim they need the high prices to pay for better medicines. But for every $1 they spend on basic research, they invest $19 in promotion and marketing. They also pay competitors to keep generic drugs out of the market, and have successfully lobbied Congress to keep Medicare from bargaining for lower drug prices.

Another proponent of the Agenda is to call for mass medication “prevention” programs, and claim they will improve the health of citizens. To mandate over 100 vaccines to be administered to all babies, children and adults, with those not abiding will be taken somewhere and given the shot there, or physically restrained in their own home. And to push heavy medication upon children and teens while their brains are still developing. It is also strongly advised that children get vaccinated starting at two months of age and that the recommended schedule be strictly followed. The pharmaceutical companies that come up with these vaccines promise they protect children against diseases that can cause serious illness, long-term disability and death. As of today, from birth to six years old we receive fourteen vaccination shots.

As of 2018, vaccine manufacturers, specifically Merck, shared in the over $85 billion of the “outsourced healthcare logistics market”. This is expected to grow to $105 billion by 2021. U.P.S. will dispatch nurses, and their security, to vaccinate adults in their homes. Each vaccine will target a viral illness of some kind. Coincidentally Merck supposedly already has vaccines for shingles, Hepatitis-B and the flu. And just like any other business plan they want to increase access to its medicines and vaccines, by boosting adult vaccination rates. Meanwhile in 2018, the US government paid $100 million for vaccine injuries and death. Since 1989 they have paid out in excess of $4 billion.

Not all vaccinations are bad, but they do disrupt and/or degrade our immune system. Though eating healthy balanced food builds a healthy immune system, few accomplish this today. And in our toxic world one needs an immune system. As it is people with allergies, infections, cancers, asthma attacks, suicide, anxiousness, depression and autism are all on the rise, with vaccine auto-immunity, causing chronic health problems. Why are babies given vaccines for Hepatitis-B, when it is picked up through unprotected sex and needle use? Then by the time they are teens they no longer have protection when they do become sexually active. For this, upon birth a baby is given 250 macro-grams of the neuro-toxin aluminum. The highest daily adult dosage is 50 macro-grams. In many places, children who are not vaccinated for Hepatitis-B are not being allowed to even attend school.

In a recent report where 3,345 cases were looked at, 715 of which were not vaccinated; there was only one case of autism. Another report showed that people who were on a vaccine-friendly plan (choosing certain vaccinations), out of every 440 patients, one was autistic. But the gospel according to The Center of Disease Control, which everyone obediently abides by, states there is one case of autism every 45 people not vaccinated. Yet in the 1980’s, medical students were not even taught about autism. Personally, growing up in a big city I never saw it. In the 1990’s it starting becoming an issue. Mostly because vaccinated kids are sicker than non-vaccinated kids. Meanwhile, polio has been eradicated, babies don’t need to be vaccinated to prevent Hep-B, and as far as the measles, mumps, and rubella go, they are.

Besides germs, the leading health risks of our species today are high blood pressure, chronic illness and pain, alcohol, smoking, injuries, mental health conditions, and bone and joint disease. Mostly because seriously, we haven’t had to run around each day hunting and gathering for quite some time. We are mostly dying from the things that come into contact with our skin, lungs, and whatever we put into our mouths and brains. With most of us dying from heart disease, cancer, especially to the lungs and large intestine, respiratory diseases, dementia, unintended accidents caused by not being aware and in the moment, stroke, diabetes, flu and pneumonia, kidney disease and suicide, which sums up our species perfectly.

As to life and death, the latest estimates figure the planet’s human population will be about 9.5 billion by the year 2050, and perhaps 11 billion by 2100. Studies also suggest that while Africa’s population will grow, Asia’s population will peak in about 2050 at about 5 billion and then decline, while North America, Europe and Latin America’s population will stay below one billion each. Almost 45 per cent of the growth will be concentrated in countries that are the least able to feed themselves – Africa, Asia, and the Middle East. Currently two-thirds of the most malnourished people on Earth live in seven countries, and that over the next few generations there is going to be about one billion people born in these seven countries.

Today (Oct.2019) the world’s population is 7.7 billion people. This number is currently rising by over 130 million per year, about 10 million, per month. On the other hand nearly 60 million die every year. Over 48 per cent of them people over 70 years of age. And that 69 per cent of all deaths are from either our environment or what we ingest. Things like heart attacks and disease, cancers, respiratory and lower respiratory diseases, dementia, and digestive diseases. All the stuff corporations and our own consumption habits, have thrown at us. While the fears they instill in us, like drugs, alcohol, hepatitis, conflicts, terrorism, and natural disasters, are all less than one per cent of all deaths.

Any war certainly helps in more deaths and injury, which the US and the UK have gleefully provided. Ethnic cleansing also helps, and of course such events, as socialism in the 20th century, where Stalin’s Russia, Mao’s China and the killing fields of Cambodia, killed around 100 million people. Or Rwanda in 1994. Rwanda is the biggest Catholic country in Africa, and the world. Many of their priests, nuns and bishops, by radio, TV and sermons, incited violence which killed in just 100 days, about 800,000 people. Slaughtered by ethnic Hutu extremists, who were targeting members of the minority Tutsi community, as well as their political opponents, irrespective of their ethnic origin. Neighbours killed neighbours and some husbands even killed their Tutsi wives, saying they would be killed if they refused. At the time, ID cards had people’s ethnic group on them, so militias simply set up roadblocks where Tutsis were slaughtered, often with the weapons of choice, machetes. Thousands of Tutsi women were taken away and kept as sex slaves.

Also in Africa, and although the continent is home to about 15.2 per cent of the world’s population, more than two-thirds of the total infected worldwide with HIV/AIDS (35 million people as of 2017), were Africans, of whom 15 million have already died. The problem with Africa is that the best prevention is of course safer sexual behaviour, and emphasizes the need for fidelity, fewer sexual partners, and a later age of sexual debut. All of which goes against many aspects of many African cultures. And of course since many of the African cultures are predominately Catholic, condoms are deemed evil. Which certainly doesn’t help, and deeply disturbing.

Then there is tobacco, which globally is the cause of one in five deaths annually. Over 7 million deaths a year. On average, smokers die 10 years earlier than nonsmokers. In Canada, 17 to 18 per cent of all deaths are attributed to cigarettes. And yet, obviously putting any ethics aside, the Canadian government through it’s Canada Pension Plan (CPP), and through work and private pension funds and RRSP’s (registered retirement savings plans), over $1 billion is directly invested in big tobacco companies, including 35 per cent of vaping company Juul, and $118 million in Japan Tobacco.

4. “Ensure inclusive, equitable and quality education, and promote lifelong learning opportunities for all”

And yes of course there is indeed untold numbers of incredible teachers out there, but the typical unfocused mediocre underfunded but union driven public education system, is about producing obedient workers rather than independent thinkers. By way of the development of a dumbed-down education system operating under international “Common Core” educational standards. Such a system was established by the globalists in the early 1950’s and is set up to meet the needs of the average student despite any individual differences with their classmates, within an instructional construct. It’s curriculum, where students are expected to excel at everything in the same way and rate as their classmates. It is standardized against the average through test scores, which is odd because there is no average. And while the very few are still able to skip grades, everyone now graduates, deservedly or not. As a system that made every effort to produce equal outcomes for different categories of people, it has failed miserably. So today, the progressives and their globalists handlers are only left with plain coercion to force equal outcomes at all costs. This can be seen throughout society.

The money that could fund a better public education system is used elsewhere, to more important matters such as arms manufacturing or subsidizing their monopoly on oil. Challenging and disciplined academic education on the other hand is being left to private education, and those who can afford it. Because only through individualized curriculum can the greatest number of students will be able to learn anything. Yet colleges and universities, have made billions, sending millions into sometimes life long debt, with a degree that doesn’t mean anything in the real world, though at the least gives the person a sense of identity. With many of the same schools trying to eradicate objectivity and free from bias, individualism, a belief in meritocracy, a political system in which economic goods and/or political power are vested in individual people on the basis of talent, effort, and achievement, rather than wealth or social class, and finally having a protestant work ethic. All these values are now deemed the root cause of bigotry, and represent what is now called “white privilege”. Indeed, the core curriculum of most education systems today, whether in public or private, grade school, college or university, is politically influenced at the least, but mostly by blatant political propaganda. The only course that may still be an exception is mathematics.

Current education systems are partly based on the globalist’s belief in Malthusianism. Related to the idea that population growth is potentially exponential while the growth of the food supply is linear, and that the planet’s greatest enemy is human creativity. So allowing humanity from developing their minds, critically thinking, and experimental learning, in order to make more discoveries and inventions which could offset the current, and future world’s crises’, must not be allowed. Malthusians believe that science should only be used to understand and guide the welfare of mankind. And is why by 1971, instead of funding the curiosity and discovery in atomic, medical and space sciences, the globalists began funding practical engineering projects, such as the humanities, monetary economics and social sciences.

In the public education system, science, technology, engineering, and math (STEM) are disappearing. Mostly because these are hard things to do, they take work, discipline and focus. Many public school systems have become social clubs, where it’s all about participating and having fun, with as little stress as possible. For the vast majority, dancing, cooking, drama, school band, and sports have nothing to offer if one wants to apply for post-secondary programs, they are hobbies. Instead, teacher and former school board member Geoff Johnson, suggests maybe teaching science, civics, and history, which, after us baby boomers die off, will have already been completely rewritten anyways, with real history not to be spoken or else people might realize that they’d rather not repeat it. And to teach only an overview of math, especially algebra, which is all about thinking about numbers abstractly. Perhaps even courses on debating or public speaking, or economics, especially the dangers of illusory economics, and money management in a cashless society, debt and credit cards, what interest means, because it’s obvious many parents aren’t teaching such things anymore.

And yes a very few will have the dedication, work ethic and sacrifice what is required to be a world class athlete, artist, dancer, cook, lawyer or doctor, but the character of that person is already there or not. It doesn’t mean they are good people either, because success has never produced or developed character, it only expresses it. And that worthwhile achievement is its own reward.

The latest thing to drop out of the sky from those above, is the soon to arrive, Universal Child Day Care. They will then be able to start programming children before they even make it to kindergarten. Instead of just 13 years of kindergarten/elementary/high-school, they’ll now have one to two year old children for the next fifteen to sixteen years of their lives. Then when they are grown up and sufficiently indoctrinated in only one narrative, they will be no threat to the collective world order. The plan of course is to get people to chain themselves, by making them just smart enough to pay taxes, make them think voting actually means something, keep their head down, opinion to themselves, and that silence is golden. This is why the restructuring of the family unit has been going on for the past fifty years. Going after the family unit is the bedrock of the globalist’s plan, because family is the bedrock of civil life. For tens of thousands of years, it has been the smallest form of government. It is where children are taught how to become adults, and knowing both a mother’s love and a father’s, are taught about responsibility, respect, honesty, empathy for others, having a work ethic, love and forgiveness, and pride of one’s country or tribe. Thus family must be destroyed.

5.“Achieve gender equality”

By further dividing us as human beings. Criminalize Christianity, marginalize heterosexuals, and promote the very small minority of people, who are of the LBGTQ (lesbian, bisexual, gay, transgender and queer) communities.

The erosion of protestant Christianity, not the Roman Catholic Church version, is happening because everything is now corrupt. Whether the globalists or governments, its all about power and nothing to do with ethics anymore. For ethics does not exist in nature, it was mostly taught to us humans through such things as Christianity. So it must be gone. Writer Brandon Smith, says so well, “The difference between Christianity and capitalist corporatism, is the latter only uses the symbolic and avoids the meaning. This allows culture to define morality, instead of scripture. They have taken the symbols of Christianity, especially family values, and removed its substance.”

Meanwhile about 1.7 per cent of people born will have emotional systems which will make them either gay men or lesbian women. This has been occurring over the history of our species. If one were to add bisexuality and transgender, which are both not biological but psychological, the current LBGTQ community in some Western countries is about 4.5 per cent of the population. Besides LBGTQ’s there are also now over seventy other genders, with each having its own unique pronoun. Such singular gender neutral third person pronouns must now be used when someone’s gender is unknown or when the person is neither male nor female. So instead of he/him/his or she/her/hers, and even if the person may look like a woman or a man, the politically correct pronouns to use now are, they/them/theirs, and to further confuse, zie/hir/ey/em or eir, among many others. In some countries, including Canada, calling someone the improper pronoun is considered hate speech.

To further achieve gender equality the goal is to shame anyone who expresses any male characteristics, especially if they are white. Because only male energy has the strength to rise up against tyranny and oppression and fight for human rights. This must be curtailed. The suppression of male energy is instrumental in keeping the herd docile. Then slowly feminize society, create widespread acceptance of gentle disobedience, share everything, and weaken any ideas of communal property. Many progressives look down on women who dress sexually, but will clap and cheer when trans-men wear the same thing.

While the well used adage, “a woman born into a man’s body or a man born into a woman’s body” is false, for human sexuality is binary. Gender identity on the other hand are thoughts and feelings of our emotional system that do not match with one’s assigned sex, which are not hard-wired within us, they are developed.

Both males and females develop two emotional systems, based on the chemistry going on in our bodies: the mirror neuron system (MNS) and the temporal-parietal junction system (TPJ). The MNS is responsible for emotional empathy for others, while the TPJ guides cognitive empathy and the ability to distance oneself from another person’s emotions by focusing analytically on solving a problem. Both sexes start their empathy process in the MNS, but the male brain often quickly switches over to the TPJ.

Sex is a question of biologically determined male and female, while gender is socially determined masculinity and femininity. There are three categories of biological human sex: male, female, and intersex. The vast majority of humans are born with male or female reproductive systems, secondary sexual characteristics, and chromosomal structure, and there is a very small segment born with reproductive or sexual anatomy that doesn’t fit the definitions of female or male anomalies of sex chromosomes, gonads, and/or anatomic sex. Gender meanwhile is the state of being either masculine or feminine, and is typically used with reference to social and cultural differences rather than biological ones. Gender is fluid and based upon personal desire and sometimes surgery. Such determination of gender by the very few, now allows public financing for surgeries that destroys healthy tissue; and the use of potentially dangerous hormone/drug therapies, especially for children, while many a child’s gender is now determined by their parent, whether or not that child has a penis or a vagina.

Sadly, evidence suggests many of those who are having a hard time trying to figure out their gender, whether male or female, masculine or feminine, are also suffering from depression, with the suicide rate amongst themselves four times higher than the general population. All of which only further divides us as human beings.

As to the transgender movement, there are arguments being made today that it is an attempt to make it a civil right to have a mental illness, much like there is discussion lately that perhaps pedophilia should be listed as a sexual preference. And that perhaps it is acclimatizing the general public into familiarity for when we are interacting in our daily lives with AI machines. Who knows?

Yet, and also in reality, in most industrialized countries, rules, rights and laws are, and have been in place, where equality between the sexes should be no longer an issue. Everyone has the equal rights to make decisions on how they want to live their lives. Women rule over nations, and yield much influence and power working in government, and some become very successful in private business. As of 2019, the president, chairman and CEO of the largest arms manufacturers in the world, Lockheed Martin and General Dynamics, are women. Another one of the biggest, Northrop Grumman’s president/chairman is a women. The head of the CIA is a woman. As to the infamous “pay gap” between men and women. Bits of the data was selected and used, omitting, in nearly all cases, it was based on the fact that on average men work 42 hours per week, women on average work 32 hours per week. And on average men work riskier jobs, where the pay is higher, even for the women who also work such jobs.

Further to the differential qualities of men and women, brain scans, controlled studies, basic biology, chemistry, evolutionary psychology, and anthropology, all demonstrate that men and women are physically and mentally different. We absorb, process, and deliver information differently. And though we are all one consciousness but having different experiences, we also evolved with different priorities, and are immersed in different combinations of hormones. This leads to a varied interpretation and perception of reality, which is the root of the problems between male and female, within our families, and in the lives of our children. To remedy it, all one has to do is embrace the differences empathically, where equality only exists in compromising. Accept the reality that often and in many ways, men and women have pre-determined biological and psychological roles. Our differences are not always mutually exclusive, but we must face the fact that in some evolutionary way we complement each other so very much, and must not allow such a symbiotic nature of man and woman to be destroyed.

6. “Ensure availability and sustainability management of water and sanitation for all.”

Through privatization, allow a few corporations to become the “Water Division”. Free to seize and control the world’s water supplies and charge monopoly prices to build a new water delivery infrastructure that “ensures availability and sustainability”. Even if it means war with other countries to achieve. The monolithic corporation Nestle Foods, owns over 8,000 brands of water around the world. Such a new water delivery system has turned out to be the more than one million plastic water bottles humanity drinks each and every minute of each and every day. With less than 15 per cent of them actually recycled.

As it stands today, 70 per cent of the Earth’s surface is water, of this, only two per cent is fresh groundwater, 99 per cent of which is not available fresh drinking water, but instead water that is stored in lakes, rivers, swamps, glaciers and ice sheets. The Antarctic ice sheet itself holds about 60 per cent of the Earth’s fresh water supply.

The minimum amount of water a human needs to survive in a moderate climate with average activity level is about five liters per day. The minimum amount of water needed for drinking, cooking, bathing and sanitation combined, is about 50 liters per day, per person, and as a general rule, each person should have safe drinking water available less than fifteen minutes away. But in many parts of the world these minimums are still not being reached, and in fact are declining, with the supply of these basic needs being the most affected by the planet’s changing climate and pollution.

The United Nations Environment Program, reports that 450 million people in 29 countries currently suffer from water shortages, and by 2025 an estimated 2.8 billion people (20 per cent of world’s population) will be living in areas that will have increasingly scarce water supplies. After 2050 it is predicted that perhaps 40 per cent of the world’s population will be living in areas of severe water shortage. Other estimates suggest that anywhere from 768 million to 3.5 billion people currently have no access to fresh water due to diminishing groundwater supplies, 2.5 billion live without decent sanitation, and over 4 billion are without wastewater disposal. At the same time over 20 per cent of the world’s aquifers are already over-exploited, further degrading the wetlands which purify water supplies.

Americans and Canadians use 250 to 350 liters of water per day per person for drinking, cooking, showering, washing, cleaning, flushing toilets and watering lawns. In the Netherlands, they use just over 100 liters per day, while in Gambia, in Africa, they use only 4.5 liters per day. Overall, half the 7.6 billion people on the planet use about 94 liters of water per day for all their needs. And while about 85 per cent of the fresh water that is available on the planet is used by only 12 per cent of the population of the world, more than 12 million people die each year from lack of water.

In June 2018, in Cape Town, South Africa (nearly half a million people), water rationing was set at 50 liters per person per day. The minimum amount a person needs per day. An average shower (8 minutes) uses about 65 liters of water, in Cape Town people are down to 90 second showers, with many skipping days in between. A typical load of laundry uses 150 L, while a dishwasher uses 22 L. It is also now illegal to water the gardens, wash the car and to top up one’s pool. But they are adapting, by designing such things as systems which takes a home’s “gray water”, the water from a shower or dishwater, and using it to flush their toilets. At the same time, in California, it is now against the law to shower and do laundry on the same day.

Other ways to control water consumption include voice activated wireless faucets, which will dispense whatever metered amount of water you tell it to. It will also be able to listen in to whatever is being said in that room. And voice activated “intelligent” toilets, which are hooked up to Amazon’s Alexa. This allows one to sit on the toilet and ask for the sports scores, weather update, news, traffic reports or perhaps a song. With Alexa listening in, one can personalize their defecating or urinating. Alexa will know the difference in other users voices, so whether spouse, child or friend they too can personalize the experience. The potential is there for a private company or program, to monitor how often the toilet is used and even what gets flushed.

Global fresh water is dwindling quickly, not so much from drinking, cleaning and cooking, but from growing food and industry. We whine about what a liter of gasoline costs, yet will pay a bit more for the same amount of water, about three cents worth, in a plastic bottle. As for our drinking water, multiple studies are finding that over 90 per cent of it, from sampled bottled water worldwide, are full of plastic particles and chemicals, including heavy metals, phthalates, pesticides, PCB’s, and other chemicals. Also included are the innumerable amounts of microfibers which wash off our mostly polyester clothes. A recent study took tap water samples across five continents and found synthetic microfibers in every sample – 94 per cent in the US. Many of which are linked in both animal and human studies to cause cancer, premature puberty, reduced immunity, birth defects, endocrine disruption, insulin resistance, and other major diseases.

Adapting to present and future water needs will mean designing rainwater catchment and grey water systems, desalination technologies and if able, increased use of well water, but only if groundwater table is not already polluted.

Then there is our waste. Of all the landfills in the world, the majority are made up of industrial waste, including wood, while the rest of the garbage is mostly household and personal consumption trash. Billions of kilograms of disposable diapers, cell phones, sandwich bags, pens, plastic packaging, Bic lighters, TVs, fridges and stoves, clothing, shoes, electronic parts, razor blades, pill bottles, rubber tires, etc, etc, etc. Nearly a third of the landfills in the developed world are of packaging material. With every $100 we spend, about $10 goes for packaging, which then gets trashed. And though many of the manufacturers try to emphasize the importance of recycling what they use, with many in the West believing they are making a difference in the world by sorting their jars, paper and plastic, less than 2 per cent is actually recycled of the total waste stream.

Worldwide, 1.2 kg of urban waste is produced per person per day. Producing the least waste are places like Ghana, .09 kg, and Uruguay, .11 kg (about three ounces). Though Canada’s urban waste rate is about 1.8 kg per person per day, overall it produces more garbage per capita than nearly every other country on the planet, except for Australia and the US.

The US stands alone at the top of the trash pile. With only 5 per cent of the humans on the planet, they somehow gobble up more than 25 per cent of the planet’s resources, and produce over 40 per cent of the planet’s waste. Which itself spews more than an estimated 3.3 trillion kg of carbon dioxide emissions into the atmosphere every year. Over half of the 220 million tons of waste produced in the US each year ends up in one of over 4,000 landfills spread across the land, or barged to Asia, with over 10 million tons of the waste plastic. Of this, it is estimated that perhaps 5 per cent might get recycled. Americans also use over 2.5 million plastic bottles every hour of every day. And of the 400 million or so tons of hazardous waste produced each year globally, the US alone accounts for 250 million tons of it.

Further degradation of the atmosphere, oceans, waterways, ground water and soil comes from other modern waste, such as antibiotic, genetic engineering, military, nuclear, and nano-waste. We could also add in the pollutants of fake news and junk info that deny reality.

And because we can’t fit all our junk on this one planet, there are nearly a million pieces of debris orbiting the earth from the last 50 years of space exploration, satellite launching and manning the space station. About 35,000 of these pieces are larger than 10 cm.

7. “Ensure access to affordable, reliable, sustainable and modern energy for all.”

Ensuring such access, seems at odds with, as previously mentioned, the globalist environmental groups currently running campaigns to disrupt the flow of natural gas to certain countries, forcing these same countries to build more coal-fired plants, which emit twice as much carbon dioxide as natural gas plants. The globalists are also penalizing coal, natural gas, and oil companies through the cash grab called a Carbon Tax, and then they subsidize them to continue what they are doing. Just like they subsidize and push “green energy” companies, who are many times inept, and often go bankrupt in five years. Energy consumption quotas will be set on each living being and we will be punished and criminalized for “lifestyle decisions” Smart meters that notice when someone exceeds energy usage limits set by government. Total surveillance of individuals, in order to track and calculate energy consumption.

As to the globalist’s “Green New Deal”, it’s mostly all about our energy consumption. About 20 per cent of the global population, who happen to live in a developed, high-income country, consumes 86 per cent of the world’s goods. This doesn’t look good for the remaining 80 per cent of humanity; especially when such consumption was driven by corrupt corporations, who are now saying they’ll save us, and all we’ll have to do is give up our personal sovereignty. Such consumption is leaving a trail of waste, deforestation, energy disruptions, compromised fresh water sources, ocean acidification, and all sorts of other pollution. We should all realize such a threat, because the globalists do, and believe the remedy is to get rid of the source, we the people. And the waste and pollution we leave behind.

But some realities are not mentioned in the Green New Deal, such as none of the new renewable energy sources can easily be relied upon to produce enough energy in winter, especially in northern latitudes.

Hydroelectric is great, but is usually a spring dominated resource, and that most all the suitable locations around the globe are already jam-packed with dams, and heavily developed. And while winds tend to be variable year to year and month to month, wind energy is great in the winter months, but it is also dependent on the continuation of the present economy, to offset the high costs of the high-tech moving parts and technological maintenance to keep the blades turning. And the fact that the larger turbines need at least a 9 to 11 km per hour wind to get them moving. When winds reach 85 km per hour they must be shut down, because there is a limit to blade pitch adjustment, to safely deliver power to the grid.

Twenty-first century be damned. About three billion people still cook and heat their homes using wood-burning household fires and inefficient stoves. The typical cooking fire produces about 400 cigarettes’ worth of smoke an hour, and prolonged exposure is associated with respiratory infections, eye damage, heart and lung disease, and lung cancer. And besides, if the current global population had to do the same, whether burning wood or other parts of the biomass, the planet would soon enough be bald.

Solar panel installations meanwhile, don’t keep the lights on during a power outage or on a cloudy day, because if they don’t have battery backup, their supply of power goes to the grid, not directly to houses. Battery backup is an issue for all these renewable energies. A very costly enterprise, batteries are expensive, and tend to be used only for short time periods, on average, a three day storage level. While broken or discarded panels become toxic electronic waste. And along with damaged wind turbine blades, batteries and other pieces, much of it is unable to even be recycled; with any recycling so costly it will have to be subsidized.

To compensate for limited wind and solar power, especially over the winter months, and the still needed development in battery technology, there will still need to be underground storage for natural gas and connecting pipelines for use in the winter months, then not used for much of the year. With specialized maintenance and expertise in natural gas work expensive.

The thing is that whether, solar panels, wind turbines, batteries, and modern hydroelectric dams, all would not be possible without fossil fuels. Just like agriculture is also very dependent on fossil fuels. Currently over 80 per cent of global energy production comes from fossil fuels, seven per cent comes from (maxed out) hydroelectric power, two per cent from wind power, and one per cent from solar power. The Green New Deal’s credo is to ramp up wind and solar power from its current three per cent production level to over 90 per cent by the year 2030, and not use fossil fuels anymore.

Then there are facts. Since 1985, electricity’s share from all renewable energy sources, of total energy consumption, rises 0.37 per cent per year. Of the total energy consumption today, 43.4 per cent is electrical, from all sources. So continuing on with such a growth rate, it will take 153 years until the world economy can operate completely, using only electricity.

Today, around 25 per cent of world marketed energy consumption comes from renewable sources (biomass, geothermal, hydropower, solar, and wind). It was estimated that by 2050, about 50 per cent of the world’s energy will come from solar and wind. In the US today, only 10 per cent of energy comes from renewable sources (mostly hydroelectric energy). Projections suggested that this will increase to 17 per cent by 2040.

The plan is to eliminate electricity for extended periods of time to further “keep us in the dark”, and like in California recently, “to quell forest fires”. Because of the fear of a spark erupting from under-maintained infrastructure and power-lines, the excuse. Black outs and grey outs will become the norm. And to further control electricity with smart meters and the use as surveillance devices. Having no choice in not having one. Appliances will talk to the meter, we will be instructed to wash at night, it will know how many people are at home, and what devices we use and when. If using more power than a neighbour, they will want to know why and notify you. Individual rights, personal and private will be compromised. Then there are the health concerns from wireless, as smart meters pulse out their information every 15 minutes. Easily hacked, it will know when you are home or not. Refuse hooking up one will be criminalized.

People who are experts on such things suggest that if the power went out in most Western countries, and never turned back on, after thirty days half the population would be dead. Within a year 80 to 90 per cent would be dead. All infrastructure, from sewers, bridges, roads, buildings, welfare, health care, social programs to even our own physical and mental health would quickly crumble. A critical issue that we take for granted, three days without fresh water we die. But the number one killer will be water-borne diseases, then either freezing or starving to death, dying from an accident, stupidity and ignorance, or because one is fat and/or out of shape. The trick would be to somehow at least preserve the purpose of law, not justice per se but a mechanism to solve disputes. Such ways can be highly imperfect, but it’s better than the alternative.

8. Promote sustained, inclusive, sustainable economic growth, full and productive employment and decent work for all.

Regulate small business out of existence with government mandated minimum wages that will bankrupt huge sections of the economy. Currently, the jobs on the decline include mostly private industries in manufacturing, construction and natural resources. Jobs on the rise are within mostly ever expanding government controlled bureaucracies, such as education, health and social assistance. And though Canada, and the US, have the lowest unemployment rates in 40 years, the majority of job growth is in part-time employment, in many cases jobs where no experience is necessary. Which is a sore point for the concept of a guaranteed minimum wage, where small business’ especially, will have to pay a set minimum wage to someone no matter if that person brings anything of value or not, such as experience, showing up on time, having a good attitude, and willing to learn. And is why places like McDonald’s are switching to electronic “kiosks” instead of actual people. At the same time, relying on working at McDonald’s for “a living wage” is of course not the way to go if one wanted to raise a family.

The globalists are also forcing employers to meet hiring quotas of LGBTQ etc workers, just like the “affirmative action” plan for blacks. This where getting a job based on merit goes the way of the dodo bird. And of course, they are destroying free market economics by denying permits and licenses to companies who don’t comply. But support “chosen” private corporations with public funds for “sustainable development”.

They also got many believing that the wealthy and their corporations are job creators, so must not be taxed. They lie, the middle class and poor are the job-creators through their purchases of goods and services. If they don’t have enough purchasing power because they’re not paid enough, companies won’t create more jobs and economy won’t grow.

In 1965 a CEO of a company made twenty times more in income than a private-sector non-supervisory production worker. Today (2019) a CEO makes 300 per cent more. And in the same time frame most all the wealth created went right to the top. From 2007 to 2013, overall wealth increased over 26 per cent, while the average household lost 43 per cent of their wealth. In 2003 the inflation-adjusted net worth for the typical American household was nearly $88,000, just ten years later it was only $56,000. If this gap continues, it is estimated that over half of all US households will be bankrupt within the next decade. Since 2007/08 the US economy has lost 14 million jobs. During this time their population has grown by 17 million people.

Defining the world today very well, is the current global job market. The top employer on the planet is the US Department of Defence, with 3.2 million employees, 1.6 million of which are said to be active and reserve duty troops. Then China’s, People’s Liberation Army, with 2.3 million employed, all of whom are active duty troops. Next are Walmart, with 2.1 million employees and McDonalds, with 1.9 employees. Others in the top ten include the UK National Health Service, the China National Petroleum Corporation, the State Grid Corporation of China, India Railways, the Indian Armed Forces, and the Hon Han Precision Factory (Foxconn), all with more than 1.3 million employees each. Foxconn is the world’s largest contract electronics manufacturer and the fourth-largest information technology company by revenue. It is also the assembler of Apple’s I-Phone, one of the most addicting drugs in the world..

The US prison industrial complex is the country’s third largest employer. And because of over-regulation and the criminalization of debt, a market was created by the simple act of keeping a person locked up in a cell, often for minor offences that carry stiff penalties, which often can’t be paid, or unwarranted sentences, and in many cases zero tolerance. Often such prison’s employees are high-school educated men and women with no other options in the small town they reside in. With the actual prison often the biggest employer in the county. And that the majority of those doing time are black, because the majority of them have grown up without a father, so the local gang leader often stepped into that role.

As to the economy, the globalists, through their central banks, plan on funding their Agendas by using such concepts as Modern Monetary Theory (MMT). Neither modern nor a theory, MMT is the printing of money to create unlimited amounts of real wealth, with rates of exchanges between money and goods and services to be set by a central body, bypassing market demand. But there are limits to the amount of real resources that you can extract through seigniorage, the difference between the value of money and the cost to produce and distribute it.

The globalists believe that this means they can never go broke, ignoring the fates of the Roman Empire, Weimar Germany, Hungary, Yugoslavia, and more recently Zimbabwe and Venezuela, among others. Their downfalls were caused by hyperinflation. Also, as the former Soviet Union, Cuba, and North Korea proved, any inefficient use of resources leads only to economic impoverishment. Unable to feed their people and nearly impossible to gain any traction for development.

While Keynesian’s believe in increased government spending during recessionary times, but calls for government restraint in a rapidly growing economy. Which prevents the increase in demand that spurs inflation, and forces the government to cut deficits and save for the next down cycle in the economy. The globalists don’t worry about debt, they believe only government spending creates goods and services, and that taxation drains any excess liquidity and controls inflation. The International Money Fund and World Bank meanwhile pride themselves in their “austerity programs”, which have impoverished millions, and even bringing down developed nations. Such austerity measures hide behind the slogan “social equity”.

Under MMT there is also the jobs guarantee, where anybody who wants a job would be guaranteed to have one, at a living wage, by the government. MMT is the sovereign-friendly justification for deficit spending without end. It allows globalist controlled governments to bribe the populace to keep voting for them, and to fund one or another of their incessant wars from an inexhaustible supply of credit or funding.

Meanwhile the stock market is a blatantly riggedwealth extraction operation”. Other rigging operations include high frequency trading, dark pools, Quantitative Easing (QE) and the Zero Interest Rate Policy (ZIRP), which gives interest free money to a select handful of “primary dealers”, post hoc rationalization of political expediency, and power-expanding action.

The globalist’s Federal Reserve’s Quantitative Easing (QE) program, under the guise of stimulating job growth, recently used QE to create US$4 trillion out of thin air. Most of the $4 trillion created went to the richest .01 per cent of the population who already had $21 trillion in unused wealth. In reality, QE is a massive welfare program for the mega-wealthy. With that $4 trillion, the Federal Reserve could have instead given every non-millionaire US household $40,000, or they could have given around 114 million Americans $35,000 each. The remaining two hundred million people would be out of luck.

If QE went to the American people, poverty would undoubtedly be eliminated, with every person over the age of 18 be given a guaranteed living income. Instead, in many developed nations the majority of the populations are living in a neo-feudal society, where instead of the indentured servant we are now indebted wage slaves. The globalist’s centrally planned economic policy and government legislation are designed to keep the population economically insecure, subservient and enslaved in debt. Using their ownership of mainstream media companies to keep us ignorant and unaware.

All the while, liberal democracy, protectionism with free trade, and authoritarianism are starting to mean the same thing, while most other pressing issues of today are ignored by way of distraction. Much like the reality that many industrialized countries today are “hovering between status quo and authoritarianism, and are no longer distinguishable from their apparent enemies”.

Some even believe that the increase in the value of newly produced goods and services, and the ideology of capitalism, have created an environment that is responsible for improvements in a person’s well being. This is what has been instilled into our brains. But since the 1970’s, the pursuit of happiness has simply morphed into the “pursuit of affluence”.

Many factors create changes to one’s quality of life, including economic equality. And all is not equal. An economic system whether capitalism or communism, has nothing to do with the quality of our lives. Consider that the majority of lottery winners are broke within a few years. And further in debt than they were before they had won. But then with money, it depends on where you live, what money means to you, and how you were taught to manage it. Unfortunately, the harsh truth is that, one of the most important drivers of one’s living standards, opportunities, education and the ability to create wealth, are determined at birth, and to what family one is born into.

9. “Build resilient infrastructure, promote inclusive and sustainable industrialization and foster innovation.”

Instead of building new infrastructure, we are mostly repairing old infrastructure that’s been neglected for fifty years. With most such infrastructure projects over budget to build, then an endless stream of cost over-runs to be paid for faulty construction, design and materials, break-downs, and ever ongoing maintenance. Previously mentioned, The globalists use the World Bank and the IMF to put countries into extreme debt, by spending money to hire corrupt corporations to build large scale infrastructure projects that ensnares developing countries into further debt.

Further to infrastructure, I have always found it odd that China has built more than 30,000 kilometers of high-speed rail over the last decade. That Japan’s bullet trains can reach nearly 320 kilometers per hour and date to the 1960s, and have moved more than 9 billion people without a single passenger casualty. And that France began service of their high-speed train in 1981 and the rest of Europe quickly followed. Yet in the US there is no true high-speed train service, aside from sections of Amtrak’s Acela line in the Northeast Corridor, where it reaches 240 kilometers per hour for only 55 kilometers of its 735 kilometer span. Its average speed between New York and Boston is about 104 kph. There is a high-speed rail system under construction in California, but whether it will ever get completed as intended is uncertain. The second largest country in the world, Canada, is the only G7 country that does not have high-speed rail.

As for fostering innovation (see education) the globalists will soon control all patents, and will punish the rich, entrepreneurs and innovators, and confiscate nearly all the gains of those who choose to work hard and excel, then redistribute to the masses of non-working and unemployed.

10. “Reduce inequality within and among countries.”

When I coached midget (15 to 17 years old) hockey, I saw the time when I was no longer allowed to give out an MVP award, or most dedicated player. Instead everyone had to get a medal, to protect their self esteem. No more patting players on the butt or touching them. In the dressing room there had to be two adults, never just one. The players confused because they were being told it’s not about winning anymore. And if it wasn’t, why do we still keep score and why bother with competition. Maybe that’s the globalist’s point.

The globalist’s ideal is “equality of outcome” over “equality of opportunity”. The latter is where we all begin life like we are all standing on a start line. Ahead of us is our lives and what we want to do with them. And how we want to live them. Then a starter’s pistol goes off. Some never make it to a standing position, some may lie down, and some may sit. The rest run forward, and some walk. Some get pushed aside, some are attacked, and some even die. Some tire out, get sick or break down. Some slowly walk forward constantly looking over their shoulder, some have stopped and turned around staring back from hence they came. Many fall, some get right back up. For many, their individual lives within their environment prevents them from getting ahead, some don’t care, and simply hold out their hand. And some strive, survive, keep their morals, empathy, and integrity intact, are disciplined, and work hard, and who are most often those who achieve what it is that strive to be. Their success is their reward, and should be rightfully earned, though sometimes it is not.

Equality of outcome on the other hand, is where we begin life standing on the same starting line, a bell gets rung and everything mentioned above happens to the same number of people. The race to achievement, worth and personal development is still on, whether the achievement means, fame, fortune, or self-awareness. The same articles of human conduct apply, but this time when everyone nears their end, everyone gets the same reward. No matter what they did to get there, deserved or not.

As for reducing inequality among countries, this means no borders, so that trade can move cheaply, and large groups of unskilled workers can be moved around to where needed. It would be open season for the growth of trafficking of all things, whether children or drugs.

And though it may be politically correct to say that “diversity is strength”, a recent study out of Denmark, meta-analyzed 1,001 estimates from 87 other studies and found that in actual fact, there is a “significant negative relationship between ethnic diversity and social trust.” Even when controlling for deprivation. Basically, it found, what has perhaps always been the case throughout human history, that mass immigration by those unwilling to assimilate into a new culture erodes community trust and harms society.

11.Make cities and their suburbs inclusive, safe, resilient, and sustainable.”

Criminalize living in most rural areas by instituting “protected areas” where no people will be allowed to go. Force all people into mega-cities where they can be kept under 24/7 surveillance, and easier to manipulate and control. Any growth outside such a region, not allowed. A private farmer would be unable to get goods to market because he couldn’t afford the costs, surcharges, regulation bureaucracy, and taxes to do so. The farmer’s energy will be well monitored and severely restricted, with the share of most all services, including school services and medical clinics eventually cut. Only option will be to move into high density development regions.

City centers will be populated by a vast government employed populace, whether banking, surveillance, intelligence or management. Any land outside such civic or regional centers will be owned by the government. Surrounding such centers will be the vast majority, living in crates piled on top of each other, compressed into towers, lining transportation routes into the city center. With most everyone massively government dependant. Streets lined with smart lampposts, each able to send its signals by wireless. Topped off with cameras, listening devices and censors for the collection of air quality, traffic, and weather data, and of course for monitoring, we the public. Our lives determined by algorithms, with a person’s bio-metrics, home, health, and habits, all monitored and regulated. Facial recognition programs track us based on what we buy, where we go, what we say, text, tweet, e-mail and what we do in public. It was estimated that currently, about half the population of both Canada and the US have their image “on file”. Then there’s the surveillance complex and their monolithic data collecting agencies. A hundreds of billions of dollars industry, where everyone in the populace here and abroad, are deemed suspect, and monitored, regulated, tracked and spied on. Such data agencies have compiled lists of those deemed threats to “national security”, so that in times of national emergency or under martial law, such individuals, whether they are or not, will be rounded up and incarcerated. Can’t imagine how many are on such lists today, but in 2008, there were already more than 8 million Americans on the lists.

Ban all gun ownership by private citizens. Only ones to have them obedient enforcers ruling over an unarmed, enslaved class of impoverished workers, with or without a universal basic income, consisting of a dumbed down, never questioning population, all following only one narrative. Making the cities safe by taking away the population’s freedom.

Get rid of cars and create walk-able cities in designated regions. Penalize car owners and eventually ban vehicle ownership. Any cars will be self-driven and strictly monopolized. Force everyone onto public transit where facial recognition cameras can monitor you better, and report the movement of any person in society. Put bike lanes in everywhere whether to be used or not, and paint crosswalks in rainbow colors. As for small electric cars, they are currently only available to those who can afford them. If everyone had one we’d see our electrical energy usage spike each night while everyone charged their car. Much like if we all installed yet another air conditioner. But if they ever were able to replace fossil fuel cars all together, then there would no longer be a gas tax, which pays to take care of roads and its infrastructure. As it is, cars will soon have smart odometers, and we will be taxed by mileage, to achieve “sustainability”.

12. “Ensure sustainable consumption and production patterns.”

Levy punitive taxes on consumption of fossil fuels and electricity, causing standards of living to drop to Third world levels. Control the narrative, running campaigns on TV, movies and social media to shame people who use gasoline, water or electricity, creating a social construct of ninnies, social justice warriors and tattlers, people who rat out their neighbours in exchange for food credit rewards, a pat on the back, and even a hug that they no doubt never got.

Globally, as already mentioned, about 20 per cent of humanity who happen to live in a developed, high-income country consumes 86 per cent of the world’s goods. At the same time, over 30 per cent of the world’s population who live in South Asia and sub-Saharan Africa consume only 3.2 per cent of the world’s total. The poorest countries in the world account for only 1.3 per cent of all spending. The richest 20 per cent of the world consume 45 per cent of all meat and fish of the planet’s supply, the bottom 20 per cent consume 5 per cent. The top 20 per cent, also use up over 58 per cent of the total energy produced, the poorest use less than 4 per cent. They consume more than 84 per cent of all paper, the bottom a mere 1.1 per cent. They also own over 87 per cent of the world’s vehicle fleet, while the bottom 20 per cent own less than 1 per cent.

The US alone uses up a third of the world’s paper, a quarter of its oil, over a quarter of the coal, and nearly 30 per cent of the aluminum. America’s per capita use of energy, metals, minerals, forest products, fish, grains, meat and yes, even fresh water, rises to a monolith compared to people living in the developing world. In fact, one American consumes as much energy as seven hundred Africans. They have attained this not by being smart but by stomping around the planet destabilizing the ability of independent states to exist and protect their own resources from being plundered, by military means, often by the art of coup, and replacing elected leadership with obedient tyrants.

Fueling global consumption, the world’s 3,000 biggest corporations cause about half of all environmental damage, and about one-third of their profits. Any other profits go to a few CEO’s and speculators, even though current external costs now total $7.3 trillion a year. To counterbalance this discrepancy, the global fossil fuel industry is conveniently subsidized by respective governments to the tune of $5.6 trillion a year, using tax payer dollars.

13. “Take urgent action to combat climate change and its impacts.”

But first we must recognize who is affecting the climate the most. And take the word urgent out of the above sentence. It is true that 10 per cent of the world’s population who are responsible for the vast majority of greenhouse gas emissions live in North America, because of their consumption habits, not their numbers. While the two biggest economies in the world China and the US are producing the most greenhouse gases, especially carbon dioxide. It’s interesting that according to most of the studies, surveys, and polls that have been taken around the world over the years, the consumers of these two countries are also found to be the least concerned about carbon emissions. The silent majority remain silent, cloaked in cognitive dissonance. But then, the biggest impacts upon this planet are not because of greenhouse gases. If it was, we could combat climate change fairly quickly.

You want to better the planet and avoid future climate disruption, and much civil unrest, start with the Orwellian-named, US Department of Defence. Per capita it is the largest emitter of carbon dioxide into the atmosphere today, by far. It is also the largest institutional consumer of fossil fuels (mostly petroleum) in the world, more than any other country. Its air force alone consumes over 60 per cent of it, about 11 trillion liters. An F16 jet-fighter (nearly $18 million to build) consumes over 11,000 liters of jet-fuel an hour. An M1 Abrams battle tank, burns over 220 liters an hour, getting about 250 meters per liter. And of course they are also the world’s greatest terrorist state and threat to world peace, with 10 aircraft-carrier battle groups, and over 900 U.S. military bases, installations and facilities around the globe, which are nearly all toxic, radioactive, polluting, and immoral cesspools. In fact many of their bases consistently rank among some of the most polluted places in the world. The US produces more hazardous waste than the five largest chemical companies combined. Whether depleted uranium, oil, jet fuel, pesticides, defoliants or lead. They are currently polluting more than 140 countries. On a side note, the US Navy is planning (Nov/2019) to release 20,000 tons of “environmental stressors”, including heavy metals and explosives, at sea, off their Pacific Northwest coastline.

The globalists are trying to speed up the process of culling the global population down to a level where further geo-engineering and the greater use of renewable energies will allow CO2 levels to drop, allowing the Earth’s atmosphere return to natural rhythms. With their agenda including further enhancing any effects of climate change attributed to CO2 emissions, through geo-engineering projects such as HAARP (High Frequency Active Auroral Research Program). Started up in 1993, HAARP is an ionospheric research program jointly funded by the U.S. Air Force, the U.S. Navy, the University of Alaska Fairbanks, and the Defence Advanced Research Projects Agency. It is being used for either electromagnetic warfare capabilities or weather modification. Especially using sky’s seeded with conductive aerosols, such as aluminum, barium, and strontium, by way of “chem.-trails” which manipulates the jet stream. If HAARP is also electromagnetic capable, it could create such things as wildfires, hurricanes, drought, flooding and perhaps even earthquakes. Perhaps a way to get people off the land, whether homesteader, farmer, rancher or villager, by corporations who will pay out the insurance money, then buy the land for a far better price. With the people then having to move to a city or its suburb.

Credited non biased researchers have recently concluded that the adaption to unavoidable consequences of climate disruption, and to prevent the crises from worsening in the coming decades, over $2 trillion should be invested over the next ten years, which would create early-warning systems, climate-resilient infrastructure, improved agriculture crop production, global mangrove/wetlands protection, and investing in making available and limited water resources more resilient. The only problem in the equation the globalists see is that the population must be lowered, which would lower the stress on the planet’s available resources and environment.

It’s interesting that a few trillion dollars would be enough, along with further adaptation and innovation, to get climate disruption at the least, from worsening, yet the globalist backed progressive democratic socialists in the US, if elected, want to somehow come up with over $20 trillion over the same next ten years, so that every American has health care.

14. Conserve and sustainably use the oceans, seas, lakes, rivers and marine resources for “sustainable development”.

Ban most all ocean fishing, causing runaway food price inflation. Criminalize the operation of private fishing vessels, and place all ocean fishing operations under the control of government. Only allow certain corporations to carry out ocean fishing operations, under government contract, with product sold to an elite market. Such decisions will be based on how much a corporation donates to lawmaker’s campaigns. All other fish to be farmed in stagnate and nasty conditions, infused in a soup of hormones, fish-feed, waste, anti-bacteria, and chemicals.

Along with more than one-third of the world’s total grain output, one-third of the world’s fish catch is also fed to livestock. Of the world’s fish catch, 90 per cent of the largest fish in the oceans, including tuna, cod, shark, marlin, swordfish, and halibut are already gone, just in the last 50 years.

Consider salmon stocks continuing to drastically drop. Climate change is a very small contributing factor but is used so we don’t have to point the finger so much at ourselves. The problems include degradation of their habitat, hatchery fish have complicated genes, too high fish harvest limits for way too long, dams with no upstream or downstream passage, pollution, ocean plastics, warming oceans, and dead zones of ocean acidification.

According to a recent study, if things carry on as they are, by 2025 the oceans are expected to contain about one ton of plastic for every three tons of fish. By 2050 there will be more plastic in the oceans than fish. Chew on that for awhile.

It is estimated that about 150 million tons of plastic debris currently floats around the seven seas. Much of it takes hundreds of years to break down back to its base, tiny plastic nodules. These beady little pellets are less than one micron in diameter, about the diameter of a bacterium. Comparatively, spider web silk is about three to eight microns, a single human hair averages between ten and two hundred microns. These oil-based plastic nodules, as well as the previously mentioned micro-fibers, are used in everything from toothpaste to cosmetics, shampoo, soap, and aspirin. Such nodules and fibers are also what such things as socks, shoes, bed-sheets, acrylic, polyester, latex, cotton or wool blends, are made up of. And are all things which we wash on a regular basis.

While the larger pieces of plastic kill thousands of the largest animals, like the sea lion, seals, turtles and birds. The micro-plastics nodules, can absorb certain pollutants, and are easily ingested by many water species, including fish and shellfish. Millions of sea creatures are affected by consuming plastic. With many, eventually ending up on our dinner plate, and what we don’t eat gets thrown out in a plastic bag, another lion king circle of life sort of thing.

Recently, a young blue whale washed up on a Spanish beach. An autopsy deemed it died from peritonitis, basically an infection of the inner lining of the stomach, as it was unable to digest or excrete the over 29 kilograms of plastic found within its digestive system.

From 1950 to 1999, plastic production rose 20,000 per cent. In the first 10 years of the 21st century, more plastic was produced than in all of the last century. This includes the over 70 billion plastic bottles and one trillion plastic bags that are produced each year globally. Currently about 300 million tons of plastic is produced yearly. About half of which is for single use packaging.

When such plastic, chemical sludge and other debris end up in the oceans, currently at the rate of one dump truck dumping its load every minute, it creates such things as trash vortexes in the oceans. Plastic debris comes mostly from Asia and Africa, while the Western countries’ obedient citizens at least attempt to recycle their jars, cans, plastic and paper, nearly shamed into doing so.

15. “Protect, restore and promote sustainable use of land ecosystems, and to sustainably manage forests. To combat desertification, halt and reverse land degradation. Halt biodiversity loss.”

Meanwhile, since 2016 over 50 per cent of total global forest loss happened in only three countries, Brazil, Canada, and Russia. Romania lost all its intact forests. Madagascar has lost over 90 per cent, Paraguay 79 per cent. Current estimates suggest Paraguay, Laos, Cambodia and Equatorial Guinea will lose all their forests within the next twenty years. Even the rich, vast northern forests of Canada, has lost or altered over half of its forest cover. British Columbia doesn’t even do anything with the forests they are cutting down; they simply export the tree intact, de-limbed, but bark still on her, to Asia.

Overall and everywhere, logging is the principal devourer of forests, with cattle ranching and commercial agriculture a close second. Fires linked to human action accounted for 21 per cent of the loss, with mineral exploitation taking its fair share. West Africa’s coastal rain forests have nearly all but disappeared since 1900. Because of air currents, if all the African rain forests were to vanish, rainfall in the Gulf of Mexico, the Ukraine, and Southern Europe, would drop drastically.

In Southeast Asia, Indonesia alone deforests one million hectares a year. Brazil has lost about 95 per cent of its coastal forest, and much of its 60 per cent share of the Amazon basin, with their government declaring their deforestation addiction a national emergency. The biggest chunk of rain forest remaining is still the Amazon basin. Now only covering about four million sq km, it represents over half of the planet’s remaining rain forests. It is the largest and most diverse rain forest on the planet. Besides many other living species, it has been estimated that the Amazon forest still has 390 billion individual trees, of 16,000 different species. Twenty per cent of the Amazon forest has already been clear cut, another twenty per cent is close to being gone. Of the remaining forests, over 90 per cent are now being affected by forest degradation. It is estimated that if conditions persist, by 2030, there will only be about 20 per cent of the Amazon forests remaining, with half of it in a degraded condition. In fact, one tenth of all global carbon emissions today are coming from the clearing of land and accompanying fires in the Amazon forest.

For the quickly disappearing Amazon basin, its future climate is already here. As it loses its tree cover rainfall in parts of the US Midwest, Northwest, and in most of their Southern states, will drop significantly, and already is. By 2050 it is estimated that all tropical forests will be gone from the Earth. Such land degradation, besides causing more flooding and water run-off, is also the root cause of most socioeconomic problems in many of the developing countries. But the madness of deforestation for profit continues unabated.

To “combat” this the globalists plan, as already mentioned, is to force people to move into human settlement zones, urban/mega-cities. There we will be put into 28 square meter (3 by 9 meter) urban modular housing units, predominately stacked on top of each other. Mass resettlement as people are forced to vacate where they live, and abolition of all private property . Create vast wilderness spaces, for future use. Criminalize private land ownership. Tightly control all agriculture and agricultural tracts, including ranches, by policies dictated by Monsanto/Bayer and government regulators. Regulate every input that a farmer uses. Nationalize farms.

Ban wood stoves, rainwater collection and home gardening. Criminalize self-reliance, and force total dependence on government. Can’t have people living off the grid and living in “protective forests”. Allow no private ownership, no private land, and stop allowing people from doing what they want to the land/property they do own. Using “Sensitive lands” laws, your private property overlay and public property can be taken away at any time. Whether a copse of Garry Oak trees, or a stream running through or under your property, or your back yard is an animal crossing, lands will be seized without compensation and dedicated forever to protection. Often, without you even knowing.

All zoning laws and bio-diversity areas will be mapped out. Here in British Columbia, there are many whose main residence is either in another province or country, who also own a home or condo here. The majority, especially those with single dwelling homes, spend months here. That’s why they bought here. They shop, furnish their home, garden, get their car fixed, go to Home Depot every weekend, dine, contribute to the community and carry on as if they live here, which they do. They know and are friends with their neighbours. But now, such owners have to pay a two per cent speculation tax, if they do not live in their home at least six months out of the year. If it’s less time one is now required to rent the place out. Even though many of these foreign and domestic owned homes/condos are on the higher end of the scale for renter availability. The working poor, unemployed, homeless, student or single mom with children certainly won’t be able to afford the rent. Especially when you’d have to move out for some months while the owners live there. And who’s furniture and artwork on the walls is it. So what sort of diversity are we talking about here exactly.

16. Promote peaceful and inclusive societies for sustainable development, private access to justice for all and build effective, accountable, and inclusive institutions at all levels”. The scariest line in the Agenda.

Once again, everyone herded into mega-cities. Where theoretically, if any dissidence occurs we could all be sprayed down if needed.

One of the other many ways is granting legal immunity to illegal aliens and “protected minority groups”. As well as medical care and whatever else they need, and eventually their vote. This will free some of them to maybe engage in illegal and even immoral activity, because they are now entitled as a “protected class” in society. And because of “diversity”, they no longer have to assimilate into the general population. Just look at what is happening to Sweden and the UK. As to the “inclusive institutions”, this means that corporations who hire illegal aliens, the LGBTQ etc, community, and other protected classes, over merit, will be given favourable tax structures and government grants. And though many are walking around saying “Hello. I am special”, policy decisions will favor the “common good” (the herd) over individuals. With the ends justifying the means. The moral principle of the ends can never justify the means will become a myth.

As for law, which often has nothing to do with justice, use revenue, tax and other federal agencies to selectively punish unfavourable groups with punitive audits, and regulatory harassment. All the while ignoring the criminal activities of those corporations favoured by the government. Because the elites have no problem that everyone be allowed to be treated the same before the law and enjoy the same rights as other citizens, except of course for the elite. In reality there is a two-tiered law system. But really no one is more in favour of equal rights and abolition of social privileges than the elite, since they have no need for social privilege since they control the real power, money. Further, they’d rather remove due process, especially since the majority of those being incarcerated are unable to have proper representation as it is, nor can afford to submit any sort of defence. Get it into the mainstream media and one can be convicted not by a jury but a biased public opinion. Then the government will destroy you because you are no match for the funds they can spend. Without even being proven guilty by a court of law, you can be destroyed financially, lose your family, friends, all your possessions and livelihood. With many then putting a gun in their mouths and pulling the trigger.

Over-regulate everything. In many western countries, especially the US and Canada, the typical person goes through each day breaking at least three laws, that we aren’t even aware of. And we are beyond simply thinking someone is doing wrong that law enforcement can give a good enough excuse for a warrant to bug someones phone. “It’s no longer based on the traditional practice of targeted taps based on some individual suspicion of wrongdoing. It covers phone calls, emails, texts, search history, what you buy, who your friends are, where you go, who you love.”

17. Strengthen the means of implementation and revitalize the global partnership for sustainable development.

By way of enacting global trade mandates that over-ride individual national, state or province, and local laws. Grant unrestricted powers to corporations such as Monsanto, Dow Chemical, RJ Reynolds, Coca Cola, and Merck. Enact laws where a town or province can be sued if they “effect the profit making ability of such entities”. Pass global trade agreements that bypass a nation’s lawmakers and override intellectual property laws, to make the world’s most powerful corporations maintain total monopolies over drugs, seeds, fresh water, chemicals and technology. Nullify national laws and demand total global obedience to trade agreements authored by an unelected world body and rubber stamped by the US. Implement policies meant to incentivize a reduced population, through vaccinations, health care, and reproductive services, like pharmaceuticals, and abortion, genetically modified food, fluoride, and radiation manufactured diseases.

A major piece of the plan also includes the insidiously modern technology, called 5G (fifth generation cellular network technology). All things will become a part of the web, including ourselves. To explain, humans possess only four basic emotions, arousal, pleasant, unpleasant, and calm. And since we are electromagnetic and electrical organisms, with even our cells and cell structures communicating electrically, these basic emotions operate on their own separate frequency. Though unable to travel through solid objects, such frequencies are felt when we interact with one another. They are the vibes we get from one another, whether it’s romance in the air, or the undertone of unease and danger, “cutting the air in the room with a knife”. The frequencies are also based on our five physical sensors: of taste, sight, hearing, touch, and smell, which along with the senses of balance, pain, hunger, thirst, and temperature contributes to our experience of our surroundings, but which only shows us a three-dimensional universe. Our behaviour on the other hand will come from inherited traits, while our perceptions of things, comes from information received, experiences, and our consciousness. When such fields are in balance we are healthy, when they are not, we experience disease – physically, mentally, emotionally, and psychologically. 5G technologies can manipulate these frequencies, and destabilize their distributions, to induce feelings of arousal, conviviality, meanness, friendliness, anger, and even experience extreme pain, without our awareness. Indeed, 5G technology initially was developed to be used as crowd control weapons, where when used can either make a crowd feel like their skin is on fire, or everyone is crying and in need of a hug. The technology is also what’s behind the body scanners at airports, introduced two years ago, and the now rising cases of cancers among those employees who spend their shift operating such machines.

The previous four generations of cellular transmitters used between one to five gigahertz (GHz), 5G on the other hand operates from 24 to 90 GHz and uses millimeter waves, not cellular. These waves have a shorter range than microwaves so their antennas will have to be everywhere. A typical urban street will have to have them atop every fourth or so light pole. The 5G waves also cannot travel through solid objects, such as trees, so in many urban areas they will have to be the first to go.

And though scientific studies are not yet written, because of it being so new and overall effects are still unknown, according to reports already coming out, there are cases of both people and insects alike getting sick due to nearby 5G towers is already on the rise. But more importantly we will have quicker internet.

Even scarier is the recent reports where scientists, and because we are electrical beings like every other living thing, now have the ability to predict our choices before we are consciously aware of them, and can translate our thoughts into speech. One all encompassing net/grid/matrix, is the goal. With the end game, to connect the human brain to artificial intelligence (AI) and through such a matrix, control our emotional perceptions by the information coming from AI.

Control the digital grid is all important. In India where 60 per cent of the population lives under the poverty line, over a billion people are bio-metrically profiled. Data includes fingerprints, iris scans, and facial recognition programs. In Russia all digital data, phone, email, Facebook, and Twitter is now recorded. Online, any blogger who has over 3,000 followers is put on file with the government, and is not allowed to remain anonymous. In China, they have the ultimate control system where each person has a social credit score attached to them until they die. Few people can afford to be “blacklisted” while every action they make is tracked and rated for acceptance or consequence. No one dares to do anything outside of collective norms for fear they would be interpreted as socially negative. One must always be politically correct, all follow the same narrative, and not to upset others or the government.

The control of the narrative is all important. The globalists and their presstitutes at the Washington Post, New York Times, CNN, BBC, CBC, NPR, and all the rest in the US, UK, EU, Canada, Australia and New Zealand, learned their craft from Nazi Propaganda Minister Joseph Goebbels. “If you tell a lie big enough and keep repeating it, people will eventually come to believe it. The lie can be maintained only for such time as the State can shield the people from the political, economic and/or military consequences of the lie. It thus becomes vitally important for the State to use all of its powers to repress dissent, for the truth is the mortal enemy of the lie, and thus by extension, the truth is the greatest enemy of the State.”

Most importantly the globalists are relying on manufacturing consent through the media. Starting with the ownership of the media by corporations, where it’s all about profit and the push for profit by whatever it takes. Whether getting advertising money by selling advertisers customers, or creating customers to become consumers and not citizens, and who are able to be swoon one way or another, with no basis if it is true or not. Doing this by using the our emotions to get us to purchase what we are programmed to believe that we need. The media elite provide the complicity.

In conclusion, the globalist’s agenda is for sustainability, stability, and security, of themselves. In reality there is presently more than enough wealth and capabilities to solve both societal and climate problems. We live in the most wealthy and technologically advanced society in the history of civilization. People should not have to struggle and be buried in debt to get basic necessities and live a healthy life. But the globalist elite want the goal to be centralization. To use “saving the environment”, which they are destroying (disaster capitalism), to justify the industrialization and end of democracy.

The dilemma the globalists have is either somehow lower the population or simply program us, and get us all crammed into huge regional capitals. I think they’ve been doing both. Control of the land, natural resources, and entire populations. To control air through carbon emission regulations, the ground by sustainable development and the sea through environmental regulations. A comprehensive plan of action to be taken globally, nationally and locally, by organizations of the UN system, governments, and major groups in every area which humans impact the environment. State management of all Eco-systems, all land, forests, mountains, rivers, lakes and oceans, agriculture, bio-technology, food and fresh water, ensuring equity equals slavery. This is mostly happening at the local level, so question town representatives, and explain the facts of what they are blindly teaching. And hope they see the light.

Of the 7.7 billion residents on the planet 5 billion of us have a mobile device, half (over 2.5 billion) are smartphones. Meanwhile, The Internet of Things (from traffic lights to fridges phones and tablets) is expected to grow to around 20.4 billion devices by 2020, and use of cloud services will grow as well. Of these billions, about 73 per cent of people who misplace their phone experience a mild to severe state of panic until it’s found. But then the average adult today spends 2 to 4 hours a day on their phone, swiping and touching it, sometimes even feeling our phones vibrating in our pockets when they aren’t even there. Our phones are a surveillance and tracking device that governments and corporations can exploit anytime they wish. Even creating our relationships, including building up illusions of friendship and intimacy. Making us all dopamine addicts.

Dopamine is a chemical produced by our brains that plays a huge role in motivating our behaviour. It gets released when we take a bite of delicious food, when we have sex, after we exercise, and, importantly, when we have successful social interactions. “I feel tremendous guilt,” admitted Chamath Palihapitiya, former Vice President of User Growth at Facebook, to an audience of Stanford students. He was responding to a question about his involvement in exploiting consumer behaviour. “The short-term, dopamine-driven feedback loops that we have created are destroying how society works,” he explained. He highlighted that smartphones and social media platforms like Facebook, Snapchat, and Instagram leverage the very same neural circuitry used by slot machines and cocaine to keep us using their products as much as possible.

As for technology saving us, maybe. But the advancements in the world of machines do not necessarily mean advancements in the world of people. Dependence upon digital devices, makes our lives more convenient and comfortable, but in reality only enslaves us. So entranced with a screen and the dopamine rushes it gives. Some will say that our society has simply become more convenient and more comfortable with the digital age, which they feel is a positive. Others are afraid of the social changes that come with the globalization that the digital age brings. Others believe that centralization and dependency are “natural” extensions of man’s evolution and inevitable. and so we should embrace it. While the Futurists, a subculture of drum-beaters believe that all old ideas and ways of living are obsolete and must be thrown out to make way for all new ideas and ways of living. That all new ideas are an automatic improvement, with each new generation superior and more wise to the one before it, because each new generation will have access to ever more information. Reality is there are very few new ideas in the world, only old ideas rehashed and recycled and repainted to look different.

The influx of many technologies today is not necessarily the problem; it is how these technologies are being applied in our society. Having unlimited information at our fingertips is not the same thing as wisdom. Besides the aforementioned loss of our knowledge to grow, forage and hunt food. Many no longer know how to fix anything that is broken. Whether their car or knowing how to use a hammer and screwdriver. Completely dependent on automation. With far too many people living completely on the grid, with many born into it. People, that if you could reach down into their world of comfortable slavery and grab them by the scruff of their neck and drop them into the middle of a forest. With food, water and possible shelter everywhere around them, they would still die.

One must remember that the globalist elite are a separate culture from the rest of humanity, with its own tribal customs, mythologies and beliefs. They are a secretive occult group of narcissistic sociopaths, whose main motivation is to condition or tear down normal, moral and free society until it becomes a place in which they can openly be themselves without fear of judgment or consequences. They want to change the world into a habitat that will accept them.

According to criminology not all criminals are full blown narcissistic sociopaths, but most full blown narcissistic sociopaths are criminals. How successful they are usually depends on their ability to blend in and mimic or manipulate normal people. Their defining character features include “a complete lack of conscience and empathy, the ability to rationalize any and all destructive behaviour, a desperate need to be adored or admired by everyone around them, a feeling of being “more special” than most people, a feeling of superiority, delusions of grandeur or an inherent right to manage the lives of others, an obsessive need to control and manipulate, impulsive desires and deviant sexual inclinations, and they will only associate with people they feel are like them and are “equally superior”.

Their primary drive is to fulfill their fantasies of superiority and godhood. The more deviant the action, and the more successful they are at getting away with it, the more dopamine they generate and the more satisfied they feel. This leads to an endless cycle, seeking out more and more exploitation of others which becomes less and less satisfying, which leads to even greater deviance.

These traits are inborn, not a product of environment. In some cases environment can play a role in activating these traits, but if a person is not born with them, they generally do not adopt them later in life because of a traumatic environment. Narcissistic sociopaths defy all forms of treatment and cannot be reformed. They have no concrete personality beyond these traits, therefore, if you remove the traits, they are left with nothing else.

Using the basic requisites of socialism’s core ideology of confiscation and redistribution of private property, combined with enforced collectivism and a strong central planning apparatus that erases individual liberty, the economy and society would be entirely transformed. Car and air travel would be banned, except for the elite of course, and law enforcement. All jobs created would be unionized, and every family given a guaranteed income and paid retirement, even those unwilling to work. Such ideas though could never be attained because many citizens don’t want to be unionized, they don’t want to have to rebuild a perfectly good home, give up their car or to never fly again. And especially don’t want to fund the living expenses and retirement of other people who are “unwilling to work”. Under the globalist’s regime the vast majority who do have a job, will be working for the government. So the only way left for the globalists is to continue creating the effects of inequality, poverty and the overall deterioration of society, which will only lead to widespread chaos and violence.

From Antifa to democratic socialists, the goal of the globalists is to use such extreme leftist groups to prod conservative movements, which are the primary threat to globalism. To make people feel unsafe yet provide no dialogue. Instead will forcibly make you believe in their ideology through violent protests and harassment where you dine and live. You will not have freedom of speech and must be anti-constitutional. Mussolini would be proud of them. They are currently trying to manipulate conservatives into voluntarily abandoning their principles of constitutional liberty and limited government. By making certain conservatives into tyrants. In order to dismantle democratic institutions as fast as possible and install a complete centralized command economy run by unelected tsars, which is neither participatory nor democratic.

But a new paradigm is organically evolving: new economic systems, sustainable communities, solar energy, organic farming, liquid democracy, worker co-ops and new media. For all the problems we are confronted by, there are existing viable solutions. There is much to feel positive about. There is currently many decentralized global uprisings, undermining systems of centralized and consolidated power around the globe. A new world is being born. It remains to be seen what will unfold, but if the world’s largest silent majority continue to stare into their phone, TV screens and tablets every moment of our waking lives the vision can be seen watching films such as Blade Runner (both of them), The Matrix, Clockwork Orange, the Purge films, Minority Report, Fahrenheit 451, the Running Man, and Soylent Green, among so many others. So many books as well, by the great visionaries Orwell, Huxley, and Atwood, et al.

Since the elite now know so much about us because they have created us, they are able to manipulate our psyches better than we even understand ourselves. But we do still have a choice. Indeed life is decisions, then how we live based on those decisions. And though there are many people who are growing acutely aware that much of what we say and do is becoming officially retrievable and could be used against us someday, somehow. Whether engaged in a phone discussion, email correspondence, online searches, banter at a party or even a quiet conversation at home, people are losing a sense of activity that is truly private. All that is left to do is to be relentlessly honest as possible with ourselves, friends, family, co-workers and social media followers. Be truthful when we see or hear an untruth. Because truth will set us free, and is actually the one thing the globalists cannot manipulate whether its about them, the world or us. But only if we stay open to each other. While silence is continuing complicity.

09/21/19

Inside Agendas 21 and 2030

A 17 Page Dense Essay

Some things about skeptics, which in ancient Greece were called skeptikos, defined as someone who doubted even the possibility of real knowledge. While the Latin word scepticus, meant being thoughtful, inquiring and reflective. Its most up to date definition is someone who questions validity or authenticity of something purporting to be factual. Whether values, plans, mainstream media news, the goals of those in power, statements, or the character of others.

Oddly, in science a healthy skepticism is a professional necessity, in religion, having belief without evidence is regarded as a virtue. Or as George Carlin once said, “Tell people, there’s an invisible man in the sky who created the universe, and the vast majority will believe you. Tell them the paint is wet, and they have to touch it to be sure.

Just because someone tells us something, or we see something online or on TV, until otherwise proven by facts, actions, and/or behaviour, we should take it with a grain of salt. Much like when we were young children walking around asking, why, how come, why not, and what do you mean? To do otherwise would seem something was wrong with us. But then we also continue to give people the benefit of the doubt, which is also pretty crazy. Considering this is where the predators, exploiters, and abusers hide behind. Hence, over 95 per cent of child and spousal mental, physical and sexual abuse is done by a known family member.

One should consider things, examine them, and not take them for granted, don’t ya think? Research and listen to all sides of any debate or information received, no matter how painful it may be. Through understanding where all sides are coming from, is where the nuggets of truth stand out when comparing them, and which may be missed by the many who know of only one side. Because either side whether liberal or conservative are sometimes right and sometimes not.

Being skeptical is similar to critical thinking in that it does not mean criticizing everything and everybody in sight. Critical thinking is when we use all our intellectual skills by means of observation, learning, experience, reasoning and communication, to form a reliable guide to belief. Sadly we have replaced such problem-solving ability with self-righteousness.

George Orwell wrote, “The further a society drifts from the truth, the more it will hate those that speak it”, so true. Today anyone who criticizes say, the government of Israel’s Zionist policies against the Palestinians are deemed anti-Semitic, even though one doesn’t need to be Jewish to be a Zionist, indeed in the US and UK there are many Christian-Zionists. Because Judaism is a religion, Zionism is a political ideology. Or he, who questions government explanations for events and actions, is labelled a conspiracy nut or dissident. To criticize and question the propaganda that portrays Russia as the bad man in the world, one is deemed a Putin puppet. Say mainstream media is in the smear business, they will smear you. Question immigration policy one is a racist, open a door for a lady while smiling, a sexist. Recently a white guy got his knickers in a twist because I wouldn’t apologize for being white, just like a black guy wouldn’t apologize for being black or an Asian guy wouldn’t apologize for being Asian.

Those who are skeptical simply want the truth. As someone once said “Being intelligent…….not because you question everything, but because you question everything you think you know.” People are skeptical and so we should be. There are also people who simply don’t like to be lied to or made fun of, or feel they are, which often only brings paranoia and distrust. Others don’t want to be considered “the other” by their tribe, so will believe what they are told and ignore the discrepancies in the actions and behaviour of others in their own tribe. And of course there are also people who are skeptic of skeptics.

Much of what is written here does not necessarily mean it is what I truly believe, for I remain skeptical, but it is what I have found to be confirmed, known, and discussed whether by theory or fact, and from multiple sources, and simply makes sense. So until further information presents itself, maybe it’s closer to the truth. For there are many things we have been told that do not make sense, and so very much we do not nor will ever know.

For many people all we know of history is our own, and with history being re-written all the time to line up with today’s narrative, what we think went down and what actually did, lies in a fog that covers us all as a cloak and unfortunately, will soon be forgotten. Such deception is what we need to free ourselves from. The following is what I think about the global initiatives, Agenda 21 and 30, and why I think they are insidious. I don’t think I’m sharing anything new, other than following dots along threads, falling down rabbit holes, researching, and hopefully looking at things under a different light. Personally I’d be unable to make such things up.

Dogmatism and skepticism are both, in a sense, absolute philosophies; one is certain of knowing, the other of not knowing. What philosophy should dissipate is certainty, whether of knowledge or ignorance.” – Bertrand Russell

Not to be read by the faint of heart, easily triggered, close minded or unhinged, and anyone who doesn’t want to know about anything that may disrupt their daily routine and programming. But then maybe it should.

The Back Story

Signed in 1992 by 177 countries, Agenda 21 is a legally non-binding statement of intent, and not a treaty, of the United Nations with regard to sustainable development. A product of the Earth (Rio) Summit (UN Conference on Environment and Development) held in Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, that year. It is based on the economy, environment and social equity, and targets five main goals, People, the Planet, Prosperity, Peace and Partnership. In the US their Senate did not hold a formal debate or vote on it when President George H. W. Bush signed it, but did have support from Representatives Nancy Pelosi, Eliot Engel and William Broomfield. It also enacted the polluter pays principle, to make a party responsible for producing pollution responsible for paying for the damage done to the natural environment or simply a Carbon Tax. Which doesn’t stop anyone from polluting; it just means they have to pay a little extra for it.

Speaking at the Rio summit, 12 year old Severn Cullis-Suzuki, daughter of Canadian environmentalist David Suzuki, spoke about how she was “afraid to breath the air” or go out in the sun, and warned of mass extinctions of plants and animals. She pleaded that rich nations should stop spending money on wars and instead, “Let go of some of our wealth”. She felt, “At school, even in kindergarten, you teach us how to behave in the world. You teach us not to fight with others, to work things out, to respect others, to clean up our mess, not to hurt other creatures, to share, not be greedy. Then why do you go out and do the things you tell us not to do? Do not forget why you are attending these conferences, who you are doing this for. We are your own children. You are deciding what kind of a world we are growing up in.”

They did decide, by continuing on status quo for nearly 30 years, implementing their Agenda 21 along the way. Ms Suzuki’s language was similar to angry 16-year-old girl Greta Thunberg, who tried shaming world leaders in a tearful tirade at the UN, in September/2019, because she has been brainwashed to believe the world will cease to exist in ten years. It’s an odd way to go about dealing with a problem. Something like climate change, where only a part of the problem is from human activity, one would think cooperation would be the way to go, instead of berating and screaming. Thunberg especially went after Germany, France, Brazil, Argentina and Turkey. She even filed a legal formal complaint against them for their carbon emissions, yet didn’t have anything to say about the largest polluters in the world, the US and China. Conveniently her speech overshadowed the fact that at the same UN conference, over 50 countries strongly denounced and spoke out against Israel’s apartheid of Palestine.

In 1996 Bill Clinton put forth America’s own version of the plan through the “Presidential Council on Sustainable Development”, which published the book “Sustainable America – A New Consensus”, and which outlines plans for its indoctrination, propaganda, and to neutralize opposition. The focal points of Agenda 21 in the US became the Division Chief for Sustainable Development and Multilateral Affairs, Office of Environmental Policy, Bureau of Oceans and International Environmental and Scientific Affairs, and the US Department of State. In other countries, such as the UK, Canada, France, and Australia, Agenda 21 is overseen by similar and corresponding agencies. In effect it is a control of resources and populations plan, with a side of eugenics, and an attempt to put the “collective” agenda over individual rights. And very few have heard about it.

Nor of the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development, which was adopted by 193 UN member states in September 2015 at a UN summit. The 2030 Agenda is universal, applying to all countries and requiring them for the next 15 years, “to accelerate climate change and environmental protection, reduce unemployment, strengthen gender equality, and promote peaceful societies if the world is to eradicate poverty and shift into a more sustainable development”. They recognize that a range of social needs, including education, health, and social protection, can be addressed by building economic growth.

The 2030 Agenda targets the same five main goals of Agenda 21, but that extra effort was to be given to 17 new Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) to the original document. Right out of Huxley’s Brave New World, the goals now include,

  • No Poverty
  • Zero Hunger
  • Good Health and Well-being
  • Quality Education
  • Gender Equality
  • Clean Water and Sanitation
  • Affordable and Clean Energy
  • Decent Work and Economic Growth
  • Industry, Innovation and Infrastructure
  • Reduced Inequality
  • Sustainable Cities and Communities
  • Responsible Consumption and Production
  • Climate Action
  • Life Below Water
  • Life on Land
  • Peace and Justice
  • Strong Institutions and Partnerships

And that all these goals are achieved before 2030, only ten years away, or the world ends. Their motto is, “If we realize our ambitions across the full extent of the Agenda, the lives of all will be profoundly improved and our world will be transformed for the better.” Sounds lovely in a controlling sort of way, with the actual agenda and the gritty details on how they want to reach such goals, we will be discussing later, below.

Agenda 21 was set up to be executed at local, national, and global levels. By going through the UN, the people behind the agenda are doing an end run around national governments and working directly with local governments and multilateral organizations. It is a calculated attempt to end sovereignty of both soul and country, by a central un-elected authority controlling everything, and reshaping consumption patterns as to what we buy, eat, use, and how and where we are to live. They use the control of Marxist/totalitarian concepts, but without the revolution part, thus it has been instead spoon-fed to us for over fifty years.

Those behind such a project are the same geopolitical plutocratic elite who are controlling much of the narrative today. For the sake of a number of variations, we’ll call such plutocratic elite and their corporations, globalists. And if we are being honest here, after seeing and listening to Mark Zuckerberg, do you actually believe he is running one of the largest companies in the world? At the top are families who do not align themselves with any country or government. They do not care for the humanity they are trying to reform, nor the environment, with generational paedophilia running deep in their veins. Such globalists hold massive control over just about everything, with their central banks literally running much of the world. Families such as the Payseur, Nobel, Astor, DuPont, Reynolds, Rockefeller, and Rothschild, control the banks and corporations at the top, who then control governments by giving politicians absurd amounts of money towards their campaigns, and purchasing their bias and leniency through a process we call gerrymandering and lobbying. It continues for generations as the corporations offer lots of possible lucrative job and business opportunities for not only politicians after they leave office, but their spouses, even their grown kids.

They all live within bubbles, where they and their family only hang out with others in the same bubble. Most all, feel above the rest of us regular folk, and don’t trust us to make our own decisions, because they fabricated who we are and know us very well, so feel they must decide for us. And though they are evil in their intentions, like many terrorists they are not madmen. They are very well organized, extremely dedicated, disciplined, and usually “retaliation proof”.

The globalists came to ruling the world when they took control of the oil industry at the end of the 19th century. Before that time they were railroad barons, financiers, ship builders, arms manufacturers, and industrialists. They expanded their central banking system globally, from the original 12 banks that made up the Bank of England (House of Rothschild), which was managed at the time by the corporation, The City of London, which contrary to popular belief is not a part of England, just as Washington DC is not a part of the US. The City of London came into fruition after The English Civil War in the 17th century, while Washington DC was incorporated in 1871, and would later allow the globalists to open their private, central bank, the Federal Reserve in 1913, to eventually make and keep the US dollar the global default currency of exchange. This would prove handy because by 1945 their endeavours during their British Empire had come to a close, so they simply shifted focus onto their new empire. And their new empire, though currently being attacked, has been very successful. In 2000 the only State central banks not owned by them, included China, Russia, Afghanistan, Iraq, Iran, Libya, Sudan, North Korea, and Cuba. Today the holdouts are only China, Russia, Iran, North Korea, and Cuba.

A few years after the Federal Reserve came into being; in 1921 the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR) was founded by British Oxford Rhodes scholars and Fabians. It is a US nonprofit, 4900 member organization, publisher, and think tank specializing in US foreign policy and international affairs. Headquartered in New York City, they have an additional office in Washington DC. Its membership has included senior politicians, more than a dozen secretaries of state, CIA directors, bankers, lawyers, professors, and senior media figures. Today the CFR promotes globalization, free trade, reducing financial regulations on transnational corporations, and economic consolidation into regional blocs such as NAFTA and the European Union, and develops policy recommendations that reflect these goals. They are the most influential foreign-policy think tank in the US, dictating much of US policy whether foreign or domestic. In the mid-nineties, they and the neoconservative think tank, Project for the New American Century (PNAC), whose members included Dick Cheney, Donald Rumsfeld, Paul Wolfowitz, Robert Kagan, Richard Perle, Elliott Abrams, and John Bolton, came up with a plan for the US’s future role in the world. The report called for a “new Pearl Harbor” type event, which would give the US a rationale to enter the Middle East militarily and change the entire political landscape. A few years later, 9/11 accomplished this goal. The globalists have known for over a century that they only need to get away with one major false flag event every couple of decades to push the populace into a war or a cultural crisis which can be exploited. The problem for the US is after 9/11 they insanely began walking the road the previous Soviet Union had walked. Where after a decade-long bungled war in Afghanistan the Soviet Union went bankrupt and their communist manifesto dissolved.

On the flip side, The John Birch Society, founded by the Koch brother’s father, Fred Koch, in 1958, represents a conservative political philosophy found primarily in the US stressing tradition, limited government and civil society, along with religious, regional, national and Western identity. They echo the most common accusation against the CFR, that it is “Guilty of conspiring with others to build a one world government…”

The globalist’s network of central banks today include the American bank Goldman Sachs, which was founded in 1869, and JPMorgan Chase & Co. which is the largest bank in the US, and the world’s sixth largest bank by total assets (US $2.6 trillion). Before 2000 it was the Bank of the Manhattan Company, founded in 1799, and had gained incredible power and wealth after literally making a killing over the American Civil War, and from the loans given to rebuild. Six years after the Civil War, Washington DC became the corporation it is. Other central banks include Barclays PLC (founded in 1690) in the City of London, the German, Deutsche Bank AG (1870); the French, Société Générale S.A. or SocGen (1864); the Swedish, Swedbank AB (1820), and the Swiss investment bank UBS Group AG (1862), one of the “biggest, most powerful financial institutions in the world”. Interestingly most of these banks were founded within and around the same decade of the Civil War, for the globalists had to be able to manage and distribute the incredible amounts of money they had made off both sides during the war.

By the end of the 1940’s the globalists had the International Monetary Fund (IMF), which was to be the keeper of the rules and the main instrument of public international management, and the World Bank Group (WBG). The WBG is a group of five international organizations that make leveraged loans to developing countries. Both began lending money out hand over fist, even to countries that had no chance in hell of ever paying the loan back.

After making hundreds of billions of dollars from both World Wars, with US arms manufacturers making over $330 billion US dollars on World War II alone, they thought, why stop there, let’s make it foreign policy. Meanwhile, the Soviet Union would begin to build their own nuclear weapons and erect the Iron Curtain, behind which lay the great central and eastern European cities of Warsaw, Berlin, Prague, Vienna, Budapest, Belgrade, Bucharest and Sofia, enclosing them off for forty-six years, until the already mentioned Soviet demise in 1991.

From the money made from arms, food, and supply sales, and the resulting loans to rebuild, the globalists would create the industrial military complex. Their tentacles would eventually come to control public education systems, food distribution networks, big-Pharma corporations, agriculture, chemical industries, Western mainstream media, Hollywood, most Western intelligence organizations, and NATO, who’s sole job is to control global energy systems, pipelines and sea lanes.

After WW II they would also create a huge middle-class, good jobs, and ever new things to purchase, whether one needed it or not. Eventually they would attempt to control the narrative, carry out social engineering projects, and other experimentation at will. They were close to achieving such goals, but by the mid-sixties, millions of rebelling and questioning young people were becoming aware for the need to change the Western world system that their parents and grandparents had passed down to them. And which had ironically given them the privilege to question their upbringing and culture. They began to question the scam being created, the belief that profit-driven corporations would protect the larger public interest in a sustainable environment. They began to question the establishment which they called the “man”, and the morality of the Vietnam War. Anti-war and anti-establishment protests, along with ongoing racial wars, erupted around the world. National guardsmen were shooting civilians and ignorant whites were killing proud black people, while free-love bloomed. Cultures began to change with the whiff of chaos and rebellion in the air, which was right up the globalist’s alley, for they knew that conflicts often bring change, and that controlled conflicts bring controlled change.

These searching young people represented the leading edge of the post WW II baby boom (born between 1945 and 1964) that were coming of age (18 to 20 years old) in the mid sixties, and who began questioning what was going on in society. The words to Bob Dylan’s “Blowin’ in the Wind”, which he wrote in 1962, sung by the Mamas and Papas, then by himself on his Freewheelin’ album in 1963, encapsulates what was about to happen perfectly. And which continues to happen. Give it a listen.

By the early 70’s the questioning came to a halt, with the elimination of the anti-war movement (right up to the present day), the assassinations of political and cultural leaders, a debt-fuelled version of consumer capitalism being pumped into our minds and culture, the creation of a welfare state, increased propaganda against the values and morals of family, empathy, ethics, community, and Christianity (with the Roman Catholic version and their priests, further staining such belief). The wars became the ones against either a leader of a country, who’s resources were needed and replaced with someone who would do as NATO told them to do, or well advertised wars against poverty and drugs, which brought further poverty and ever more drugs into western communities. After 1991, the communist was replaced with the terrorist.

By President Ronald Reagan’s exit from office, such neo-conservative, revisionist Zionists had infiltrated the US State Department and the Pentagon, taken control of foreign policy, and both the democrat and republican parties, and began to take over the republic. In their own bubble the neo-conservative Koch brothers have been doing the same thing.

Ironically, in the protracted war that became their downfall, the Soviet’s opponents in Afghanistan, were trained and armed by the US and UK, and would later become the opponents in the US/UK wars on terror. At the same time, after taking out Libya, the terrorists there would become ISIS, armed by the US/UK and inserted into Iraq and Syria. Where the US/UK then proceeded to pretend they bombed the living daylights out of them. While in actual fact the Iraqi and Syrian armies did all the heavy lifting and took the vast majority of casualties. Similar to the defeat of Nazi Germany, where nearly three-quarters of the over 5 million German fighters who died in the war, died fighting against the Soviets.

Today this rebellious group of the baby boomers are all over 70 years of age, and with many of the rest of us boomers who followed them, think we have changed our attitudes or behaviour since that time, but in many ways we have not. Writer Sebastian Gorka, affectionately and sardonically calls boomers, the fruit of the 60’s. We bought into, what James Kunstler describes as “a generation of nothing matters and anything goes” and “if it feels good, do it”. Ironically, today they’ve even got us apologizing for everything we had ever done while growing up, and for what our fathers and grandfathers had ever done.

The movements for peace, civil rights, the women’s movement, environmental concerns, and equal rights were cast aside, and pessimism and cultural irrationalism began to replace them. Nothing was long term anymore, many of the New Deal infrastructure projects like building highways and bridges, upgrading pipes, carrying out projects like the St Lawrence Seaway, building levees and dykes, and even the US Space Program, were either shelved or cancelled. It became all about short-term gains and pleasures, with future goods the sum of such pleasures. Corporations inflated their profits, thinking only of the next quarter, their goals all short term. But in doing so, they seem to have ignored the longer term realities of diminishing consumer purchasing power and sales. The power of money no longer served the real productive wealth of society. It became all about controlling it, and it flowed to the top. Ever since the early seventies, and after getting rid of the gold standard, the Globalist’s Federal Reserve opened the doors on US markets to the world, and though it made wealthy families insanely wealthy, to-date it has cost the US a current trade deficit of over US$12 trillion, a loss of over 70,000 factories, over 6 million jobs and a national debt of $22 trillion. The current US president may be trying to rectify this problem.

Following the first wave of boomers was the larger bulge of the boom, which peaked in 1959, of which I was included the year before. Many of our parents had been too young to have fought in WW II and most of them were already buying into the consumer capitalism model. By the time the rest of us baby boomers had come of age in the late 70’s and early 80’s most of us were already following the neo-liberal agenda like sheeple into the 1990s, and right up to the present day.

Voter participation declined, elections became a choice of personalities rather than a choice between alternatives, families began to break apart, and materialism, self-love, apathy, corruption and ego became all the rage. They played us like a flute, through our vanity and vices. They got us believing in self-indulgent market forces which in reality are removing any long term gain for future generations. So distracted we never stopped to think about our children’s or grand-children’s future.

Somehow all believing in unlimited growth upon a finite planet, we cruised through life avoiding the worst threats of nuclear annihilation, bombs being dropped on us, invasion, and economic depression, even as people in other countries suffered the consequences of superpower proxy wars, regime changes, and economic and environmental catastrophes. Many saw it coming, but as a majority said nothing, and we became the largest silent majority ever created in history. Along with the largest debt bubble ever created because we had to keep up to the Jones’s. We didn’t save for the future, we were indifferent to it, but our sheer numbers was soon deciding and influencing government policy, which since the early 90’s has been all based on age-based criteria of our own choosing and/or which we allowed to be implemented. Such a vast silent majority of the boomers, (70 per cent) is made up of mostly mainstream whites, because one cannot include minorities, which were being subjected to ill-treatment, racism and bigotry, or the immigrants who entered the Western world at the time, and who were raised differently, had a work ethic, assimilated into their communities, and were grateful.

We baby boomers (the youngest now 55 years old) biggest problem is that undoubtedly, after more than a half a century the majority of us, especially in Western countries, still hold our “ideals” as truths, but whose ideals. Whenever I see a new sports car with the top down on a sunny day, it’s always driven by a gray beard, not a man of action, rebellious or young. But then maybe that’s the point. We still dream for the white picket fenced, wraparound porch bungalow with a garden out back. Vacations to vineyards in Southern France and trips on cruise ships. Listening to the same music for fifty years, dance the same way, and still restoring, then just parking in a garage, our old, first cars. Snips, boob jobs, Botox, and lifts keep many pretty, but only from afar and not from inside. We creak at the knees, get used to our new hips, and are still hung up about something that happened thirty, forty years ago. We’re still popping pills, drinking like fish, and dressing like we’re twenty-one. And often, still acting like it. Our coping mechanism became cognitive dissonance, where we believe in things to be true when deep down we know they are untrue, and often wrong.

Ergo, many of the children of the boomers (Gen X) became the parents of today’s millennial’s. Like many of their parents, more often than not they had tossed aside the title of parent and became their child’s buddy instead. Thus, many millennial’s, born around the dawn of the 21st century, are a generation who have no understanding of cause and effect, effort and reward. Possessing no concept of humility yet expecting indulgence, they only allow happy thoughts and safe spaces of entitlement. This has been taught to them by both their parents and the government controlled neo-liberal dystopia called the public education system, from day-care as a baby to college. Authenticity, community and family all thrown aside in the pursuit of consumerism and fleeting fame, and that anyone can instantly become a pampered star, well friended or liked online, by simply generating controversy, and by being completely unashamed. While those millennials who happen to have been born white males, are often lumped in with all of us other white men, and blamed for all the world’s historical and contemporary evils.

Far too many of us boomers have also been afraid to rock the boat in any significant way by keeping it status quo for over forty years now. We all have a routine that simply must not be interrupted, with our neighbours now turning into tattle tales. Corporations have taken over democracy, with every natural resource and citizen a commodity, simply objects of trade and consumption and exploited to collapse. Populations lulled, misinformed and manipulated into surrendering their freedom and participation in government, through excess consumerism, sensationalism, and “manufactured consent”. It’s no wonder Alzheimer’s, the most common cause of dementia by damaging nerve connections in the brain, is also one of the fastest rising diseases. Our electro-chemical computer brain is short-circuiting. Or as someone once said, “We are running 21st century software on hardware last upgraded 50,000 years ago”.

We are also deathly afraid of losing our internet and phone, even though the globalists control most all global internet media, through companies like Google, Amazon, YouTube and Facebook, who is attempting to replace the American National Security Agency (NSA), which is responsible for global monitoring, collection, and processing of information and data for foreign and domestic intelligence and counterintelligence purposes of foreign governments and populations, including their own. And as of late are even attempting to create a “global” currency. Mainstream media in general is nothing but a corporate owned and corporate-advertiser funded mouth piece that is so well versed, has made us believe in the illusion that we have a choice in what is told to us.

As to controlling the narrative in the Western world, other than local stories and events, and parts of the internet, today, all news stories broadcast by mainstream news networks and most all newspapers, comes from only three international news organizations. They include the New York-based Associated Press (AP), founded in 1846. With only 4,000 employees, their stories reach over half the global population. The French, Agence France-Presse (AFP) founded in 1835, today it has over 4,000 employees in 201 locations in 151 countries. And the London-based Reuters (1851), part of a Canadian multinational media conglomerate owned by Thomson Reuters. As of 2019, current chairman David Thomson is listed as the wealthiest person in Canada, with an estimated net worth of $37.7 billion, and in the top thirty of richest people in the world. From these three entities come all our news stories, which are then simply copied and translated, with the same “key” words accented, and often presented with the same bias.

Crucial to the globalist’s control of the narrative was “Operation Mockingbird”. Started up in the early 1950’s, they used the US’s Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) to carry out psychological operations in the form of journalism to influence and direct mass opinion, as well as elite perspectives. They began bankrolling more than twenty-five foreign and domestic, press and news media wire services, magazines, publishing and newspapers, influencing media executives and reporters, and even inserting their own agents as reporters. Their reach extended into the New York Times, Washington Post, Disney, CBS, ABC news, Time magazine, Newsweek, and the National Enquirer, among many others. Today one can add CNN and MSNBC. They also bankrolled radio and TV broadcasting of Voice of America, Radio Free Europe, in Eastern Europe, Radio Liberty, and National Public Radio (NPR).

The operation is carried out by cooperating or unwitting reporters, who are given CIA written reports which are then repeated or cited, by the recipient reporters and would then, in turn, be cited throughout the media wire services and spread outwards. The mantra remaining the same, for it is a fact that people are more likely to believe that something is true after hearing it used many times. Nazi Germany, the Soviets, and China had all perfected such a phenomenon, where people will mistake repeated assertions for truth. Such a tactic is still very much in use today. It is what advertising and propaganda are based on.

As David Rockefeller of The Trilateral Commission, admitted in 1991, “We are grateful to The Washington Post, The New York Times, Time Magazine and other great publications whose directors have attended our meetings and respected their promises of discretion for almost forty years. It would have been impossible for us to develop our plan for the world if we had been subject to the bright lights of publicity during those years. But, the work is now much more sophisticated and prepared to march towards a world government. The supra-national sovereignty of an intellectual elite and world bankers is surely preferable to the national auto determination practised in past centuries.”

Also over the past forty years, especially after the fall of the Soviet Union, the globalists have also controlled most all Western countries’ status quo leadership circles, and the bias of the unelected government officials under them, who are called the deep state. And whether it’s a government or a corporate bureaucracy, both seem to show that perhaps Laurence J. Peter’s 1968, the “Peter Principle” has peaked. The Peter Principle is the logical idea that competent employees in a hierarchy will be promoted, but at a certain point will be promoted into positions for which they are incompetent. And that they will remain in those positions because they do not demonstrate any further competence that would move them up to the next level. Peter wrote, “Look around you where you work, and pick out the people who have reached their level of incompetence. You will see that in every hierarchy the cream rises until it sours. According to the Peter Principle, every position in a given hierarchy will eventually be filled by employees who are incompetent to fulfill the job duties of their respective positions. With everyone, going through the motions and keeping their eye on the prize, the pension lottery, even if it takes the best years of their lives to get there.

After the Israeli/Saudi operation 9/11, it only got worse. From Western Europe, through Belgium, France and Germany, the Scandinavian countries, the UK, Canada, New Zealand, and Australia among others, the globalist’s tentacles have reached far, some deeper than others. But the number is dwindling, with some of their vassals beginning to devour themselves. Especially places like the UK, Canada, Australia, and the US where the political beliefs of family and community of the silent-majority were predominately center-right or center-left with not much difference between them, but which is now being exterminated, as we stand in silence of our own demise.

The US on the other hand, was run by globalists up until three years ago, but since the 2016 election, this dynamic is changing, and has become a war between the globalist supported progressive socialist left, and the Trump administration. Because the status quo neo-liberal bipartisan neo-conservative Bush-Clinton-Obama crime families, are being dismissed, their cover blown.

It looks like the current US president’s agenda is stalling such globalization by trying to re-set supply chains, battling central banking and intelligence agencies, and weeding out corrupted unelected officials. The globalists who had been gleefully running things are losing their minds. Some fear and desperation has maybe taken hold with the current worldwide push on deglobalization, which would obviously disrupt their plans and agendas. Deglobalization will affect those nations who rely on exports the most, make the stock market volatile, harm, and in some cases destroy the Globalist’s central banks’ investments.

The globalists are also incensed that the US economy today is in reality holding steady, but their big banks on Wall Street are anxiously pacing back and forth, because their investments overseas are being exposed. They are also angry that the stock market is head-shakingly thriving. And angry that the current administration is in a war with China, trying to get the trade deficit under control, and in a war against the globalist’s private bank, the Federal Reserve, which is trying to do more harm than advertised by making decisions, hoping that by grounding the US economy the current president will not be re-elected. Their ultimate plan is to actually destroy the US’s hegemony, based on “ordo ab chao” (order out of the chaos). For chaos is actually what they want, and today, after forty years of trying, they’re nearly there, just as they were in the sixties and early seventies. Chaos will allow them to implement even more tyrannical control. The last straw will be when the US Constitution gets torn in half. And if they are unable to control the narrative and “dissidence” gets too out of control they’ll simply shut the internet down. Imagine that for a moment. It’d be like billions of heroin junkies, not getting their next fix and having no idea what to do.

While nations like Russia, Iran, and India, among a growing list of others, are not looking to be the next empire, but instead want their own sovereignty, living in a multi-polar world not a uni-polar one. They’d like to be left alone from the globalist’s and the neo-con/Zionists’ disruptive foreign policies, neo-liberal ideologies, intelligence and military industries, and their blind zeal for Armageddon. And would rather get on with such things as getting onboard China’s “Belt and Road Initiative”, where sovereign nations can trade freely with each other across Africa, Asia and Europe.

Martin Jacques, a senior fellow at Cambridge University, describes the Belt and Road Initiative (New Silk Roads) as offering “an alternative to the existing international order. The present international order was designed by and still essentially privileges the rich world, which represents only 15 per cent of the world’s population. BRI, on the other hand, is addressing at least two-thirds of the world’s population. This is extraordinarily important for this moment in history.” He goes on to say that the BRI “has the potential to offer another kind of world, another set of values, another set of imperatives, another way of organizing, another set of institutions, and another set of relationships.”

The Belt and Road is now configured as a vast, unique, Eurasia-wide infrastructure and trade development project extending all the way to Africa and Latin America. Currently more than 130 countries are engaged in linked projects, and partnering with 29 international organizations from the World Bank to the APEC, the Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation.

China meanwhile is no doubt one of the only countries truly interested in imperialism, but has taken the long road approach, as is their nature. Today their influence is everywhere, and we chose to ignore it for the past thirty years, because it was cheap to do so.

And though the US gets ever more antagonistic, Russia and China don’t actually project much power outside their own borders, though within, they are very much in control and very well defended. Russia does attempt to project power, but if you notice it’s only over the Russian territories it lost as punishment for losing the Cold War. While China is starting to project more military power, they have already shown what they can do with economic power and influence.

Today the globalists are also in a fight because once again, people are simply not buying their bullshit any more. It’s “Blowin in the Wind” all over again. Whether an economic system which only benefits those at the top, progressive socialist propaganda and policies, a surveillance state, never ending wars, or a perhaps false fear, of climate change and over-population.

Just maybe, before history’s largest silent majority say goodbye, we can put on our big-boy and big-girl pants and pull our heads out of our butts. It’s not all about us individually, it never was, and we should have already learned that. Especially when, it is becoming ever more obvious that those at the top, being typical psychopaths, are allowing their arrogance to eventually be their downfall. They are currently exposing themselves because they don’t care anymore what we think or that we know. If status quo remains, the next generation will be divided, obedient and docile to an extreme, and of course heavily medicated. At which time can be easily culled from the herd when needed.

But the globalists are still very much a force to be reckoned with, their representatives include George Soros and his foundation, the Open Society, the Bilderberg Group, the Royal Family, the Roman Catholic Church, the CIA affiliated National Endowment for Democracy (NED), the World Wildlife Fund (WWF) and people like Al Gore, Bill Gates, Bono, the Davos crowd that attend the World Economic Forum seminars every year, and mainstream media and Hollywood.This also includes the gala three day meetings a few times a year in some luxury avenue, where the stars of Hollywood and mainstream media (the influencers), hobnob with a gaggle of egotistic billionaires (the controllers), having polite talks about climate change and how to keep the masses entertained and distracted. To get to the grand affair many come in their super yachts, some flying in first class but most in their own or charted private aircraft. Then fly, sail and/or be driven home to their mansions and palaces and get their teeth re-whitened and faces lifted.

The globalists are estimated to still control well over 40 per cent of the entire global economy through 147 very tightly knit mega-corporations, which are managed by only four firms, The Vanguard Group, McGraw-Hill, CME Group, and Barclays. Together, they dominate the world of indexing, meaning they hold much power over the world’s money. The Vanguard Group,an American investment management company, is the largest provider of mutual funds in the world, managing over US$3 trillion. They were the biggest shareholder in Monsanto, before it was recently sold for US$63 billion to one of the world’s largest pharmaceutical and genetically-modified-food companies, Bayer AG. Vanguard is also the biggest shareholder in Halliburton, as Dick Cheney is one of the bigger shareholders in Vanguard. They are also the second biggest shareholder in Facebook, the third biggest in Whole Foods, the second biggest in Hain Celestial Foods, and the biggest shareholder in the largest defence corporation in the world, Lockheed Martin.

In a large nut shell, the globalist’s agendas are behind zoning, land and water use control, wealth redistribution, one currency, cap and trade, smart grid of AI and 5G, smart meters, carbon taxes, high gasoline prices, global citizens, global public education system, common core nationalized education standards, bio-fuels, Marxist ideology advancing across the world, food control, gun control, health control, unchecked immigration and open borders so as to strip countries of their identity, and color-coded uprisings and other coups against the few countries left in the world who do not abide by the globalist’s central bank system.

In many ways it can be said the globalists are fascists disguised as Marxist socialists. For though Russian communist Vladimir Lenin (1870-1924), called fascism “capitalism in decay”, the founder of fascism, Italian Benito Mussolini (1883-1945) described it where, “Fascism should more appropriately be called Corporatism because it is a merger of state and corporate power.” In actual fact fascism is a form of radical authoritarian nationalism, and maliciously anti-liberal, anti-communist and anti-conservative. To confuse things even further or perhaps just Orwellian logic, the progressive left’s violent black attired, hooded and masked, social justice terrorists, call themselves Antifa (anti-fascists).

While this state of affairs has been playing out over the last few years, the globalists have accelerated pushing the basis for Agenda 21, as well as their 2030 Agenda, by using the fears of climate change and over population, whether they are real or not. This is what they tell us, and many believe. As such we are becoming demoralized and disengaged, with more and more people feeling confused, insecure, divided and feeling helpless in their acceptance of victimhood. We are even passing this on to our children. There are perhaps tens of millions of pre-teens who now believe the world is going to end in ten years. Hello anxiety and panic attacks. How dare we do such a thing to our children? While the silent majority are unwilling to speak out or take risks of any kind for fear of losing their job, knowing there is perhaps no other job to go to, and of losing family, house and home. Or the worst, shun from their tribe.

With a soon to be human population of eight billion, for life to go on for those at the top, a plan had to be implemented to control such expanding growth and most importantly, to control such numbers. They boldly and insanely, seem to hold the fictional book 1984, written by George Orwell in 1949, as a template of how a totalitarian complex can control and manage the world and every person’s identity.Where, “War is peace. Freedom is slavery. Ignorance is strength.”

Since the early 1970’s globalist/totalitarian states have risen slowly and quietly, with most tyrants, but a puppet to the globalists. It begins with a controlled economic decline, which sometimes takes generations. Then through economic systems such as inflation, low wages, and an inadequate job market, make people rely on government. Get them tuning out, turning on, or simply overwhelmed and distracted with their daily existence. Then get the people to trade freedom for the illusion of safety. American statesman, diplomat, author, scientist, and inventor, Ben Franklin (1706-1790), thought that “Those who trade liberty for a little bit of security deserve neither”. Which I totally agree with, since it leads to the end of personal sovereignty.

Gradually the populace will become desperate and lack a greater purpose or mission in life, and eventually come to the realization they have neither productive capacity nor self-empowerment, and lose all sense of independence and look for others instead of themselves to solve their problems. This is when many deem themselves a victim. Next up, control subversiveness, where no one dares to do anything outside of collective norms for fear they would be interpreted as socially negative, and finally and just as importantly, de-weaponize and feminize the populace. A world where one must always be politically correct, all follow the same narrative, and not to upset others or the government.

After years of research of all sides, and looking out my window everyday living on a boat, and not being a scientist or educated, my personal theory on climate change is that the atmosphere is a chemistry experiment, adding and subtracting molecules, as are the oceans and the land, and that a disruption to normal climate cycles has already happened, and there is not anything humanity can do about it, except to not make it worse. This was already known in the 1970’s but like everything else that was rubbed out at that time it was squelched until later when it would be needed as an excuse. Much like the excuse the US used for dropping two atomic bombs, and fire-bombing all of Japan’s major cities, killing nearly one million people in one week, and which they would have kept doing, to save the lives of American troops who would eventually have had to storm empty beaches.

Weather will become extreme, and like we have been doing for thousands of years we will have to adapt, and will have time to adapt. Any impacts we have made on the atmosphere and the environment can be off-set with continued climate action which will allow the planet’s weather to get back to its normal cyclical rhythm. The tipping point may have passed, but won’t really affect us for another few decades, when it may get severe, but eventually would change, as it always has. Remember no matter what we do to the surface of this planet, and whether we are here or not, it will continue to unfeelingly spin for many more billions of years, going through ice ages, volcanic eruptions, and earthquakes, which all will cause climate disruption. I figure the most critical issues to a disrupted climate would be either too much water or not enough, and the resilience of ecosystems. I also think that climate disruption is the least of our worries, but of course only if it does not interfere with our need for fresh drinking water and food because regardless of anything else, without such basic needs our species will die. Though many today will feel as though they have died if the internet ever shuts down or they can’t turn their phone on.

The globalists and their central banks that are running their “grand green design”, called the Green New Deal in the US, believe that green “low energy flux density” sources of energy would constrict global population and that is exactly what they want.British scientist and pioneer of the sustainable development movement, and who co-founded the Club of Rome in 1968,Alexander King, wrote in 1990, “In searching for a new enemy to unite us, we came up with the idea that pollution, the threat of global warming, water shortages, famine and the like would fit the bill…. All these dangers are caused by human intervention, and it is only through changed attitudes and behaviour that they can be overcome. The real enemy then, is humanity itself.”

In order to keep the house of cards standing, it has been postulated that such people-hating globalist’s plans hinge on sacrificing the working poor, the impoverished, seniors on fixed incomes, people with disabilities and the tens of millions of people living between starvation and death. Afterwards, the percentage of people left will continue status quo, then a few years down the road, with ever more dwindling resources, another cull would then be needed. It is why most democratic and liberal cities ignore gang violence, oppose school choice, promote abortion, support socialism, and neglect poor inner city neighbourhoods because they know those “folks” are simply victimizing each other, and doing their job for them.

This is why global warming is still a debate, for it will conveniently affect those who will-not or cannot adapt to a changing environment. The first to go will be the poorest and most vulnerable, including their livelihoods, homes, and children. Indeed, some of the most wealthy and powerful on the planet have their sanctuaries already built all around the globe, and ready to move into at a moment’s notice. Sanctuaries, whether desolate, underground or not, surrounded by a well defendable wall. Yet they don’t want walls separating nations. Regardless, they have quietly prepared for when the storm of chaos they created finally hits the fan. They will then make even more money and gain even more power through “disaster capitalism”. They made the cake so I guess they get to eat it too. Heck, they’ve already licked off all the icing.

Climate change aside, for there has always been, and though we have altered even that, we have time to change our ways and consumption habits ingrained in us by the establishment. And once again, as we have always done throughout human history, we will have to adapt. As to the effects of our consumption, we’ve left a trail of deforestation, compromised fresh water sources, degradation of top soil and ecosystems, “dead zone” ocean acidification, disrupted climate conditions, and pollution of our rivers, lakes, seas, the air we breathe, and our minds. We have also degraded our moral values, and any critical or rational thinking. This is all on us, so we must start talking to each other. We are all equal, except for our individual ideas.

We’ve spent the last fifty years believing in an economic system that was corrupt and rigged from the start, and which only benefited the already rich. It’s all too much. Because we also have to live our daily lives, simply trying to make ends meet, care for our family and friends, interact with perhaps the one hundred people we see regularly in our lives and who make up our tribe. Have a job and a purpose to get up in the morning, to love and be loved, and have the courage to keep putting one step in front of the other.

But don’t worry the globalists have a plan. But we must remember such a plan doesn’t have to be this way. Only we can derail it. But sadly and wishing I didn’t have to say it, after saying nothing for over forty-five years already we probably won’t this time either. And though there is still hope, the numbers who are addicted to Aldous Huxley’s “soma” dictate something all together different. All the while we take another bite from the apple, the other hand anxiously clutching a smart phone.

It’s like we’ve become packs of dogs where after a talking head stands up, points somewhere and yells “squirrel” at the top of their lungs, we all go off running, barking our heads off. But we are supposedly smarter than dogs, so we’ll go off running whenever a MSM talking head comes up with any number of words to replace the word squirrel, whether Russia!, Racist!, Ukraine! or Impeach! Then like a pack of dogs chasing a car and catching up to it, we don’t know what to do about it when we get there.

As of late, the countries that are still adhering to Agenda 21 and 30 are all ever more rapidly pumping out disinformation to get their plans in place, even using children as their “spokespersons”. Countries are now declaring “national climate emergencies”, which is odd because climate change is global not national. The fear of rising sea levels is used for creating plans to sterilize waterfront from development, building levees and dykes, and buying out, then destroying homes in vulnerable areas. Then control access and use of the shoreline. In reality, sea levels will become a major problem in about fifty to eighty years, but then, even a rise of only half a foot will impact many places and people around the world. They will continue to rise if the melting of snow pack and glaciers on land continues, not from the melting of sea ice at the poles. Don’t believe me? Take a glass of water with an ice cube in it and fill to just before it would overflow, then just wait for the ice cube to melt.

Once again we have the time to adapt to rising sea levels, if we so choose. At the same time globalist environmental groups such as the WWF are running campaigns to disrupt the flow of natural gas to countries like South Africa, India, the Philippines, South Korea, Japan and China, so these same countries are instead building a combined 1,800 new coal-fired plants, which emit twice as much carbon dioxide as natural gas plants. As it is, urbanization and deforestation effects climate disruption as much or more than fossil-fuel emissions. Consider the push for bio-fuels, which means more rain forests are deforested, and then huge palm oil plantations are planted in their stead to supply the needed ingredients for bio-fuel. Leaders in municipalities in many countries are even pushing to sue fossil-fuel companies for causing climate change, yet 70 per cent of their emissions come from their own populations.

One must also consider the early 20th century proponents of the use of eugenics to control the population, because in the globalist’s mind’s eye things like CO2 emissions or consumption of resources is not the problem, people are.

In the 1920s, various theories of eugenics were so popular among intellectuals in the US that 75 per cent of colleges offered courses on eugenics. When researching the medical experiments, including sterilization programs, which went on around this time on unsuspecting people in Latin America, the Philippines, and the US itself, I had to swallow the bile that rose in my throat.

In 1916, Margaret Sanger (1879-1966) opened the first birth control clinic in the US (Brooklyn); in 1942 it would become Planned Parenthood. Sanger believed that birth control and sterilization should be voluntary, and not based on race, and that all women should have the right to choose when to be pregnant. Out of the other side of her mouth she agreed with much of what the proponents of eugenics believed, to “assist the race toward the elimination of the unfit”, and advocated “the voluntary hospitalization or sterilization of people with untreatable, disabling, hereditary conditions, and limits on the immigration of the diseased”.

Until 1973, Planned Parenthood provided services such as birth control, clinical breast examinations, cervical cancer screening, pregnancy testing and pregnancy options counselling, testing and treatment for sexually transmitted infections, sex education and vasectomies. But after the landmark abortion rights case Roe v Wade that year, they also began acting as an abortion provider. Since 1973, in the US there have been more than 56 million abortions performed (17 million black), half were performed by Planned Parenthood. This number does not include abortions carried out in California (about 13 per cent of the US population) or New Hampshire, since they have both failed to report the numbers since 1998.

In their 2014 Annual Report, Planned Parenthood, with over 600 clinics in the US (80 per cent of which are in poor and predominately black communities), reported seeing over 2.5 million patients in over 4 million clinical visits, and performing a total of nearly 9.5 million discrete services for them, including 324,000 abortions, with 900 black babies aborted every day. Planned Parenthood is also global, with more than 149 member associations working in more than 189 countries. Its combined annual revenue is US$1.3 billion, including approximately $530 million in government funding.

Four years after Planned Parenthood’s inception, Eugenics Society president and UNESCO (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization) founder Julian Huxley, agreed with many others, including Margaret Sanger, that much of the population were “undesirables and weeds”. He wrote in 1946, “Political unification in some sort of world government will be required… Even though… any radical eugenic policy will be for many years politically and psychologically impossible, it will be important for UNESCO to see that the eugenic problem is examined with the greatest care, and that the public mind is informed of the issues at stake so that much that now is unthinkable may at least become thinkable.” But Hitler had given eugenics and propaganda, a bad name over the previous years so they had to be re-branded. And they were. They were now called “sustainability” and “public relations”.

In 1968, and in order to keep the ball rolling, the Club of Rome was formed by two misanthropes named Aurelio Peccei, and the previously mentioned Sir Alexander King. Its members would include current and former heads of state, the Royal Family, UN bureaucrats, high-level politicians and government officials, diplomats, scientists, economists, and business leaders from around the globe. They promise they share a common concern for the future of humanity and strive to make a difference. And all agree that society’s best form of governance is a scientific dictatorship.

Bertrand Russell (1872 -1970), a British philosopher, mathematician, historian, writer, social critic, political activist, and Nobel laureate also argued for a “scientific society”, where he thought war would be abolished, population growth would be limited, and prosperity would be shared. He felt the establishment of a “single supreme world government” would be able to enforce peace.

In Quebec in 1971, the Club of Rome got Prime Minister Pierre Trudeau to allocate tax payer money to begin a two year project to write a book called The Limits to Growth, which became the blueprint of this new anti-humanist form of the eugenics movement by fooling us in believing they are simply consciously reforming the system, and which would eventually birth today’s Green New Deal agenda. Interestingly, while the progressive neo-socialists are demanding Medicare for all, free college, and universal basic income, it is actually encouraged and orchestrated by the hundreds of billions of dollars the globalists have made from the banking, healthcare, national defence and higher education cartels.

Along with Trudeau, a group of the already mentioned Oxford trained Rhodes Scholars on the Council on Foreign Relations, and privy councillors centered on Alexander King, Maurice Strong, Maurice Lamontagne (founder of Environment Canada), Michael Pitfield (Privy Council Clerk and founder of Canada’s CSIS) and Governor General Roland Michener, among others, also all agreed to the study.

In 1972, The Limits to Growth (LTG) was published by the Volkswagen Foundation, (nothing to do with the car company), a large German private non-profit organization for the promotional of research and education in the sciences, social sciences, and humanities. Seventeen researchers ran three simulations of exponential economic and population growth with a finite supply of resources, to gain insights into the limits of our world system and the constraints it puts on human numbers and activity. All three scenarios were based on five variables: world population, industrialization, pollution, food production and resources depletion. They did not include any data, projections or theories about climate change. The three scenarios given were, keeping the status quo, with “no changes to historical growth trends, the limits to growth on earth would become evident by 2072, leading to sudden and uncontrollable decline in both population and industrial capacity”. The second was if growth trends existing in 1972 could be altered so that sustainable ecological and economic stability could be achieved. The third was that they could be changed. They admit “that their projections for the values of the variables in each scenario were predictions “only in the most limited sense of the word,” and were only indications of the system’s behavioural tendencies.” Two of the scenarios saw “overshoot and collapse” of the global system by the mid to latter part of the 21st century, while a third scenario resulted in a “stabilized world”.

Critics argued that the report claimed to accept that the then-known resources of minerals and energy could, and would, grow in the future, and consumption growth rates could also decline. Others agreed that growth could not continue indefinitely, but that a natural end to growth was preferable to intervention. They also wrote that technology could solve all the problems the report brings up, but only if growth continued apace. They warned that by “stopping growth too soon, the world would be “consigning billions to permanent poverty”.

On the other side of the coin in 2010, a report by the Danes, Nørgård, Peet and Ragnarsdóttir, called the book a “pioneering report”, and said that it “has withstood the test of time and, indeed, has only become more relevant.” And, “With few exceptions, economics as a discipline has been dominated by a perception of living in an unlimited world, where resource and pollution problems in one area were solved by moving resources or people to other parts. The very hint of any global limitation as suggested in the report was met with disbelief and rejection by businesses and most economists. However, this conclusion was mostly based on false premises”.

A year after The Limits to Growth was published, the Trilateral Commission was founded by David Rockefeller. It is a non-governmental, non-partisan discussion group of nearly 400 mostly private industrialists and bankers to “foster closer cooperation among North America, Western Europe, and Japan”. Other founding members included Alan Greenspan and Paul Volcker, both later heads of the globalist’s Federal Reserve System, and Zbigniew Brzezinski, US National Security Advisor to President Jimmy Carter from 1977 to 1981, and a Rockefeller advisor. At one of their first meetings, in 1976 in Kyoto, Japan, they discussed a process for the “controlled disintegrations of society”.

In 2012, Noam Chomsky described the Trilateral Commission as essentially, “liberal internationalists from Europe, Japan and the United States, and the liberal wing of the intellectual elite”, and that the Commission, “was concerned with trying to induce what they called ‘more moderation in democracy’ – turn people back to passivity and obedience so they don’t put so many constraints on state power and so on. In particular they were worried about young people. They were concerned about the institutions responsible for the indoctrination of the young (that’s their phrase), meaning schools, universities, church and so on – they’re not doing their job, [the young are] not being sufficiently indoctrinated. They’re too free to pursue their own initiatives and concerns and you’ve got to control them better.”

And so they have, in many Western nations, including Canada, the UK, Australia, New Zealand, Sweden, Poland, Germany, France, and especially in the US, the globalists control the kindergarten to university education system, the psychological establishment, their Medical Associations, mainstream news, the entertainment establishments, the law system, silicon valley, other corporations, and a very deep state of unelected government officials. Though this does not include the military per se, the military’s general officer corps has been corrupted for decades.

Such control is needed to create a true social state. Further control is carried out by controlling healthcare, because once this is done you control the people, then increase the poverty level, because poor people are easier to control and will not fight back if you are providing everything for them to live, and more often than not will only harm themselves. Increase the debt to an unsustainable level which allows one to raise taxes, which produces more poverty. Remove people’s ability to defend themselves from the government and the bad guys. Enact gun laws that only affect those who get a license, get an extensive back ground check, and take a course and practise, so that the only ones left with guns will be the bad guys and the police. Because the bad guys don’t buy guns in gun stores; they don’t even bother with a licence, they buy them out of the trunk of a car. And who predominately reside in communities where people are not allowed to protect themselves. Home invasions would sky-rocket.

The end game is to take control of every aspect of our lives (food, housing and income) through welfare programs and surveillance systems, asset forfeiture, eminent domain and over criminalization. Cancel presumption of innocence and due process. Take control of what people read, watch and listen to. Remove the belief in Christianity and family values from the government and schools. And finally divide the people into as many ways possible, whether race, sex, nationality, religion, culture, gender, left, right, center, sports team affiliation, what side of the street you live on, tatted or not, wealthy, poor, liberal, or conservative. This will cause more despondency, anger, jealously, violence, victimhood, and bigotry so that one day “the vast majority of people will have no idea what’s going on and they won’t care”. By then we probably won’t even be talking to each other anymore anyways.

“Circus dogs jump when the trainer cracks his whip, but the really well-trained dog is the one that turns his somersault when there is no whip” George Orwell

Part Two

The Innards and Machinations of Agenda 21

…….Coming soon.

10/20/18

Grand Deluges – A Pedantic Wet Dream

A Book by Joe Peters

Proudly and humbly announcing my new book, Grand Deluges – A Pedantic Wet Dream

From a 32 page essay I wrote years ago and kept going back to, I fell down the rabbit hole it became and after a couple of years of writing at night and painting houses during the day, Grand Deluges appeared. Feedback so far has been very good, from “unique writing style and pace” to “very relative to today considering it’s like an encyclopedia written as a story” to “refreshing, rational and at times even funny”, and a “very interesting non-linear read”.

A dense tale told in fragments, covering a plethora of topics branching out from the inception of the planet Earth, through its geological, environmental and atmospheric changes, to the beginning of life forms, and the development of the human species, in body and mind. With forks in the road, covering such things as science, myth, spirituality, hunters and gatherers, the birth of agriculture, religions, civilizations, empires and our social worlds, and societies. And signposts along the way touching on everything from climate disruption and the actions of nature, whether human or otherwise, the degradation of forests, land, the sea and air, to pluralistic ignorance, cognitive dissonance, facts, myths and theories, education, politics, capitalism, socialism, monetary systems, and to be or not to be human.

Hope you enjoy the read.

484 Pages / 23 Pages Bibliography, Research & References

Proof-Reader/ Co-Editor: Janet James

Cover Design: Peter Scott

Author/Publisher/Editing /Formatting: Joseph Peters

Printed by Bruce A. Cadorette / Advantage Graphix Inc

Vancouver BC, Canada, August, 2018.

For ordering information –Go here

08/16/18

The Life and Times of James Bond

Image result for images of james bond logo

One of the most iconic, cool, competent, cocky but confident, fashionable, and well mannered, truly psychopathic and ultimate protagonist characters has to be James Bond. Created by Ian Lancaster Fleming (1908-1964), English author, journalist, and naval intelligence officer, Bond appeared for the first time in the novel Casino Royale, published in 1953. Until his passing in 1964, Fleming would write another twelve novels and two short story collections about the spy James Bond, with his wartime service and his career as a journalist providing much of the background, detail, and depth of the James Bond novels.

The Bond character was further developed by the over two decades now perseverance of the Broccoli family of American film producer Albert R Broccoli, and dozens of writers and screen writers. The first Bond film Dr. No was released in 1962, when I was four years old and I’ve been hooked ever since. I have read all of Fleming’s books and some of the books that have been written since his passing, by new authors that are carrying on the Bond folklore. President John F. Kennedy was also a James Bond fan, and watched a preview screening of From Russia with Love at the White House on November 21st, 1963. He was killed the next day in Dallas.

The following is based on the combined facts of Bond, in literature and filmdom, with a “wee bit of artistic wherewithal”, said of course in a Scottish accent, with beer foam dripping from my moustache. Chronologically, I try to follow Ian Fleming’s books as they were written, but also for continuity, use some of the release dates of Bond films including those not associated with Fleming/Broccoli, and to a very small extent, the books written by various authors of the “young” Bond. I’m sure loyal James Bond aficionados, may take issue with the continuity of this story, but the recent Daniel Craig as Bond series of films throws a wrench into things by rebooting to the beginnings and Bond’s first missions. While Fleming’s introduction of Bond was Casino Royale, in film Bond was introduced in Dr No, Fleming’s sixth Bond novel. As far as M goes, M was Rear Admiral Bernard Lee for the first eleven missions. After his death, Robert Brown took over for four, and then M Judi Dench was brought on for Bond’s next four missions, and then was transported back in time for Bond’s last four films, which chronicle his first few years with MI6. There are also too many Alex Leiter’s, Moneypennys and Blofelds.

Then there is the dilemma that there has been numerous individuals who have played Bond, but then this issue can be dealt with sensibly, by suggesting that since Bond would be recognized fairly quickly, as he was well known to the underworld and most all intelligence and secret service organizations, so to further the secrecy and stealth needed to carry on such heroic and often insane actions as he does, and have to infiltrate their organizations, every so often Bond gets a face replacement. In this scenario Bond has had seven face transplants and still looks good. Rumour has it that in a few years from now, Bond will be undergoing not only another face transplant but a skin transplant as well, for a mission, which as of yet remains undisclosed. The story to follow is not sensible so there are no face alterations, rationally on the other hand, Bond probably looked like Daniel Craig at the start of his MI6 career but as he aged he started looking more like Sean Connery.

All of these things make it difficult and confusing to get some sort of continuity in Bond’s career timeline, but I have simply done the best I could and tried to stay with what makes sense, and lean towards Fleming’s novels as to storyline and details. And mean him no disrespect whatsoever of his original brilliance.

 

Beginnings

 

James Bond was born in Germany to a Scottish father, Andrew Bond of Glencoe, Scotland, and Swiss mother, Monique Delacroix, and spent much of his first ten years abroad, as his father was a Vickers armaments company representative. The Bond’s traditional family motto is Orbit Non Sufficit, the world is not enough.

Bond became multilingual in German and French at an early age. Sadly his parents were both killed in a mountain climbing accident that orphaned him at age 11. After their deaths, a friend of Andrew Bond, Hans Oberhauser, became Bond’s temporary guardian. Oberhauser had a son, Franz, and though older than Bond, he began to resent the way his father was treating Bond as if he were his only son, and felt he was being ignored. But soon Bond was placed with his full-time guardian, his aunt, Miss Charmian Bond, in the village of Pett Bottom, Kent, England, where he completed his early education. Supposedly on a holiday to Paris when he was sixteen years old, he loses his virginity. Throughout his childhood, he and Miss Charmian would spend time each year at Skyfall, the Bond family estate in the Scottish Highlands.

Bond briefly attended Eton College, but was expelled over an alleged incident with a maid, and eventually graduated from Fettes Collage in Scotland, the same college his father had attended.

At about the same time, on the continent, Franz Oberhauser had already killed his father over the animosity felt towards Bond when they were younger, had staged his own death and adopted the name Ernst Stavro Blofeld. Over the years he would control the underworld, with his tentacles reaching into state intelligence organizations, trade unions and criminal cartels. Eventually he would create Spectre (Special Executive for Counter-intelligence, Terrorism Revenge and Extortion) , Smersh, and Quantum, and come up with all sorts of schemes to take over the world, and most importantly, to never give up on one day killing Bond.

After graduating from college, Bond enlisted in the British Navy as a commando, and participated in an unknown number of clandestine foreign military engagements, eventually becoming a Royal Naval Reserve Commander. In his early twenties (some have suggested when he was twenty years old), the 183 cm (6 ft) tall and supposedly still, 76 kg (170 lb) Bond, already an expert boxer, pistol shooter, scuba diver and knife thrower, applied and was accepted to join the British intelligence division of MI6 as an agent. His qualities of strength, action, confidence, and brutal violence if needed, were attractive to them. Much like his raw masculinity, being dangerous, confident, suggestive, calm, polite and smart was attractive to both women and men whom he would meet.

His first control officer in MI6 was Cmdr. Ian Fleming of Naval Intelligence, who would go on and become MI6’s chronicler and historian, and followed Bond’s career in particular, as they quickly bonded, as it were, and stayed lifelong friends. Fleming was supposedly very impressed when Bond showed up for work his first day in MI6, in an immaculate 1964 Aston Martin DB5. Bond still owns the Aston but it now spends its time in a storage locker. Over his career he has driven a plethora of vehicles, including the Aston Martin DB Mark III, a Lincoln Mark VII, various 1930’s Bentleys, a BMW 750iL, Yamaha XJ650 turbo motorcycle, dunebuggys, a double-decker bus, a Russian T-55M5 tank, hovercraft, numerous boats, and has flown gyroplanes, Cessna’s, and a Harrier T4 jet, to list but a few.

The head of the British Secret Intelligence Service at the time (M) was Royal Navy Rear Admiral Judi Dench, who had held the position for the previous ten plus years. As with all other heads of MI6, before her and since, they tend to be serious, efficient, no-nonsense authoritarians. M’s Chief of Staff and overseer of the 00 division was and still is, Bill Tanner, while MI6’s quartermaster (Q), Major Desmond Liewelyn, ran the research and Development Division. The Principal Secretary of the “Double O” division of MI6, and M’s personal secretary was Ms. Loelia Ponsonby. She would soon be replaced with MI6 agent, Mary Goodnight, who would occasionally, continue to assist Bond on assignments. Interestingly, noted neurologist Sir James Moloney, was frequently employed by M and MI6, but then as you will soon find out, one can see why.

Eventually Bond became one of perhaps nine agents to earn the designation double O, meaning they had a license to kill, or the “the authorisation to, at their own discretion, commit acts of assassination and other controversial activities in order to complete their missions, without having to first seek permission from headquarters”. The true number of how many agents are designated double 00 may never be known, but rumour has it there are three double 00 agents left, while some say Bond is the only 00 agent.

When he started, Bond was issued a .25 ACP Berretta 418 handgun, which was smaller than what he had been used to in the military, but found it a weapon that was easy to conceal, especially when using a shoulder holster, and considering Bond’s penchant for well cut tuxedos, and business suits, while wearing loafers.

Bond’s designation was awarded to him after his first assignment, which there are two different versions of. Perhaps, one was a false flag operation to hide something else that went down, with the other closer to the truth, who knows. One story goes that he got it after killing two enemy agents, a Japanese spy on the thirty-sixth floor of the RCA Building at Rockefeller Center (then housing the headquarters of British Security) in New York City, and a Norwegian double agent who had betrayed two British agents. The other story was on a mission that brought him to Prague, he assassinated Dryden, the traitorous MI6 section chief stationed there. He then traveled to Lahore, Pakistan, where he kills Fisher, Dryden’s contact with criminal organizations, after a violent and intense hand to hand fight to the death in a rundown apartment, ended when Bond strangles him. From there Bond tracks down a corrupt Greek official, Alex Dimitrios in the Bahamas, who in a matter of hours, loses his car to Bond in a poker game, Bond sleeps with his wife Solange, and then he gets killed by Bond in a crowded museum.

Regardless of what actually happened, after returning to London, Bond receives his 007 designation but gets read the riot act by M who sternly established her authority. Besides berating him for breaking international law, M also made it known she felt Bond was a “sexist misogynist dinosaur”. But then considering he is maybe twenty-two to twenty-three years old at the time, what can one expect his attitude to be, considering killing in cold blood doesn’t seem to be a problem for him, yet at the same time he’s funny, smart, confident, and with the amount of experience already under his belt at such a young age, would seem to confirm one of Cmdr. Fleming’s favorite sayings “I shall not waste my days in trying to prolong them”.

Bond’s first mission “officially” was the Casino Royale operation. With British treasury agent Vesper Lynd, at his side, they were tasked with trying to bankrupt Le Chiffre, a terrorist financier and paymaster for the Russian counter-surveillance agency, Smersh, which also controlled some of Europe’s largest trade unions, and other divisions of Russia’s secret service.

Bond and Vesper attend a game of Texas hold-em poker at the Casino Royale in Montenegro. CIA agent Felix Leiter was also in attendance, and would become one of Bond’s very few friends throughout their careers. Also in attendance, including those actually at the table, were members of various countries’ intelligence and secret service organizations.

After losing the bulk of the money Vesper had brought with them and to stay in the game, Felix and the CIA bankrolled Bond the rest of the way. In the final hand it was all in, $115 million. Le Chiffre topped all the other hands still left at the table except Bond’s, who beats him with a straight flush.

After blowing such millions of dollars that was not his, Le Chiffre became a cornered animal, rare for a Bond villain. Kidnapping Bond and Vesper, Le Chiffre viciously tortures Bond, but a Smersh hit squad led by a Mr. White suddenly breaks in and assassinates Le Chiffre and his henchmen, and since the contract did not include Bond or Vesper, the assassins release them, though not before cutting a Cyrillic “LLI” into the back of Bond’s hand, signifying the Russian word shpion (spy), and Vesper making a private deal with Mr. White, the money Le Chiffre lost in exchange for Bond’s life.

Sharing a suite in a Venetian hotel while they recovered, Vesper would be the first woman Bond fell truly in love. Bond confesses his love to her as does she, and actually resigns from MI6 so that they can have a normal life together. But unbeknownst to Bond, in order to save his life Vesper had agreed to assist in the transfer of the money won at the Casino Royale, into Mr White’s and Smersh’s hands. After catching her in the act and feeling as though he had been played, his heart probably felt ripped out of his chest. They end up in a sinking building in Venice, with Vesper trapped. With all he had Bond valiantly attempted to save her but the building soon sinks underwater, and though Bond still did everything he could, Vesper refused his attempts and allowed herself to drown.

Later Bond discovered a text message left for him by Vesper, with Mr. White’s name and phone number. Bond tracked him down and kidnaps him, but instead of killing him he hands him in to the authorities. Every year since Vesper’s death, Bond still visits her grave in Cornwall England. It has been said that after losing Vesper, Bond would slowly begin to, instead of doing his job because of his principles; he began to use his job more often than not, in pursuing personal battles.

After surgery on the back of his hand to try to erase the inscription carved into it, and months of recovery time, the loss of Vesper lay heavy upon him. Bond eventually took on another minor mission which ended in Nassau, Bahamas. Taking a few days off, he was invited to a dinner party held by the Governor. After the guests all leave, the Governor and Bond retire to his den for a cigar. There Bond created what he would call the Vesper; three measures of Gordon’s Gin, one of Vodka, and half a measure of the wine-based aperitif Kina Lillet, shaken and not stirred, until its ice cold, then add a large thin slice of lemon peel, and served in a deep champagne goblet. This drink would be his usual, and often. And though Bond also enjoys expensive wine and champagne, especially if any caviar happens to be lying about, he also enjoys the occasional neat whiskey or scotch. It was estimated by fellow agents and the few friends he has, that his weekly alcohol consumption is about five times the recommended amount, yet incredibly his alcohol intake doesn’t seem to affect his performance. As for non-alcoholic drinks he stays away from tea, once blaming it for the downfall of the British Empire, and instead prefers coffee, dark and thick. Coincidently perhaps, from what we will learn of Bond, a Vesper martini has approximately 130 calories, which on average is what men burn during sex.

Bond also became a very heavy smoker, averaging about 60 custom-made cigarettes a day (3 packs). Over time he would cut that vice down to the occasional cigar, and since, has been able to quit cigarettes altogether.

As they sipped and smoked, Bond asked who the boring couple at the party were. The Governor began by telling the story about the relationship between fellow Brits, civil servant Phillip Masters and air hostess Rhoda Llewellyn. After a brief whirlwind romance they married and moved to Bermuda. Early into the marriage Rhoda began a long open affair with the son of a rich Bermudian family. Philip was devastated, his work began to slide, and eventually he suffered a nervous breakdown. Taking the time to recover he traveled a bit, then returned and divided his home into two sections, his and hers. In private they did not acknowledge each other, in public they simply pretended to be a couple. Eventually Phillip divorced her and moves back to the UK, leaving Rhoda with all their debt, and stranded in Bermuda. And though Phillip was successful in his plan of avenging Rhoda, emotionally he never recovered, while Rhoda remarried a rich Canadian. The “boring couple” were Rhoda and her Canadian husband.

The Governor explained the point of the story as being, when you don’t  have a quantum of solace in a relationship, defined as “a precise figure defining the comfort, humanity, and fellow feeling required between two people for love to survive”, it’s time to end it and give it up. As soon as lack of respect for each other rears its ugly head, it’s over, simply walk away. I’m sure, and it has been said, that Bond thought long and hard over that story. Perhaps flying back to London was enough time to think about his and Vesper’s relationship, where their quantum of solace ended with her dying, and he began to focus on seeking revenge for her death.

Returning to London, Bond finds out Mr. White had escaped and there had been an attempt on M’s life. Chomping at the bit he was given a mission that was possibly related to such events.

The assignment was to eliminate wealthy businessman Dominic Greene, who intended to stage a coup d’état in Bolivia to seize control of their water supply, and who was, whether by twist of fate or happenstance, a member of the Quantum criminal organisation. Bond was assisted by Bolivian agent Camille Montes, who was plotting revenge for the murder of her own family. Also helping was MI6 agent Strawberry Fields, who Bond seduced, but unfortunately she was subsequently killed working undercover. The mission would become known as one of Bond’s most violent, as he destroyed Greene’s plans and captured him, then left him in the middle of a desert with nothing but a can of oil. M later told Bond Greene was found with two bullets in his chest and his stomach held a can of oil. Bond simply shrugged and thought, Greene’s boss no doubt.

M asked where his loyalties lay and was he mentally able to continue doing his job, Bond replied he never left. Besides, Bond felt the mission wasn’t yet completed, and on his own time flew to Russia and tracked down Vesper’s former lover Yesef Kabira, who was now involved with Smersh and Quantum, and had been involved in the blackmailing of Vesper, thus, indirectly responsible for her death. But once again, instead of a double tap to the forehead Bond allowed him to live and be arrested.

Another mission around this time took Bond and fellow agent 006, Alec Trevelyan, to infiltrate a Russian chemical weapons facility. There they were attacked and captured. During the struggle 006 was shot and left for dead, while Bond made his escape. In actual fact Trevelyan had faked his own death and would spend the next nine years creating what became known as the Janus crime syndicate. Oblivious to such knowledge, until nine years later, when Bond meets the attractive psychopath and sadist Xenia Onatopp in Monte Carlo, and soon finds out she is a member of Janus. He also finds out she had recently killed a Canadian Admiral by crushing him between her thighs while having sex. Though knowing all this, Bond still seduces her and while undressing for bed, and removing his jacket, Onatopp notices his shoulder holster and tells him that “you won’t need a gun”, Bond replied, “well that depends on your definition of safe sex”. A downright scary individual, she visibly experienced an orgasm whenever she killed someone. But then, at the same time, this mission would be Bond’s most violent operation to-date, where he personally killed 47 individuals.

Bond also finds out that Janus’s leader is none other than the now scarred and disfigured Trevelyan, whose plan was to steal the command codes and hardware to control two electromagnetic pulse weapons (GoldenEyes) mounted on orbiting satellites. During the theft Onatopp excitedly killed every individual in the scientific faculty that built them, except for one lone survivor, Natalya Simonova, a skilled programmer who hid and lived. Simonova ends up with Bond and after becoming lovers, she helps him complete his mission. Onatopp on the other hand ends up fighting Bond, and died crushed against a tree by a crashed helicopter. In the end, Trevelyan asked Bond, “I might as well ask you if all those martinis ever silence the screams of all the men you’ve killed or if you find forgiveness in the arms of all those willing women for all the dead ones you failed to protect”. A mirror of each other, their fight to the death was extremely brutal, until Trevelyan was dropped seventy meters onto a satellite dish.

A few months after the mission where he had taken the air out of the tires of Dominic Greene’s and Quantum’s grandiose plans, Bond found himself in New York City, investigating the deaths of three MI6 agents over a 24 hour period. With friend CIA agent Felix Leiter at his side, they investigated a couple of Harlem nightclubs, but were kidnapped by a Mr. Big (short for Bonaparte Ignace Gallia), a ruthless gangster and drug dealer, who owned a chain of New York, “Filet of Soul” dinner clubs. After some torture, carried out by Mr. Big’s henchman Tee Hee Johnson, who had a pincer for a hand, Bond told their mundane made-up cover story. To determine if Bond was telling the truth Mr. Big brought in the beautiful, Simone “Solitaire” Latrelle, so named because she excluded men from her life. She was a tarot card reader and possessed the power of obeah, a voodoo cult of the West Indies. She was said to be able to see the future and events in the present. She lied to Mr. Big saying Bond was telling the truth, so he and Leiter were released, though not before Tee Hee breaks one of Bond’s fingers.

Leaving Mr. Big, Solitaire was seduced by Bond, and gladly helps him complete the mission, though by doing so she would forever lose her powers. With Solitaire’s assistance, Bond tracked Mr. Big down to the small Caribbean island of San Monique, where he ruled over his people using voodoo and the occult. To his people he was known as Dr. Kananga. His big plan was to distribute, free of charge, two tons of heroin, through his chain of “Filet of Soul” restaurants, thereby increasing demand by creating more addicts. Bond killed Mr, Big, by blowing him up with compressed air, and his remaining henchmen, Mo Thing, Sam Miami, The Flannel, and Blabbermouth Foley, then burned the island’s poppy crop to the ground.

In between missions, and considering his exploits in far off exotic locations, and trysts with beautiful women, when Bond  was back in London, he was actually very routine driven. Bond lived in a flat off King’s Road in Chelsea, and was looked after by an elderly Scottish housekeeper named May Maxwell.

Some people who knew him at the time, thought there was a slowly, seeping “sourness” to him. When in town Bond showed up at his office at MI6 headquarters, at about ten and be gone at about six, Monday to Friday. Most of his evenings were spent at the pub playing cards with a few close friends, with his card game of chance being baccarat and not poker.

To Bond, his increasing alcohol consumption meant “relaxation, ritual and reliability”. Rumour had it that he had had rotating affairs with three similarly disposed married women, each one used strictly as cold passionate release. Then, and for quite awhile, his off and on regular love interest when home was Sylvia Trench, who he had met playing baccarat at a club. She would endear herself to Bond from the time they first met, when she shook his hand and confidently said, “Trench. Sylvia Trench”. Bond would reply in kind, and keep the greeting as his own, which at times would seem odd. Considering that over time, every time he’d be trying to fly under the radar, to be secret, as it were, he would blow his cover by declaring his name out loud upon introduction each time he meets a bad guy, “Bond… James Bond”.

On an even more personal note, when at home, Bond’s favorite foods were grilled sole and baked oeufsen cocotte (eggs and crème fraiche), eggs Benedict, and cold roast beef with potato salad. When on a mission, however, Bond ate far more extravagantly, as it was then on MI6’s credit card.

Bond rarely listened to music, and if he did, only when he was home. Though his housekeeper once admitted his musical tastes run the gamut, from orchestral compositions by John Barry, David Arnold, George Martin and Thomas Newman to the singers Shirley Bassey, Tom Jones, Nancy Sinatra, Dusty Springfield, Louis Armstrong, and Lulu. He seemed to prefer female singers such as Carly Simon, Rita Coolidge, Sheryl Crow, Gladys Knight, Alicia Keys, Sheena Easton, K.D. Lang and Adele, but also enjoyed listening to the Pretenders, Duran Duran, Chris Cornell of Soundgarden and Audioslave, Jack White, Sam Smith, Herb Alpert and the Tijuana Brass, and Moby.

Bond’s next assignment began when a hard drive containing the details of undercover agents was stolen by a mercenary, by the name of Patrice. Bond and experienced fellow MI6 agent Eve Moneypenny, track Patrice down to Turkey, where he and Bond get into a fight atop a moving train, with Moneypenny set up as a sniper, but from afar. She was ordered over her headset by M, to take out Patrice. But Moneypenny missed and hit Bond instead, who fell off the train and dropped over 91 meters (300 ft) into a raging river, while Patrice got away. Bond was presumed dead after search attempts found nothing.

Three months later, M’s outspoken nemesis in meetings, Gareth Mallory, the chairman of the British parliament’s Intelligence and Security Committee, was pressuring her to retire. Amidst this, MI6’s computer servers were hacked, with M receiving a taunting message, just before MI6 headquarters in downtown London exploded.

With everyone thinking he was dead, Bond had used the presumption to stay off the grid, but when he learned of the attack on MI6 he returned. And though Bond failed a series of physical and psychological examinations by Dr. Moloney, M approved his return to the field. His job, identify Patrice’s employer, recover the stolen hard drive, and kill Patrice. Ordered to MI6 Q’s office, Bond’s Berretta was replaced with a 7.65 mm Walther PPK (the same handgun Hitler used to kill himself). Eventually Bond would be issued what he uses today, the 9 mm Walther P99.

Bond found Patrice in Shanghai and they fought once again, but this time Patrice falls about the same height that Bond fell from the train, unfortunately Patrice does his header off a tall building. Bond ended up in Macau, where he met the lovely Sévérine, an accomplice of Patrice. A former sex slave who worked for a Raoul Silva, she collaborated with Bond to show him where Silva’s base of operations was and to kill him.

While travelling to a small island off the coast on Sévérine’s yacht and becoming lovers, she and Bond were captured and taken to see the man himself, Raoul Silva. Who turns out to be, Tiago Rodriguez, a disgruntled ex-employee, former MI6 agent, now working as a cyber-terrorist, and the one behind the hacking and attack on MI6 headquarters. He also carries a deep resentment of M, because years ago, she had turned him over to the Chinese in order to save six other agents. Silva shot Sévérine in the head while she was tied to a statue, while the bound Bond could only watch. But Bond eventually takes Silva down and he was brought back to London.

At MI6’s new underground headquarters, Q attempted to decrypt Silva’s laptop, but unknowingly gave the laptop access to the MI6 servers, which allowed Silva to escape. During a government inquiry into MI6’s, and M’s in particular, handling of the stolen hard drive, Silva attempted to assassinate M, but Bond arrived in the nick of time, though not before Mallory would be the one to take a bullet, saving M’s life. Bond quickly hustled M into a waiting car and they made their escape. Bond and M travelled to the Bond family estate Skyfall, in the Scottish Highlands, and met up with the estate’s gamekeeper, Kincade. They quickly prepared booby traps around the property and house, expecting Silva to show up, because Q and Bill Tanner had led an electronic trail for him to follow, like breadcrumbs.

A group of Silva’s men slither in but Bond, M and Kincade killed most of them, though M took a bullet but concealed it from Bond. Soon enough Silva showed up himself by helicopter, with more men and heavy weapons. Bond sent M and Kincade off through a tunnel to a chapel on the grounds and fought a delaying action. Soon he had to also escape down the tunnel, but Silva showed up at the chapel first, and held a gun to M’s temple as he pressed his up against hers, pleading with M to kill them both. Finally Bond appears and throws a knife into Silva’s back killing him. Cradling M in his arms she would succumb to her wound and breathe her last breath.

Following M’s funeral, Eve Moneypenny would retire from field work to become secretary for the newly appointed M, Gareth Mallory. And Bond would once again try to hide extreme loss through booze, women, gambling and increasingly, mixing Benzedrine, an amphetamine, into a glass of champagne every now and then.

A few days after M’s funeral Bond would receive a posthumous message from her detailing a terrorist bombing plot going to be pulled off by terrorist leader Marco Sciarra in Mexico City. After foiling the attempted bombing, Bond confronted Sciarra, and before he kicked him out of a helicopter for him to fall to his death, Bond took Sciarra’s ring, which was emblazoned with a stylised octopus. He would soon find out that it is the emblem for a group called Spectre.

When he returned to London, Bond was suspended from field duty by the new M, but Bond disobeyed M’s orders and traveled to Rome to attend Sciarra’s funeral. There he seduced Sciarra’s widow, Lucia, who tells him Marco belonged to an organisation of businessmen with criminal and terrorist connections. Bond used Sciarra’s ring to infiltrate a meeting to select Sciarra’s replacement, where he identified the leader as Franz Oberhauser. The meeting also included talk about putting a hit on someone, who Bond surmised to be Mr. White, and whom Bond knew very well. Bond’s cover was blown at the meeting and he ran for it, followed by the assassin Mr Hinx, who he loses. Bond contacted Ms. Moneypenny to find out who Oberhauser really was, considering he was presumed dead years earlier. Moneypenny in return found out that the previously known Mr. White was a former member of Oberhauser’s organization’s subsidy Quantum, but who was now in hiding.

Bond tracked White down in Austria, where he was dying of thallium poisoning. He tells Bond all about Oberhauser’s organization, called Spectre, short for Special Executive for Counter-intelligence, Terrorism Revenge and Extortion. It was run as a commercial enterprise, with the executive made up of three from six of the world’s most notorious organizations, including the neo-Nazis, jihadists, drug lords, arms dealers, terrorist organizations and mad megalomaniacs. Not aligned to any nation or political ideology it was all about money and power no matter what it took. White asks Bond to find and protect his daughter, Dr. Madeline Swann, a psychiatrist working at a private medical clinic and who could help him find Oberhauser. After Bond promised to do so, White committed suicide. Bond finds Swann and they become lovers.

Soon Bond and Swann are captured by Oberhauser himself, and taken to his base of operations in the Sahara desert, where he admits he now goes by the name Ernst Stavro Blofeld, and as he tortured Bond he tells him of their connection so long ago and the deep resentment he still felt. Bond also finds out that many of his past villains, including Le Chiffre, Dominic Greene, Raoul Silva, and Mr. White, were actually all agents of Spectre, running its various umbrella organizations.  Bond and Swann eventually escaped and blew up Blofeld’s base, leaving him to his death.

Back in London, a couple of weeks later, Bond and Swann are kidnapped separately. Bond is taken to the ruins of the old MI6 building, scheduled for demolition after Silva’s bombing. A disfigured Blofeld showed up in a helicopter and told Bond that he must escape before explosives are detonated or die trying to save Swann, who is also somewhere in the building. Bond breaks loose and after finding Swann, they escaped by boat as the building collapsed around them. Bond then shoots down Blofeld’s helicopter, which crashed onto Westminster Bridge. Bond pulled the injured and disfigured Blofeld from the wreckage and allowed him to be arrested. Of course, the bald Blofeld would eventually escape, and continue acting on his lunatic fantasies of taking over the world. Most often while stroking a Chinchilla Silver Persian cat purring on his lap.

Over the next few months MI6 itself seemed splintered, as to loyalties and resentment, and along with a disturbing rise in failed missions and agents deaths, the powers that be finally decided that M Mallory was to be replaced by British Navy Rear Admiral Bernard Lee.

Having individual introductory meetings with his agents, M Lee tells Bond his latest physical assessment was poor because of his excessive drinking and smoking, and sent him off to re-hab at the Shrublands Health Clinic near a UN airbase. There Bond noticed a tattoo on a fellow patient indicating he was a member of a Chinese criminal organization, and had something suspicious going on with another patient whose head was covered in bandages. Bond was caught searching his room and after a brief struggle the man with the tattoo tried to kill Bond using a spinal traction machine. Bond was saved by his physiotherapist, Patricia Fearing, whom he then blackmailed into having sex in exchange for not telling her employer about the incident. The man with his head wrapped in bandages was Spectre pilot Angelo Palazzi, whose face was being surgically altered to match French Air Force pilot François Derval, who was also staying at Shrublands.

By the time Bond returned to London he finds out that an RAF Avro Vulcan strategic jet bomber loaded with two atomic bombs was stolen from the base that was nearby the clinic he had just returned from, and that the French pilot who usually flew her was found dead.

At a meeting at MI6, all agents were informed that Spectre was demanding $400 million in diamonds from NATO in exchange for the bombs, or else Spectre would destroy a major city in either the US or the UK. The plan was overseen by Blofeld, but carried out by his number two, the eye patch-wearing, wealthy playboy, and head of Spectre’s Extortion Division, Emilio Largo.

The Americans and British launched “Operation Thunderball” to take Spectre down and return the two atomic bombs intact. Acting on a tip, M sent Bond to the Bahamas, who hooked up once again with CIA’s Felix Leiter. In Nassau, Bond met Dominique “Domino” Derval, Emilio Largo’s mistress, and soon after seducing her, Bond informed her that Largo killed her brother (the pilot killed at the clinic) and recruits her to spy on Largo. But while doing so Largo captured her in the act and tortured her by burning her with a cigar for heat and then using ice cubes for cold. Domino eventually escaped and told Bond the two bombs are onboard Largo’s yacht, the Disco Volante, so Bond contacted MI6 and soon an American nuclear submarine showed up to assist. The crews of both vessels engaged in an undersea battle, while Bond, who was weakened after disabling the bombs, fights Largo who quickly gets the upper hand and just before finishing off Bond, Domino showed up and shot Largo in the back with a spear-gun.

Bond and Domino escaped, along with Largo’s nuclear scientist Dr. Ladislav Kutze, who in the end had turned on Largo and assisted Bond to save the day. While travelling in a boat in their escape he innocently admitted he can’t swim, Bond pushed him overboard. He and Domino end up convalescing in the same hospital.

Altogether there were seven operations against Spectre. For Bond, perhaps the toughest of these was when he was once again, on her majesty’s secret service, and trying to thwart another Spectre plan run by Blofeld, who this time was brainwashing patients to distribute bacteriological warfare agents throughout the world. While Bond was trying to track down the lunatic, he ran across the Contessa Teresa di Vicenzo, who preferred to be called Tracy, on a beach and saves her from committing suicide by drowning. It is said it was love at first sight. No doubt the experience affected Bond considering the suicide by drowning of Vesper earlier in his career. With the assistance of Tracy and her father, Marc-Ange Draco, the head of the European crime syndicate “Unione Corse”, they are able to attack Blofeld’s Swiss Alp’s lair, and foil his plan though once again Blofeld escapes.

After the mission and smitten by the resourceful, headstrong yet vulnerable woman, Bond proposes marriage and she accepts. They were married in Portugal, and driving away to I’m sure a very wonderful, exotic honeymoon somewhere, when Bond pulled over and got out to retrieve some flowers from the car, just as another car driven by Blofeld pulls up and Blofeld’s partner Irma Bunt, opens up on them with a machine gun. Bond survives, but Tracy is killed in the attack. Blofeld would escape and Irma Bunt would disappear, and be the only villain to have beaten Bond, leaving him broken and human. It would also be the only time Bond ever married. Word has it that when the first policeman showed up a tearful Bond was cradling Tracy’s body on the side of the road, and told the officer, “It’s all right. It’s quite all right, really. She’s having a rest. We’ll be going on soon. There’s no hurry you see, we have all the time in the world.”

Eight months after the murder of Tracy Bond, Bond was drinking and gambling heavily, and beginning to make mistakes, even confined to his desk  in MI6’s diplomatic branch, where he had been temporarily been transferred to. M saw a depressed man in mourning and as a last resort sends Bond to Japan on a semi-diplomatic mission. There Bond was to simply trade some information from radio transmissions captured from Russia, with the head of Japan’s secret intelligence service, Tiger Tanaka, who would provide information in return. The deal fell through when Tanaka revealed that they had already penetrated the British information source and gotten the information themselves. But Bond and Tanaka immediately connect, and Bond decided to stay another couple of days as Tanaka introduced Bond to the Japanese lifestyle, which began to make an impression on Bond, in a good way some have said.

After many conversations over sushi and plenty of sake, one day Tanaka tells Bond that an NASA spacecraft was hijacked from orbit by an unidentified spaceship and that it might have landed on the small isolated Japanese island of Ama. Tanaka asks Bond to help investigate and with permission from M, they come up with a plan to infiltrate the island, which had nothing more than a couple of small fishing villages, and an extinct volcano that dominated the island. After a few flybys of the island it was determined that the spaceship had to have landed inside the volcano. On one of the reconnaissance missions Bond was captured by a Mr. Osato, a Japanese industrialist rumoured to be working with Spectre. And that, lo and behold, the true mastermind behind this operation was Ernst Blofeld, who had been hired by the People’s Republic of China to start a Soviet-American war.

Bond woke up, tied up, in an opulent cabin aboard a yacht. Spectre operative number eleven, Helga Brandt, entered and interrogated Bond but he somehow managed to seduce her enough for her to kiss him, and who then ended up freeing him in order to have sex. After spending the night together, Brandt would change her mind and try to kill Bond but he escapes. Brandt meanwhile, would be dropped into a pool of piranhas by Blofeld for her failure.

Back in Tokyo, Bond began training with Tanaka’s ninja troops, and made to look Japanese in order to disguise himself as a fisherman alongside a wife, who would act like newlyweds and spend their honeymoon on the island in order to infiltrate it. The woman chosen, Aki, one of Tanaka’s assistants, would play the role of the wife, and of course became romantically involved with Bond. Unfortunately she was poisoned by a Spectre assassin, who’s target was actually Bond. Quickly moving on, Tanaka selected Kissy Suzuki, an intern in the service, who entered into a fake marriage with Bond, who began to look more Japanese each day. Tanaka renames Bond “Taro Todoroki” for the mission.

After arriving on the island, Bond and Suzuki established that the mouth of the volcano was indeed a disguised hatch to the secret rocket base. Tanaka and his ninjas attack, and in the ensuing battle Bond faced off with Blofeld in the control room. Some say Blofeld activated the base’s self-destruct system, and escaped. More credible sources say Bond finally killed him, strangling him in a vicious rage. Whichever the case may be, Bond, Suzuki, Tanaka, and his surviving ninja troops escaped, though in the confusion when in fact the entire complex did explode, Bond and Suzuki became separated from the main group.

While escaping, Bond had suffered a head injury, leaving him an amnesiac. He and Suzuki made their way to another small fishing village, with Bond believing he was a simple fisherman. Kissy conceals his true identity to keep him forever to herself. And once again, the rest of the world believed him to be dead, with his obituary appearing in the newspapers. Many who knew him were body-slammed by the news.

Soon Suzuki becomes pregnant, but doesn’t tell Bond, hoping when she does tell him he will marry her for real. Though now a peaceful, loving and simple fisherman, Bond would have flashbacks of things he could not understand and confused over the fact he had no memory. But for all intents and purposes he was a happy man. He had a renewed sense of humour and a purpose in life and becoming healthier each day.  Even dabbling in Haiku (Japanese poetry), and supposedly written by or in the style of Japanese poet Matsuo Bashō, “You only live twice. Once when you are born, and once when you look death in the face.”  (You Only Live Twice, Chapter 11)

Reading a newspaper one day there was a reference to Vladivostok, Russia, which touched a nerve, making him wonder if the far-off city was a key to his missing memory. Bond told Suzuki he must travel to Russia to find out. It was a sad parting of ways but Bond was adamant, and left a crying Suzuki, who had decided to keep her secret to herself, and become the only woman to bear his child. Suzuki and the baby’s current whereabouts are still unknown.

Finally making his way to Russia, Bond was kidnapped by their secret service, tortured, then brainwashed into assassinating MI6’s head M.

A year later a man claiming to be the presumed dead Bond appears at MI6 headquarters, in London, and demands to meet the head of the Secret Service. Bond’s identity was confirmed, but during his debriefing interview with M, Bond tries to kill him with a cyanide pistol, but the attempt failed. MI6 doctors, medical specialists and psychologists swarm Bond over the next few months, and find out he had suffered the loss of his only wife and biggest true love, a head injury which caused amnesia, lived as a Japanese fisherman for several months, and had been tortured and brainwashed in Russia, but they could cure him they frowned, and so they say they did.

De-programmed, Bond is given another chance to prove his worth as a member of the 00 section, and once again to be the best tool in their toolbox. He is soon is sent to Jamaica, with the seemingly impossible mission of killing the world’s most professional and feared assassin, Francisco (Paco) “Pistols” Scaramanga, a Cuban assassin who was believed to have also killed several British secret agents. He was known as “The Man with the Golden Gun”, because his weapon of choice was a gold-plated Colt .45 revolver, which fired silver-jacketed solid-gold bullets.

Tracking Scaramanga down to an island off China’s east coast, and Bond being Bond, he seduced Scaramanga’s mistress Andrea Anders. Afterwards, and in front of Scaramanga, whom he had just met, she entered the room they were in and Bond looks at her and said, “Miss Anders, I didn’t recognize you with your clothes on”.

MI6 agent, former personal secretary and friend Mary Goodnight, also appeared and assisted Bond in his endeavors, while still having the time to strike up a romance together. Bond and Goodnight foiled Scaramanga’s terroristic plans, with Bond facing off against him, and though Bond takes a shot in the arm, Bond killed him with two shots to the chest. And instead of killing Scaramanga’s sidekick, the short person Nick Nack, Bond cages him. It would be Bond’s only mission in which he only kills once. But after this mission it is said that Bond became ever more cold and emotionless.

His most recent missions, at least what has been leaked, include one run by M Brown, which brought Bond and CIA friend Felix Leiter, to Key West to initially take out drug lord Franz Sanchez. They quickly captured him, and soon after, Bond is best man at Leiter’s wedding. But a crooked DEA agent allowed Sanchez to escape, who quickly sent his crew to ambush Leiter and his newlywed. Felix is lowered into a tank occupied by a Tiger shark, while his wife is raped and killed. Bond showed up later to Leiter’s home and finds his friend maimed and wife killed. First going after the DEA agent, Bond found him and killed him by dropping him into the same shark tank Felix had been dropped into, but this time not letting him out. Before following the trail to Sanchez though, M showed up and reassigns Bond to a mission in Turkey, but Bond refused. M suspends him and revokes his 00 status. No matter, once again Bond goes rogue.

Assisting him in taking out Sanchez was ex-CIA agent and pilot Pam Bouvier, who he met of course, in a Bimini bar. They fly to the Republic of Isthmus, where Bond put out the word to Sanchez that he was an assassin for hire. But just before Bond gets close and assassinates Sanchez, two British Hong Kong Narcotics Bureau agents, along with MI6 agent Fallon, sent by M to arrest Bond, capture him. Thinking the agents are assassins, the paranoid Sanchez kills them all, saving Bond so he could hire him.

After Bond met Sanchez’s girlfriend Lupe Lamora, who was visibly attracted to him, Bond finds out the trick in Sanchez’s successful drug business was that his scientists had figured out how to dissolve cocaine in gas, and sell it to Asian dealers disguised as fuel. Bond and Bouvier systematically took down Sanchez’s empire. Bond kills Sanchez’s three main henchmen, by using a pressure chamber, wood shredder and harpoon. Finally facing off with Sanchez, Bond was caught in a bad spot and about to be attacked with the a machete wielding, covered in fuel madman, but at the last second Bond pulled out the lighter Leiter had given him for being best-man and lit Sanchez up.

Partying afterwards at Sanchez’s estate, with Lupe now the host, Bond gets a call from Alex telling him M was trying to get a hold of him and asking for Bond to return. Hanging up Bond politely rejected Lupe’s advances and romances Bouvier instead.

A few months later it was off to Hamburg, Germany, where Bond was ordered to investigate Elliot Carver, a psychopathic media mogul who planned to provoke global war to boost sales and ratings of his news divisions. There Bond bumps into Paris Carver, a former girlfriend of his who was now Carver’s trophy wife. He seduced her by relighting old flames, to get information on Carver. Then afterwards and with the assistance of Colonel Wai Lin, a Chinese spy, who Bond also seduced, together they destroy Carver’s plans and kill him, and most of his henchmen, unfortunately, not before one of them killed Paris.

The next mission to arise out of the dirt was germinated when a dear friend of M, Sir Robert King, a British oil tycoon, was assassinated by Victor “Renard” Zokas, a former KGB agent turned high-tech terrorist. Bond chased down the assassin, hired by Renard to do the actual deed, but she died during the chase. Getting first aid on a few minor injuries absorbed during the chase, Bond seduced Dr. Molly Warmflash, an MI6 agent and doctor assigned to examine him. Bond’s assignment then became to protect King’s daughter Elektra, who had previously been held for ransom by Renard. But soon Bond doubted where Elektra’s loyalties exactly lie.

Bond unraveled Renard’s scheme to increase petroleum prices by triggering a nuclear meltdown of a submarine in the waters of Istanbul, Turkey. Assisting Bond was Dr. Christmas Jones, an American nuclear physicist. Elektra eventually revealed that indeed, she and Renard were co- conspirators, and that she had had her father killed as revenge for using her as bait for Renard.

Elektra ends up abducting M, whom she resented for advising her father not to pay the ransom money, and imprisoned her in the one thousand year old, Maidens Tower, which lies on a small islet located at the southern entrance of the Bosporus strait, off of Turkey. Bond and Christmas were then captured by Elektra’s henchmen, and while Christmas was taken aboard a submarine, Bond was taken to the tower where Elektra tortured him with a garrote. But allies of Bond seize the tower and free Bond and M. Bond and Electra would face off and after getting the upper hand on her and pointing a gun at her head, Electra smiled at Bond and told him that “he would be unable to kill her because he’d miss her too much”. Bond smiled back “I never miss”, and promptly shot her in the face.

Bond gets aboard the submarine, frees Christmas, gets into a fight with Renard, who was killed by being impaled by a plutonium rod shot out of a sub’s reactor core at high speed, and finally, he and Christmas set the sub to safely implode underwater. They both escaped from the submarine via the torpedo launcher. Supposedly after the mission, Bond and Christmas would spend a couple weeks holed up in Bond’s London flat “recovering”.

Bond’s most recent assignment, and perhaps his last, was no doubt one of his most brutal. After infiltrating a North Korean military base, which was suspected of being the base of operations for a Colonel Tan-Sun Moon, who was trading weapons for conflict diamonds. Someone rats Bond out, and Moon attempted to kill him, but after a chase ended with Moon’s apparent death, Bond is captured by his father General Moon. Bond is kept in captivity for fourteen months, interspersed with seemingly endless torture sessions. It has been rumoured that Bond went mad.

Eventually Bond is traded in a prisoner exchange, sedated and taken to Hong Kong, where M suspends his 00 status under suspicion of having leaked information under duress. Bond believes he was set up by someone in the British government, and as Bond does, he decided to avenge the betrayal. And but yet again escapes MI6 and goes rogue.

He soon learns of agents connected to the supposedly dead Colonel Moon operating in Cuba. There Bond met American NSA agent Giacinta “Jinx” Johnson, with whom he immediately seduced. Afterwards they made their way to a gene therapy clinic, where patients can have their appearances altered through DNA restructuring. Bond confronted a Korean agent, who escaped, but which led Bond and Jinx to a cache of diamonds bearing the crest of the company owned by British billionaire businessman Gustav Graves. They learn that Graves only appeared a year prior, seemingly out of thin air, after apparently discovering a vein of diamonds in Iceland, which led to his current wealth, celebrity, and philanthropy from its assets.

Back in London Bond meets Graves, along with his assistant Miranda Frost, who was also an undercover MI6 agent. After a fencing duel between Graves and Bond that nearly got out of hand, Graves invited Bond to Iceland for a scientific demonstration. Bond gets a phone call from M who told him that MI6 had doubts about Graves, restored his 00 status and offered all the assistance he needed.

At his ice palace in Iceland, Graves unveiled a new orbital mirror satellite, “Icarus”, which is able to focus solar energy on a small area and provide year-round sunshine for crop development, but in actual fact his plan was to use it to cut a path through the Korean Demilitarized Zone with concentrated sunlight, allowing North Korean troops to invade South Korea and reunite the peninsula by force.

Jinx infiltrated Graves’ command centre, but was captured. Bond rescued her and later discovered that Colonel Moon was still alive, because he’s Gustav Grimes, via gene therapy to change his appearance. Bond confronted Graves, but Frost arrived to reveal herself as the traitor who betrayed Bond in North Korea. Bond escaped only to return in an Aston Martin V12 Vanquish to rescue Jinx, who had been captured once again within the palace. After she almost drowned, Bond saves her by using CPR, then simple kissing techniques, while Graves and Frost escaped to their C-130 cargo plane and headed back to North Korea, with the Icarus weapon on board. But totally unaware that Bond and Jinx had stowed away on board as well.

After Graves tells his father General Moon, who was also onboard, of his diabolical plan, his dad was horrified by the plan because it would cause a nuclear war with the United States. Graves shoots his father dead. Bond and Graves then engage in a fist fight, while Frost attacked Jinx. Getting beaten badly by Bond, Graves attempts to escape by parachute, but Bond opened the parachute, and caused Graves to be pulled out of the plane and into one of its engines, killing him and disabling the Icarus beam. It is said Bond yelled out after him, “time to face destiny”. Jinx meanwhile had killed Frost, and they escaped from the disintegrating plane in a helicopter from the cargo hold, carrying away Graves’ stash of diamonds in the process. And once again Bond ends up with a beautiful woman for a week or so long sexual affair, this time in a South Korean Buddhist temple located on the slopes of a forested tranquil valley.

Love interest, sidekick or foe, and whether or not he is on a mission or relaxing, or dealing with the demons inside his head, Bond has no qualms about sleeping with beautiful women. Most are “ubiquitous symbols of glamour and sophistication”, and seem to always have splendid figures and tend to dress in a “slightly masculine, assertive fashion, wear little jewellery and they generally use little or no makeup and no nail polish”. Whatever the variation in dress they are always very beautiful. Many of the women Bond beds have some sort of independent job or even career, with some involved in intelligence or law enforcement. Even those who were criminals tended to be similarly independent-minded in how they approached their work.

Other than the ones already noted, his little black book also includes, Tiffany Case, who is a good example of the type of women Bond was attracted to. Bond first met Tiffany on one of many earlier operations against Blofeld’s Spectre organization, this one, infiltrating a diamond smuggling ring connected to Blofeld’s plan of destroying targets in China, the United States and the Soviet Union with a laser satellite he had created, and then propose an international auction for global nuclear supremacy. Tiffany was one of the members of the smuggling gang, and had developed an antipathy towards men after being gang-raped as a teenager. Many women Bond has been with have had similar experiences, as many of them had risen up from being either sex slaves or sexually assaulted and gravitate to becoming a mistress or aide to the man running the organization, simple self preservation. Like many women Bond came to admire, Tiffany was tough, but lonely and insecure, and like many others, felt more confident in themselves when with Bond. Who himself hoped he could at least align them with a more honest lifestyle. Bond fell in love with Tiffany, the first time he had done so since Vesper and Tracey, even though he did fit in a quick affair with a similar beautiful woman with a similar background, by the name of Plenty O’Toole, who unfortunately would be killed soon after.

After the mission was completed and another Blofeld plan had been thwarted, Tiffany moved in with Bond back home, but eventually she left him to marry an American business man, and is now supposedly a very loving and happy wife and mother to three children. Alike was Honeychile Rider, a shell diver who was making a living by selling Jamaican seashells to dealers in Miami, when she met up with Bond. After being sexually abused for much of her young life, then assisting Bond on a mission and becoming his lover, she would move to Philadelphia, where she married a doctor by the name of Wilder and had two children with him.

Others in his book include, Fatima Blush, Holly Goodhead, Chow Mee, Gala Brand, Countess Lisl von Schlaf, Melina Havelock, Lavender Peacock, Penelope Smallbone, Jill and Tilly Masterton, Fiona Volpe and wealthy business woman and smuggler, Octopussy. He has slept with women on trains, planes, in a forest, a stable, a motorized iceberg, in hospitals, a submarine, and a dinghy, and even on the space shuttle, along of course in multiple suites of fine exotic hotels and inns. Rumour has it that when Bond and a woman are kissing, making love, or implying he will do so, they nearly all purr “Oh James”.

Bond has had an estimated 78 sexual encounters over his career so far, but actually has had sex with only 55 of them. Unfortunately 75% of the women he sleeps with attempt to kill him, and that one of every three women he beds dies. Of his main love interests, whom some within MI6 have called “Bond Girls” only two have died. Both, being the ones Bond loved the most, the previously mentioned Vesper Lynd and Tracy Bond.

As to his day job, to-date Bond has over 378 kills and the cause for nearly 1,000 collateral damage deaths. On the flip side it was estimated that he has been shot at over 5,000 times. Since his medical records have never been released, he has taken who knows how many bullet and knife injuries along the way, as well as all the mental and physical damage from being tortured on a fairly regular basis.  Supposedly Bond has a habit of laughing hysterically when being tortured, and there is no doubt being held by the North Koreans for so long had to have affected him, but supposedly he has always been that way. When being tortured by Le Chiffre on his first mission, by being tied to an open bottomed chair naked, and having his testicles hit with a carpet beater, it is said Bond laughed in Chiffre’s face, spitting at him “that the whole world will now know that you died scratching my balls.” By happenstance Le Chiffre is killed soon after. It is also said by those who know him or have faced off against him that Bond also has a dry wit about him, especially after many of his kills, and as we have touched on throughout, seemed to be a master of the one-liner.

Today he has a scar down his right cheek and left shoulder, with visible plastic surgery on the back of his right hand. It has been estimated that he has had at least sixteen, maybe more, severe concussions over his career. As to PTSD, one would think his case would be severe, but then I don’t know, can psychopaths be afflicted with such a disorder.

One would also have to consider some of his foes that he has fought, other than those already mentioned. One of the most formidable would have to be the mercenary henchman, Jaws. Standing 217 cm (7.1 ft) tall with steel capped teeth, he was big and very strong. The first time they fought, Bond found himself in an unbreakable death grip and about to be bitten, and only got out of it by pushing a nearby broken electric lamp up against Jaws teeth, stunning him. Jaws also had an uncanny ability to survive any misfortune seemingly unscathed, in this one mission alone he survives an Egyptian structure’s collapse on top of him, being hit by a van, being thrown from a rapidly moving train, sitting in the passenger seat of a car which veers off a cliff, a battle underwater with a shark, and the destruction of his employer, scientist and anarchist Karl Stomberg’s base of operations.

On another mission Bond and Jaws faced off once more, and after falling over one thousand meters (several thousand feet) after accidentally disabling his own parachute (he falls through a circus tent and lands in the trapeze net), a later crash through a building inside a runaway cable car, and finally going over the over 300 m (1000 ft) Iguazu Falls, in Brazil, Jaws turns on his latest employer and helps Bond complete the mission. Perhaps because of a growing respect for each other or because Jaws realized he was working for a madman named Hugo Drax, who’s plan was to stuff every space shuttle available with hand-picked, genetically perfect young men and women of varying races, then poison all of humanity, but leaving the other animals alone, then repopulating the planet. In the end Bond cornered Drax in the International space station’s airlock, shoots him with a cyanide-tipped dart, then ejected him into space. Speaking of the space shuttle, Bond has had many operations and associations with the US manned space program, including the projects Mercury, Gemini, Apollo, and the Space Shuttle program.

Other foes include the Korean manservant of greedy megalomaniac Auric Goldfinger (who wanted to control the world’s gold supply), the bald and deadly Oddjob, who wore a steel razor sharp brim on his bowler. There were the mobsters Sol “Horror” Horowitz and “Sluggsy” Morant, who Bond killed with shots to their foreheads. On another mission, two of Bond’s antagonists were a pair of gay hit men, Mr. Wint and Mr. Kidd, and a pair of female body guards, Bambi and Thumper. The girls fought Bond wearing bikinis until they all ended up in a pool and Bond held their heads underwater until the second before they drowned and released them. The girls were arrested, while Wint and Kidd were blown up later.

Bond’s toughest foe pound for pound, was undoubtedly Donald “Red” Grant, a viscous Spectre assassin possessing Bond’s ugliest traits and relenting toughness. A ruthless hand to hand fight came to an end with Bond garroting him to death.

The villains and the henchmen that Bond has faced run the gamut, with most of them seemingly very over-ambitious. Nearly all were snobby, intellectual, and geniuses and scientists with elaborate island fortresses and lairs, all trying to take over and control the world in some sort of way. Many also have some sort of strange physical disfigurement, and were all pure megalomaniacs, perfectly blending ego and viciousness. Interestingly the only American villain Bond has faced was Brad Whitaker, a loud, obnoxious and brash American arms dealer, working out of Afghanistan. Go figure. Bond killed him by activating a bomb disguised as a key chain, which dropped a large statue of 18th century British general, Duke of Wellington onto his head crushing him. With Bond remarking that the poor chap, “had met his Waterloo”.

There also has been a litany of female antagonists who could also hold their own against Bond. Spectre assassin Fiona Volpe wounded him severely in a fight and actually cornered him, but just as she went in for the kill she herself is killed. One of the toughest female foes, and the boss of one of Bond’s toughest male foes, the already mentioned Red Grant, was Rosa Klebb, number three at Spectre.

After killing Red Grant, Bond tracked Klebb to a hotel in Paris, where she was to rendezvous with Grant at the conclusion of his mission, and where Bond finds out that she and Red have been trying to kill him in revenge for him killing Dr Julius No, during his previous mission. Dr No was also a tough opponent, being nearly 2 m (6’6”) tall, steel pincers for hands and having Dextrocardia, where the apex of his heart was located on the right side of his body, and not on the normally left. To end their final fight Bond tossed No into a vat of nuclear reactor cooling water, where he boiled to death.

Back in the hotel room, Klebb battled Bond solo, and after failing to kill him with a gun hidden in a telephone, she successfully poisons him by means of a fugu venom-laced blade hidden in the toe of her shoe. Bond slowly collapses to the ground and begins to die, but Rene Mathis, an agent of the French secret service DGSE (General Directorate for External Security) breaks in and captures Klebb. Mathis was a long time friend of Bond, and had both worked together on numerous few missions, including a few with Bond and Mathis’s other long time friend Alex Leiter. Here, Mathis perhaps saves Bond’s life, as he relentlessly performed CPR on his friend until the paramedics arrived. It took Bond months to recover.

Another time, while taking out Max Zorin, a psychopathic industrialist, and the product of a Nazi genetic experiment who attempted to destroy Silicon Valley and take over the microchip market, Bond came up against Zorin’s lover and chief henchwoman, the extremely powerful May Day. Her bodyguard detail included the assassins Jenny Flex, Pan Ho, Alison Doody and Papillon Soo Soo. As the mission neared its end, May Day is abandoned by her lover Zorin and would turn on him, and help Bond complete the mission. As we have seen, Bond has the uncanny ability to seduce many former female foes in turning and helping him instead. During the “Goldfinger” operation, Bond’s foe was Pussy Galore, who was the leader of Pussy Galore’s Flying Circus, a group of women aviators working for Auric Goldfinger, and who happened to be lesbian. By the end of the mission, they end up in bed, where Bond asks, “They told me you only liked women,” Pussy purred in her reply, “I never met a man before.”

So far details of 25 missions have been leaked or hacked then leaked, with who knows how many we will never know about or if the information was even correct. No doubt many of them as Bond the catalyst to all sorts of goings on. Strangely, though Bond’s missions have taken him to over 60 countries, as well as outer space, and he has saved the world numerous times, there would be only two films ever made about his exploits.

The Casino Royale operation would be the basis for one of only two films ever made about Bond, and Hollywood being Hollywood, would make the story a “spy-comedy spoof”. The other film made was a version of MI6’s Thunderball mission, called “Never Say Never Again” which was released in 1983, and starred Sean Connery (in his mid-fifties) as Bond, who comes out of retirement for one more mission, Barbara Carrera as Fatima Blush, Kim Basinger as Domino Petachi, Klaus Maria Brandauer as Maximillian (instead of Emilio) Largo, and Max von Sydow as Ernst Stavro Blofeld. The movie was mostly filmed in the French Riviera and the Bahamas.

The farcical “Casino Royale” film on the other hand, was an ensemble affair done entirely tongue in cheek. Released in 1967, its cast included David Niven as Sir James Bond, Ursula Andress as retired British secret agent Vesper Lynd, who was forced back into service in exchange for writing off her tax arrears, Peter Sellers as baccarat master, Evelyn Tremble, who would be recruited by Vesper to challenge Le Chiffre at Casino Royale. After the game Le Chiffre hallucinogenic ally tortures Tremble, but Vesper rescues him only to kill him. Barbara Bouchet plays Bond’s new secretary Miss Moneypenny, the daughter of the original Miss Moneypenny. Joanna Pettet played Mata Bond, Bond’s daughter by the famed spy Mata Hari, and Jacqueline Bisset played Miss Goodthighs. The extremely Scottish, Duncan Macrae, played the French agent, Rene Mathis, forcing the confused Evelyn Tremble to state his concern that despite being a French agent Rene spoke with a Scottish accent, Rene replied, “Aye, it worries me too”.

Other cast members included William Holden as CIA executive and agent, Ransome, Daliah Lavi, as British secret agent The Detainer, John Huston as M, who dies from an explosion caused by his own bombardment of Bond’s estate when the cross-spy-agency team visits in the beginning of the film, Terrence Cooper as Coop, a British agent and karate expert who begins training to resist seductive women, and Orson Welles as Le Chiffre, Smersh’s financial agent, who is desperate to win at baccarat to repay the money he has embezzled from the organization.

Its premise was that the criminal organization Smersh was going around assassinating intelligence officers all over the globe, primarily because of their inability to resist sex. It got so extreme that M would lead a contingent of heads of secret service agencies, including French Intelligence, the CIA, and the Russian KGB, to try to talk Bond, retired from the secret service 20 years previously, to help them out. When they all meet on Bond’s estate, a bomb goes off and M dies in the explosion. Ironically he was the culprit behind the attack. Bond comes out of retirement to head MI6. The film’s tagline: “Casino Royale is too much… for one James Bond!” refers to Bond’s ruse to mislead Smersh by having six other agents pretending to be James Bond.

A high-stakes baccarat game was arranged at the Casino Royale, in Royale-les-Eaux in Northern France, and was located atop a giant underground headquarters run by the evil Dr. Noah, who secretly was Sir James’ nephew Jimmy Bond, and played by Woody Allen. Noah was once an MI6 agent but had defected to Smersh to spite his uncle and destroy him by discrediting his “celibate image”.  His plan was to use biological warfare to make all women beautiful, and kill all men over 137 cm (4 ft 6 inch) tall, leaving Noah as the “big man” who gets all the girls. Jimmy captured The Detainer, and pleads with her to please be his partner. She agrees then cons him into swallowing an “atomic time pill” he had developed, making him a walking nuclear devise.

After also being kidnapped by Noah, Bond, Moneypenny, Mata and Coop escape and fight their way back up to the casino. The casino is then overrun by secret agents from many organizations, including British, American, Russian and French support troops. It was chaos in the casino and surrounding grounds. Elsewhere Noah is counting down his nuclear explosion, by his hiccups. When he reaches his last hiccup the pill explodes and vaporizes Casino Royale, killing everyone. Bond and all of his agents then appear as angels flying up into heaven, while Noah is shown falling backwards into hell.

Its main theme song, the instrumental “Casino Royale”, written by Burt Bacharach, was performed by Herb Alpert and the Tijuana brass, while the hit song to come from the film was Dusty Springfield singing “The Look of Love”. The soundtrack album became famous among audio purists for the excellence of its recording. It then became a standard “audiophile test” record for decades to come, especially the vocal performance by Dusty Springfield.

Rumour has it that Bond is now retired, after purchasing a 61,000 sq m (15 acre) patch of land on Oracabessa bay, on the northern coastline of Jamaica, earlier in his career. The former site of a donkey race track, Bond would eventually build a three bedroom home, every window louvered, on a cliff overlooking a private beach on the property which he called Goldeneye. It is said his companion is Dominique “Domino” Derval, the woman he first met years ago during the Thunderball mission. Maybe he’s writing his memoirs, or staring off into space sipping on a Vesper, or painting pictures, but no doubt heavily medicated and hurting aplenty getting out of bed each morning, considering the damage his body has taken. And though the life and times of James Bond seems fictional, regardless, there is no doubt a team of clinical psychologists would have a field day with Bond… James Bond.

 

 

 

 

 

Sources

Ian Fleming, “James Bond” Novels – Casino Royale, Live And Let Die, Moonraker, Diamonds Are Forever, From Russia With Love, Dr No, Goldfinger, For Your Eyes Only, Thunderball, On Her Majesty’s Secret Service, You Only Live Twice. Pan Books Ltd: Toronto, 1964. And from the memories of watching, numerous times, every Bond film ever released.

http://www.ianfleming.com/james-bond/

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Outline_of_James_Bond

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/James_Bond_(literary_character)

http://www.uselessdaily.com/movies/james-bond-43-interesting-facts-about-the-movie-series/#ixzz5NwGeFFVp

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=19bA1jN2sKk

https://ca.ign.com/articles/2012/10/24/25-things-you-probably-didnt-know-about-james-bond

 

07/28/16

My Colonoscopy, the Magic School Bus, Voyager I, and Some Unfortunate Truths – A Dense Essay

Chapter One

Born in the fifties and three years short of sixty, I seem to have been blessed with the genes and metabolism which seem oblivious to the abuse I have given them. Generally a healthy later middle aged male, I am fortunate to have been born, and still living, where I do here in British Columbia. But life is still life and when one is an anatomically and behaviourally modern Homo sapien, living in a body composed of mostly water and oxygen, things are bound to happen.

Beneath the hair of an average adult human, no matter the race, color, faith, or where they live, sixty per cent of their body’s weight and volume is water. Incredulously, it stands, can fall, and get back up. The body also contains about five and a half litres (just over one gallon) of blood, and about ten litres (two and a half gallons) of interstitial fluid, which washes and surrounds our trillions of cells. Other elements of the body include oxygen (sixty-five per cent), carbon (eighteen per cent) and other trace elements such as hydrogen, nitrogen, calcium, potassium, sulphur, sodium chlorine, and magnesium, to name but a few.

human bodyMaterials include protein, connective tissue, fats, carbohydrates and bone, with operating systems that include mechanical, physical, and bio-electrical and biochemical functions, which make up such a life form, and the machine it is.

Naturally odd and kind of eerie, the vast majority of our cells in our bodies are not even human, but instead microorganisms and bacteria in a symbiotic relationship with our functions and make up. The largest proportions of these cells, about one hundred trillion of them, a number about ten times greater than the total number of other human cells in the entire body, live in the digestive tract. Such microorganism cells digest our food, gleaning the energy and fatty acids needed for us to exist, and keep all the body’s systems running properly. They also metabolize acids and synthesize vitamins, working closely with the liver, digestive tract, and even muscle tissue, with their combined efforts resembling an alien organ seemingly existing within us. Much like our skin is also considered an organ. But many believe, and rightly so, that for all intents and purposes in most living things, the digestive tract is running the show.

Chapter Two

One hundred years ago an average human never made it to sixty years of age. Today many do, though often are hurting units when they get there. That is the downside of living longer, especially in developed corporations, sorry I mean developed countries. As humans age their lives become filled with chronic pain, depression, cancer, ever continuing prescription needs, strokes, kidneys and knees shutting down, and increasing rates of those living with Alzheimer’s and dementia, among so many other ailments.

But when young we all thought and felt we were invincible, and became distracted by it. It distracts us even more today because we think it keeps us from going mad, and yet our survival depends on being aware, of ourselves yes, but also and more importantly, of our surroundings, including all the other thousands of living things sharing the planet with us, and most critically, the natural workings of the world. Having lost such awareness, it’s not surprising that the leading cause of death for people from the ages, one to thirty-four years old, is accidents.

Personally I have learned to embrace moderation of all things. And, am grateful and humbled that, as of yet, I do not live with pain on a daily basis. But besides the absorption of toxins, hormones and viruses  that exists in frighteningly increasing numbers, I have not always been nice and respectful to my body regarding what goes into it, whether food, drink and smoke, or given enough concern for the health of some of its operating systems.

I smoke cigarettes, which often makes me worry that since I have been a full time smoker for over forty years I would not be surprised for that shoe to drop, and the thing I thought was bound to happen does. Yet I continue to play ignorant and not even attempt to alter the outcome, which may yet still arrive, by hiding behind the excuse that I am basically a drug addict and allowing the addiction to control, in many ways, my life. As it is, the nicotine and the few thousand other chemicals in each cigarette I smoke have given me chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), which shows up in my lungs as emphysema. Meaning the small air sacs of my lungs have been weakened and have ruptured, creating one larger air sac instead of the higher efficiency small ones. My lungs’ cavities are also filling up with black carbon deposits. So it takes longer for me to breathe out than in.

I am sure that the few thousand hours of bottom time spent as a commercial diver and seafood harvester, which took part of my right lung, caused calcified barnacles to form on my rotator cuff in my left shoulder, and living through multiple near death experiences, does not aid the cause.

M’lady has told me my breath rattles in my lungs as I sleep and I dry cough regularly throughout the day, though it’s a subdued and quick one. But as each year passes, the cough worsens and further embarrasses me with sometimes overwhelming grief for not doing anything about it. The worst is in the morning, when I cough for a few minutes until I give a couple of good nose blows in tissue, after which I feel relatively cleared up. It is curious that after we blow our noses, somewhat instinctively, we all take a second to examine what was expelled, like a forensic specialist or tea leaf reader. So far the coughs are rarely productive of any mucous, or blood or black tar, which is good I figure.

Of those who do smoke, about two out of ten will get COPD. For those who are life-long smokers, over half will develop COPD. Worldwide, it affects over 329 million people, nearly five per cent of the planet’s population. Along with chronic bronchitis, asthma and other respiratory diseases, it is currently one of the leading causes of death in the world, with over three million people dying from it each year.

In Canada, it is estimated that seventeen per cent of Canadians thirty-five to seventy-nine (over two million people) have some sort of airflow obstruction condition, with eight per cent, or 1.3 million people having severe degrees of it. Nearly twelve thousand Canadians die each year from COPD, somewhat close to the number of deaths attributed to all cerebrovascular diseases, mainly stroke.

Chapter Three

Though very aware of the importance of eating well, and the vital importance of stretching the body’s sinew and muscles each day, I rarely do. When I am with m’lady, I eat much healthier, as she is a seafood and salad gal and not as lazy as I am in the kitchen when eating alone. When alone, I eat as everyone else does, according to one’s pay grade. But the fact of the matter is that most days I plumb forget to eat, then, just before going to bed devour a large plate of something along the lines of a half dozen perogies covered in butter and a couple of scoops of cottage cheese, a couple of boiled Chinese sausages, a few olives, two slices of toast, one with just butter and peanut butter, which along with ketchup should be deemed a basic food group, and the other slice of toast lathered in peanut butter and honey, or perhaps cinnamon spread. For dessert, it is often a half litre of chocolate milk, a multi-vitamin, Vitamin D and a cod-liver oil, a small bag of either Hawkins Cheezies or salted corn chips and a chocolate chip muffin. A quick bite for me is usually sliced banana, yogurt, milk, ice-cream or raisin bran, in any combination thereof.

Though never putting much stress on my cardio, and not having much lung wind, I keep active and at least look fit, as in, I do not appear to have a basketball duct taped to my belly, and can still see my penis. Up to last year, I spent eight seasons on the ice a few times a week coaching midget hockey, which I miss very much. But other than sitting and writing, and because it’s my lot in life to have to work for a living, my employment usually entails physicality through good old plain hard work, using brush, ladder, hammer, paint, saw, wood and my hands, on buildings or the boat I live on. About the only actual exercise being the occasional karate kata, regular walkabouts, dog-like stretches, a physically active work life, and love making.

As for my bowels, just like my heart that somehow continues to beat regularly, I usually have to empty it at about six minutes and thirty-three seconds after arising from the bed in the morning. Which is also a good thing, one would think. Considering that the usual cause of death for a middle aged man in the industrial world, is colon cancer. But we will get to that lower down, as it were.

I am very fortunate here on Vancouver Island to actually have a regular doctor. He, of course, works out of a clinic with others, as lone general practitioners of medicine have become a rare species, whether in the city or in the country, and are booked solid.

A general practitioner (GP), works outrageous hours, and needs more than one assistant to deal with the tidal surge of paperwork created by having to submit endless reams of forms, charts and invoices, many of which go to the government, where payment could arrive anytime over the next couple of months. And they need large office spaces in which to store it all, because their basements are probably already full. And a great many new doctors want to specialize, further diminishing the number of GP’s.

Being a medical specialist, means one works in a silo and rarely communicates with doctors not in their field of study or department. So I can see why clinics are the way to go. For the doctors, sharing costs, space, and staff, and perhaps even sharing camaraderie with their team, instead of just themselves. And to think, advice could be two doors down the hall and to the left.

I was fortunate enough to have coached two of my doctor’s sons through their midget hockey years, and was grateful to work with him when he was the team’s manager. His sons are exceptional young men, as is he and the rest of their family. Thankfully he was able to take me into his stable. As such, his office calls me about once every year to set up an appointment for an annual physical.

Some people who own cars get them tuned up regularly. Some people just wait until something breaks or wears out and then gets it replaced. An annual physical on the other hand is a bit different and much more important. Instead of perhaps missing the chance to discover something early on before it breaks down, thus preventing further collapse, or even death, it may be wise to occasionally look under the hood. I have no qualms about letting a medical professional poke and prod the machine called my body and determine whether it shall continue to live or perhaps needs adjustment, therapy or replacement to sustain its life.

Chapter 4

Having an annual exam, is where they check our dipsticks and kick our tires, and go over all operating systems. This scares many people, often because of the absurd concept, that if something is deathly wrong, do they really need to know, or in the case of having a colonoscopy, the fear of someone sticking a finger up their butt. But when something is wrong with our bodies we know it. All living things do. Our dog eats grass when her stomach is upset and drags her bum along the lawn when it has been especially messy back there or she just needs a good scratch, and we do not have to tell her to do it. For over sixty years my Mom, has been drinking Coke whenever she feels under the weather, and to ward off all sorts of evils and ague. Whenever I feel something is brewing in me I take five cod liver oil pills with about the same number of garlic pills before going to bed, and in most cases feel much better in the morning. But anything to do with our rectum is uncomfortable for everyone involved, regardless of whether the doctor and patient are emotionless, or professionally smiling through it all.

While on the same topic, here’s a tip I learned long ago. When getting a physical and you are lying on your side and the doctor is getting the glove lubed up, of course it is going to be uncomfortable, but do not, I repeat, do not lean your head over and continue the discussion you had been having with your doctor, as he will politely ask you to please look the other way. But really people, we will allow doctors to slice open our chests and replace our hearts and other organs but heaven forbid if they should want to stick a well lubricated finger a few inches up our asses, one of the most frequent places for cancer to rear its ugly head in the human body.

One in fourteen Canadians will be diagnosed with colorectal cancer in their lifetime, and it is the second leading cause of cancer deaths in adults. Thirty per cent of all deaths in Canada, about seventy-two thousand people, die of malignant neoplasm or cancer, while twenty one per cent of all deaths are due to diseases of the heart.

Going global, of all the human deaths in the world in one year (about sixty million), 270 individuals out of every thousand people, will die because their hearts either gave out, or was diseased. It is by far the leading cause of death in the world. Stroke is the number two cause of death, followed closely by deaths from infectious and parasitic diseases and other cardiovascular diseases.

Much farther down the list and still globally, for every one thousand people, fourteen will take their own lives each year, comparatively, about three people per thousand deaths are attributed to war, yet this is where all the money is being generated and spent. Much like the trillion-dollar war on terrorism, where every year before and after 9/11, anywhere from eight to twenty American citizens died worldwide due to terrorism, less than the number of people killed each year from a bolt of lightning.  And that one is forty thousand times likely to die from heart disease or cancer than by terrorist actions. The leading cause of death for American civilians abroad, at least the few who actually have been off the continental United States, is actually car crashes. While in Canada, the number of deaths attributed to terrorism is minimal, and in fact, in the last thirty years, there have been four deaths.

Overall, in most developed countries, the largest increase in deaths over the past few years has been from Alzheimer’s, accidents and unintentional injuries, not from being victims of the blowback from the activities of the industrial military complex.

In related news, the Earth’s human population as of October 2015 is about 7.3 billion individuals. This is twice the number of people who lived on the planet in 1970. There are about 131 million births every year, meaning one million births every three days or 250 births every sixty seconds. For every one thousand people, nineteen are newborns.

At the other end, with an average life expectancy of sixty-seven years, for every thousand people on the planet there are about eight deaths (about fifty-five million) each year. It works out that two people die every second, while at the same time four babies are born.

Chapter 5

With a screech, thud, and oh my, we are back at the garage getting an annual physical exam. Starting on the outside of the body, the doctor begins to make his or her way through physically examining the human body by inspecting, feeling, tapping, and listening.

The body’s all important blood pressure (BP) is taken, because it indicates whether the blood has enough power behind it or is under too much pressure, as it flows around the body doing its sublime job of pushing blood around. It is measured as the pressure at which the heart contracts, called the systole, which is when it pumps blood out to the rest of body, over the pressure called the diastole, when the heart re-fills with more blood. The medical gadgets used to do this are a stethoscope, and a sphygmomanometer (nearly broke out in a sweat typing that). Less than one twenty over eighty (120/80), is normal, while something like one ninety over one hundred (190/ 100), it’s Houston we have a problem.

Later, at a lab, blood will be taken for a blood count, which determines the kinds and numbers of red blood cells, white blood cells and platelets (thrombocytes) it contains. The red cells are the worker ants of the blood. They carry oxygen from the lungs to the rest of the body, and once relieved of the oxygen, return carrying carbon dioxide (CO2) which is expelled as we exhale. Bigger than the reds but fewer in numbers, the whites protect the body from infection and act like a pack of wolves when doing so. The platelets meanwhile are the runts of the blood cells, and hang out in gangs called Clotters. Whenever bleeding occurs they gather together in a mob and swell themselves up like Pillsbury dough boys to form a sticky plug to stop the leak. They are relentless, and will continue to staunch any flow until it is stopped or the body simply runs out of blood and its organs shut down. At which time it becomes “aah, Houston….aah…we have another problem.”

Heart rate is checked, sixty to just less than one hundred beats a minute is considered normal, sixty being the optimum. Of course people, who exercise daily, by whatever means, usually have a much lower heart rate at rest. Joggers in particular, tell you that running is adding years onto their lives. Unfortunately, those years will have already been taken, by the years spent running.

Next up is a cold stethoscope held to your chest. Invented over 200 years ago, back when leeches were most often used for getting rid of any bad blood, the stethoscope was another way of seeing into the body, especially the chest. All one had to do was put their ear up against the chest, while today we do with technological imagery.

The typical respiratory rate for a healthy adult at rest is twelve to twenty breaths per minute. Anything above twenty is typically signs of a heart or lung problem. At birth and up to about six weeks we take thirty to sixty breaths every minute. If we make eighty years of age our respiratory rate could be as low as ten every minute. The doctor is also listening for any snaps, crackles and pops, wheezes, ticking or decreased breath sounds.

Temperature is then taken and should be as close to 37C (98.6F) as possible. Women going through menopause are occasionally exempt from this rule.

All joints are checked for movement, with the doctor standing back or to one side to protect themselves, as the knees, elbows, wrists and ankles are tapped with a small rubber mallet and checked for reflex. Our reflexes are crucial in determining the integrity of the central nervous system, the brain and spinal cord, which together coordinate the movement and activity of all parts of the body. Just as importantly, reflexes also determine the integrity of the peripheral nervous system, which is the communication link between the brain and the limbs and organs.

The abdomen is tapped to judge liver size and if there is any presence of abdominal fluid. Throat and tonsils are checked by going aaaah, just like when the doctor is holding one’s testicles checking for lumps. Similarly, women get their breasts checked for lumps and are also given a Pap test, to check for abnormal cellular changes to some of their pink parts.

The thyroid is especially checked, in both sexes. It is a butterfly shaped gland in the throat, just below the Adam’s apple, and is one of the body’s governors, controlling how quickly the body uses energy, makes proteins, and produces hormones, which regulate other hormones throughout the body. Lymph nodes are important filters of the immune system and though located throughout the body, the ones under the armpits and in the groin are checked delicately.

Ears, nose and sinuses are checked by shining a little flash light into those orifices. Though dental is not included in BC’s Medical Services Plan (MSP) at this point and time, the gums and teeth are checked by simply smiling. Speaking of which, it is unfortunate that dental coverage is but a dream for anyone having only MSP. For due to my lack of attention earlier on, my teeth need constant attention and one by one are falling out, often painlessly as my gums continue to recede. Long in the tooth, as it were. Whenever the next tooth needs to be added to my upper or lower plate, it is only done whenever I can afford it, or have enough of a balance on my credit card to cover it, unlike my smoking habit, which somehow continues whether I am able to afford it or not.

Chapter Six

Once again we are back to the part of the body, where for some reason many people, especially men, do not bother to get a physical because of, the dreaded prostate exam. I know many men who have some sort of mental hang up about what a human is biologically, or they think they are far too macho for such a thing, and that no one is going to shove anything up their butts, including themselves. Yet all one is doing is lying on, usually the left side, with the doctor slowly inserting a very well lubricated gloved finger a few inches up the rectum and feeling around for a couple of seconds, checking the prostrate for size and any suspicious lumps. Although one’s eyes may bug out, it does not hurt nor is it a big deal.

The prostate is a gland of the males’ reproductive system. Over thirty per cent of its volume is semen, and it possesses muscles that expel the semen mixture, during ejaculation. The word comes from the Greek, prostates, meaning “one who stands before” and “the guardian”. Women also have a prostate, called the Skene’s gland or para urethral gland. It operates the same as a male’s prostate, minus the sperm of course, however it can also expel fluid during an orgasm. Anatomically, a women’s uterus is in the same position within her body as that of a prostate gland in his body.

With the physical exam complete, I’m sent for chest x-rays, which as usual confirms my lungs, should be classed as the vilest of porn. Then at yet another clinic, blood and urine samples are taken. The previously mentioned blood count is done, while the urine sample is used mainly to check on the kidneys since they deal with the waste products of metabolism and are the filters and expellers of waste material, minerals, fluids and other substances from the blood. They also contribute to the regulation of electrolytes, blood pressure and maintenance of an acid-alkaline balance in the blood.

Electrolytes are the substance that produces an “electrically” conducting solution, mainly sodium, when absorbed with water, and involves itself with fluid balance and blood pressure control. It also controls the electrical components of the body, such as muscle tissue and neurons.

The kidneys themselves are vital enough that there are two of them, with the ability of each to maybe carry on even if the other is lost. Each kidney has more than enough functioning renal tissue to do the job.

The exam’s final task is completed at one’s leisure at home – providing a sample of your pooh. A stool sample kit, called a fecal immuno-chemical test (FIT), is prescribed and bought at a pharmacy. Taking it home I read the directions three or four times and when the next bowel movement was imminent, I laid the piece of supplied paper over the surface of water in the toilet bowl.  I was going to paint target rings on the paper, but all that was handy was m’lady’s tube of lipstick, and I wouldn’t dare. Hovering over the seat I squeezed out just a little bit then puckered back up. Standing, I took the wooden popsicle stick provided with the kit and daubed a small sample, which I then put into the provided tube, stick and all, sealed well, and voila, a sample any forensics investigator would be proud of. Returning to the seat and finishing the task at hand, I was ready to deliver the sacred Fit tube to the lab.

Chapter Seven

A month or so goes by and I get a call from my doctor’s office that the results are in. A date is set. Upon that day and working within the ten-minute window given for appointments, my doctor comes in, and after the “how are you doings” and genuine “would love to talk but”, he sits down beside me with his laptop and we review all the tests given. Besides both being disgusted by my lung pictures, and me being deeply embarrassed, we move forward. I am told my heart is steady-eddy, there are no deranged things, icky or untoward chemicals, needles or condoms flowing through my blood, and that I have beautiful cholesterol. But there were traces of blood found in my stool sample. If average traces are eighty whatever, my trace amount was about a thirty, which is far from a death sentence I am told, but… we talk about it for a bit more then as nonchalantly as possible, he leans over and asks as Tom Waits sings “Happy Anniversary”, how about a colonoscopy. And I thought, why not.

On average fifteen per cent of people who get their stool examined are found to have traces of blood in them. This does not mean one has cancer, though four per cent of people tested with a colonoscopy will have. The pooh-test is strictly a diagnostic test looking for potential signs of cancer, but all it really shows is that one is bleeding from somewhere inside.

The majority of times the blood traces come from polyps, benign growths that hang off the wall of the rectum or colon, and which rarely show any symptoms. Polyps that do become cancerous usually take years to develop, which is why it is important for those of us over fifty to get checked.

Bleeding from the behind could also mean all sorts of other things, like haemorrhoids, which are sometimes painless or internal, ulcers, anal cracks or cuts, irritable bowel syndrome, a colony of polyps, simple inflammation or having the evil diverticular disease.

Diverticulitis affects more than ten per cent of the populations of Canada, Western Europe, Britain and Australia over the age of forty. Coincidently, these places all represent the world’s largest meat consumers. By sixty years of age, half will have some sort of diverticular disease of the colon. Seen as balloon-like extensions bulging out from the wall of the colon, they are sometimes filled with fluid. This happens, because of weakness of the muscle layers and are in serious jeopardy of becoming infected since they exist within the sewer pipe of a “civilized” human’s body. In severe cases abscesses develop which can perforate and begin bleeding into the abdomen, or exploding like a pimple. Other than the occasional cramping, bloating, expelling pooh gas, and irregular schedule of when you need to empty your bowels, most people are totally unaware of the fact that the make-up of their intestines has changed into structures that are not normally present or natural. It gets serious when blood is showing up much too often and in higher volumes in any stool.

Interestingly enough, in the rest of the world, mainly Africa and Asia, diverticular disease is not at all common. The reasons why are many, from the possibility that Africans, especially, eat a diet that contains more fibre than the Western populations, to the possibility that most people in Africa, India and Asia still use the natural squatting position to empty their bowels, as humans have done all through our evolution. The benefits include the stretching of limbs and muscles used in the act of squatting in the first place, which many “civilized” people, especially in Canada and the States would have a hard time doing, because of their obesity rates. The position allows the bowel not to be as compressed as it is when sitting on a toilet, thus, even with the larger loads, there is far less straining. In the West there is a long list of people dying, often with their hearts giving out, trying to expel their stool. In many countries, especially amongst Muslim and Hindu peoples, another benefit is that they clean themselves with water, instead of smearing the remains off with multiple sheets of eight-ply toilet tissue, which both happen to be far easier to do squatting then sitting on a toilet. The trick with using water to clean one’s nether regions is to always use your left hand; right hand is reserved for eating and hand shaking. As for lefties, it is unfortunate.

Chapter Eight

After my doctor and I agreed on a colonoscopy and that I would be contacted soon to set it up, I began to think about the Magic School Bus, which was popular when my son was five years old, and the episode where after being shrunk down to a tiny speck, they enter the body down the throat to explore the human digestive system.

yellow school busThe Magic School Bus was one of the best animated educational programs ever. Running from 1994 to 1997, it was about a class of kids led by the incredibly informative Ms. Valerie Frizzle, voiced by Lily Tomlin, who in 1995 won an Emmy for the role for outstanding performance in an animated program. Ms Frizzle and her class would take adventurous day trips in their yellow school bus exploring the whys and how’s of nearly every science known to man.

For example, of the fifty-two episodes created, “Inside Ralphie”, was about germs. Ralphie, one of the students, was sick with a fever and sore throat, so for that day’s outing Ms Frizzle shrunk their magic school bus down to a pin point and they entered their ailing classmate through a cut on his arm. They travelled to his throat to see what was making him sick, but white blood cells, the body’s attack hounds and defenders, saw the magic school bus as a threat and began to attack, and attempted to devour it. Ms Frizzle got them out real quick-like, in saliva the next time Ralphie coughed.

Same sort of thing happened in the 1966 sci-fi classic film, Fantastic Voyage, where instead of a yellow school bus filled with kids, a spacecraft-type ship filled with scientists made the inner journey. The premise was that when an important scientist developed a blood clot on the brain after being shot in an assassination attempt, a small group of medical specialists and scientists boarded the submarine Proteus, which was armed with a laser. They were then miniaturized, inserted into a needle and injected into the patient to remove the clot. They had one hour to complete their mission before they and the ship begin to grow back to its normal size and explode out of the injured scientist’s body.

Besides being constantly attacked by the same hyena-like white blood cells that attacked the school bus, they had to detour through the heart. A cardiac arrest was induced in the patient, to avoid turbulence as they passed through the atria and ventricles. Running low on oxygen, they flew into the lungs to replenish their supply, after which they arrived in the middle ear, where everyone inside the ship and those surrounding the patient outside had to keep very quiet and still, once again to prevent any turbulence. As they got to the clot in the brain, a traitor on board created chaos and the ship crashed. The survivors swam out via a tear drop, and surfaced in the lake of the corner of the eye and escaped by being sucked up in a syringe.

But the Magic School Bus episode that I thinking about was the digestion episode titled, “For Lunch”, which seemed appropriate, considering my digestive tract, at least the bottom half, was soon going to be explored too. In reality, the undertaking of exploring the entire human gastrointestinal tract (GI tract), would be a daunting task, a truly epic endeavour. If it were a movie, the scope of it would put to shame “The Bridge over the River Kwai”, “Lawrence of Arabia” and any one of the episodes of the “Lord of the Rings” trilogy.

Chapter Nine

From mouth to anus the GI tract is, on average, nine metres (thirty feet) long, about the average height of a three-storey building. Besides the previously mentioned trillions of cells found in it, there are also about one hundred million neurons which the brain uses for its control and regulation.     digestive system

The entire gastric phase that food goes through takes from twenty-four to seventy-two hours, depending on what was eaten, how much and numerous other variables. But I find it odd that a McDonald’s Big-Mac seems to be given carte blanche to make it through me in under an hour, and a Magic School Bus episode was less than thirty minutes long.

In “For Lunch”, Arnold, another one of the students, gets sick after eating something, so Ms Frizzle comes up with yet another brilliant idea, and herding her kids onto the magic bus, they once again get shrunk down to nearly nothing and head on down Arnold’s esophagus. Though the episode could not detail all they would see and experience during such an epic journey, even though animated, I will ad-lib the narration and try to fill in the gaps.

After putting almost anything solid, other than a yellow school bus filled with kids and a teacher, in your mouth, the process of mastication (chewing) begins. While the tongue and cheeks position and move the food, chewing creates saliva (digestive enzyme) which immediately begins breaking down any starch and absorbing nutrients and energy from what you eat. How and for how long you chew can have a huge impact on your health. The best ways to retain the most energy from what you eat is to take smaller bites, chew until food is liquefied and lost all texture, then swallow completely before taking another bite. The importance of mastication cannot be stressed enough. Because, by the time the chewing is over, whatever is left splashes down into the hydrochloric acid and pepsin digestive juices of the stomach, where it quickly becomes either, if chewed properly, liquefied baby food and easily digestible, or a big fat bolus, a furry ball containing chunks of undigested food.

The stomach, which is a distensible organ and can normally expand to hold about one litre (about two pounds) of food, is where the mechanical and chemical digestion processes continue. It mixes the food down to molecules using peristalsis, which are waves of muscular contractions moving along the stomach wall like an arena crowd doing the “wave” at a hockey game, which furthers protein digestion. It takes a lot of energy to do this, and is why we often would love to take a nap while we digest a big meal. Most of the absorption of nutrients that is taking place goes to the circulatory and lymphatic capillaries through the actions of cellular biology, including osmosis, active transport and diffusion. But if there are chunks in the food it forces the digestion process to expend even more energy trying to break them down. Chunks that are unable to be digested in the stomach scrape their way through the gut, until they get to the intestine, where bacteria will cause it to putrefy and potentially cause a plethora of problems, including gas, bloating, diarrhea, constipation, abdominal pain, cramping and other digestive tribulations.

So chew well and savour each bite. With the brain taking about twenty minutes to signal the stomach that it is full, studies show by chewing slowly, one ends up consuming about ten percent fewer calories and burning less energy to achieve it.

Chapter Ten

After whatever is chewed and swallowed, it mixes in the stomach for typically one to two hours, what is left then enters the duodenum, the top part of the small intestine, where a finer break down process takes place using digestive enzymes from the pancreas and bile juice from the liver. Then it is onto the small intestine where ninety-five per cent of the absorption of nutrients into the blood stream takes place. This process gets a boost when the gallbladder, the storage tank for the excess bile produced by the liver, releases bile into the small intestine sort of like an automated car wash. This process breaks down even further what had originally been chewed and swallowed.

Another organ, the pancreas, besides being an endocrine gland, secreting insulin which allows glucose to move from the blood into the muscles and other tissues for use as energy, is also an exocrine gland, releasing glucagon when the blood sugar is too low. This allows the liver to break down the stored sugar into glucose, to re-balance the sugar levels. Another very important function of the pancreas, and which is pertinent to this story, is that also secretes digestive enzymes.

At this point in the Magic School bus’ journey, wise one, Ms. Frizzle, glances at her watch and announces that it’s time to return and her class and their yellow school bus head back out, hopefully heading for the nearest car-wash. Waving goodbye, we will continue the journey alone.

Where the small intestine joins the colon, the large intestine, whatever has made it through and still undigested will eventually make its way down the slalom course of the, on average, one and a half metre (nearly five foot) long colon. This process will take about three to four hours. Along the way any remaining water and minerals are re-absorbed into the blood vessels of the colon. The bacteria, which reside in the colon, produce such things as biotin and vitamin K, which are also re-absorbed into the blood. But at this point the bacteria are mostly just dashing madly about like chickens with their heads cut off, frolicking in what to them, is both a Garden of Eden, and a smorgasbord of delicious debauchery. More the chaos, the more the colon’s acidity rises.

Eventually the waste and indigestible make it to the rectum, the final portion of the colon. About twelve centimetres (four point seven inches) long, it is the only straight section in the GI tract, and the storage silo for stools about to be launched.

It shouldn’t be a big surprise that after all the hoop jumping of the GI tract that so many of the human body’s problems arise in the colon. Considering all the unimaginable volumes of chemicals, hormones, pharmaceuticals and toxins a human takes in daily, from the food we eat, what we drink and air that we breathe, it’s no wonder our personal sewer pipes have become ever the more toxic and just plain nasty.

Staying between the legs, human anatomy is very functional, and so it should be after a couple of million years of evolution. But for those who believe it was achieved through intelligent design, perhaps Neil de Grasse Tyson, American astrophysicist, cosmologist, author, and science communicator, can better explain. “I think of, like, the human body, and I look at what’s going on between our legs. There’s like a sewage system and entertainment complex intermingling. No engineer of any intelligence would have designed it that way.”

Chapter Eleven

Back to the physical exam, and after the x-rays and body fluid samples, it was a couple of months before the party planner, a bubbly Colon Screening Program Patient Coordinator, contacted me with a date for an information/awareness meeting the following month. There were about seven people in my group, where a couple of very positive and perky nurses showed and told us what foods and drinks to avoid pre-op, what to buy to get the colon flushed, and not with embarrassment, the importance of a clean, thus happy colon. We all sat apart, equally uncomfortable. Of course one individual had a list of inane questions to ask, mostly about what could he eat and not eat, and then had to ask them again, all the while remaining just as confused.

We were shown slides on a big screen showing that a clean and happy colon looks like the inside of a light pink, ribbed water hose when inflated, but which usually lies flat. A weak attempt at cleaning a colon showed pools of yellow and brown gunk lodged along its ribs and caked along its sides. We were shown no slides of a colon when in use, as I’m sure we could all visualize the occasional brown train kneading its way down – sometimes firm, sometimes just a flash flood.

I thought we would get together when it was over and gather in a chanting group hug in the middle of the room, wishing each other the best, a “Remember the Titans” moment, but alas, everyone left rather quickly.

Another month went by, and as the date of the colonoscopy neared, the medical terms and conditions about being examined or operated on internally kick in. For a colonoscopy, one is to cease and desist in taking iron pills or supplements that contain iron, and immediately stop eating foods that contain seeds including whole flax, sesame seeds, berries and popcorn, because they stick in the folds of one’s colon, hindering further inspection and generally mucking up the whole exercise.

Three days before, you have to confirm your ride to and from hospital, review your diet for the next two days, and purchase one container of GoLytely (gotta love the irony) or Pico-Salax, both laxative solutions, and four Dulcolax tablets, which is a stimulant laxative. The solutions are intended to create a watery stool, basically they cause diarrhea by increasing the water in the intestinal tract to stimulate bowl movements, while the Dulcolax excites the bowel’s motion to help the flow along. To get the ball or should I say bolus, rolling, you take two of the Dulcolax, two nights before the procedure, the other two the next night on the eve of the planned assault.

The day before, stop eating any solid food, milk, milk products, non-dairy creamers, protein beverages or alcoholic beverages. Ensure-type nutrition drinks and the like are allowed, as they are non-dairy products and happen to taste pretty good in coffee. Only fluids you can see through are allowed, but stay especially away from fluids that are red or purple in colour because they stain the digestive tract. Clear fluids include water, of course, popsicles, though not red or purple, Jell-O, with no added toppings of fruit, clear broth with no vegetables, noodles or meat, clear tea and thank god, black coffee with sugar. Fruit juices without pulp, like apple juice and lemonade are allowed, but no milk, cream or soy. Pop of any kind and Gatorade, Power Aid, and all the other “ades” are taboo. Finally, add four litres of water to the GoLytely container and store in fridge.

Chapter Twelve

About three in the afternoon on the eve of colonoscopy day, it came time for the cleansing. During the upcoming bowel cleanse a typical adult will lose about three to four liters (a gallon) of fluid. So the day before and up to three hours before the exam, they suggest drinking about the same amount of the clear fluids listed above. Being on such a diet, some people get light headed and I’m sure more cranky, craving a Snickers bar, so instead a Gravol is allowed.

I stood before the kitchen sink, took a deep breath and began drinking the voluminous laxative solution. Eight ounces every fifteen minutes until the four litre container is half empty. At ten PM that night, I drank the remaining two litres, at the same rate. They suggest it is best to drink it back quickly and not sip it like a Martini. I happen to agree. It is undoubtedly the worst part of the whole process.

After you have begun drinking the GoLytely or Pico-Salax mixture, Ms. Frizzle or any other wise person, would stay within twenty feet of a toilet. It definitely begins to flush out the digestive tract, and quite quickly I might add. But on average it starts working within one to three hours, though it’s also known to take up to six to eight hours. After the first few “sit-downs” you have serious diarrhea, basically pissing like a horse out of one’s arse. With each flash flood down the colon scouring any debris and waste along its way. Each time the fluid became clearer, though I was quite taken aback and rather concerned when after about the fourth or fifth sit-down a waft of fish permeated the room.

But that’s the thing, as mentioned, the colon may look like the inside of a ribbed garden hose when inflated with air, but naturally it lies flat, and has been eerily known to hide objects there for years. Like the joke I heard on a TV program, where a singer had just ended their audition song and the oldest judge asked her how old she was. She answered fourteen years. The youngest judge looked over at the eldest and crudely half-joked about the likelihood that, “There are probably pieces of steak older than that in your colon”.

But speaking from experience, I swallowed four quarters when I was about ten years old after being sent to the store for bread. Was X-rayed and told all should be good, but that I would have to check my stools and confirm that all four quarters exited my body. Using a pair of chopsticks as tools, each stool was checked thoroughly. I believe it took about a week for all four quarters to make their way to the end and out of me. And to this day I am still reminded, when I am in contact with one of my sisters, that she did the chop stick check for a promised cut of the take, and that I reneged on the deal. She is still waiting for her cut, with interest of course.

Your bowels are considered clear when you are only passing liquid, though the liquid may be clear with yellow or coloured flecks of stool. If you are unable to fully clean your bowels out, you must contact hospital immediately, instead of wasting everyone’s time showing up with a dirty, unhappy colon.

Over the entire cleansing process I managed to read a few chapters of a book and completed two Sunday crossword puzzles. As to the toilet, I felt it handled itself very well with its porcelain intact. The next time I cleaned it I lifted the seat which was obviously the blast containment ring, and now understand why the underside of a toilet seat is concave. It allows it to withstand intense forces better and deflects blasts back down into the bowl. I love well thought out and innovative designs.

Chapter Thirteen

The next morning in the dark of the early a.m., I walked the three blocks to the hospital sans nail polish, jewellery, body piercings, make-up, perfume, aftershave or other scented products. I did have wads of toilet paper stuffed into both jacket pockets, espying the bushes and hedges lining the walk just in case.

Once received into the hospital you go to the proper ward and are given a bed which gets curtained off so that you may slip into something a little more comfortable, typically a thin sheet opened at the back, which in this case seems so apropos. For many medical procedures, especially a colonoscopy, people are given the most commonly used drugs of choice, a benzodiazepine, usually midazolam, and an opioid analgesic such as fentanyl, for preoperative sedation.

After asking around before hand, I had been told that other than slight pressure from time to time, the actual procedure did not physically hurt, but if drugged, you are impaired for up to twenty-four hours. The fentanyl alone is eighty to one hundred times more potent than morphine and forty to fifty times more potent than one hundred per cent heroin. Thus, no important decision making or signing of documents, no driving a car, nor travelling alone by either bus or taxi, no riding a bicycle, swimming or climbing ladders, going to work or doing business, nor drinking alcohol, smoking pot, taking sleeping pills or anti-anxiety medicines, or even being responsible for another person for a day after the procedure. So I passed on being given the midazolam cocktail.

Midazolam is a short-acting central nervous system depressant of the benzodiazepine family, and is marketed under the names Dormicum, Hypnovel, and Versed. Benzodiazepines enhance the effect of what is called the neurotransmitter gamma (amino butyric acid) in receptors in the brain, resulting in sedative, hypnotic, anti-anxiety, anticonvulsant and muscle relaxant properties, thus in this day and age it is widely used in millions upon millions of people’s lives, whether they are being operated on or not.

The main reason midazolam works so well is because, besides its other attributes, it produces amnesia. Indeed it calms you from most anxiety, but in actual fact it breaks down the brain’s ability to make memory. If what you suffer from gives you pain, when you take midazolam you still hurt, but you forget about it almost immediately. As such, midazolam and other benzodiazepines are some of the most prescribed medicines in the world for all sorts of things. It goes without saying, benzodiazepines of any type are also considered to be major drugs of abuse.

In combination with an antipsychotic drug, midazolam is also able to calm aggressive or out of control behaviour of those who suffer from schizophrenia, and is often used as a stop gap measure for treatment of psychiatric emergencies, such as acute psychosis, at least until the effects of lithium and other antipsychotics take effect. Midazolam is also routinely used at low doses on those in their final hours or days lying on their death beds or waiting to go to the other side, as it helps with calming any agitation, restlessness, anxiety, and accompanying twitches, jerks and seizures.

In combination with other drugs, such as vecuronium bromide, potassium chloride and hydromorphone, midazolam is also used in certain US states in executions by lethal injection. The midazolam renders the condemned unconscious, the other drugs are then injected stopping the prisoner’s breathing and heart.  It replaces pentobarbital, which was once used instead, but which was disallowed for use by the drug’s manufacturer.

Other popular benzodiazepines, which have replaced the seriously harmful and once well-used, barbiturates, include Alprazolam. Available under different generic names it is best known as Xanax, and much like other benzodiazepines is short-acting with a median half-life of only one to twelve hours. Similar to midazolam, Xanax also goes straight to the brain, and having the same, as already noted, anxiolytic, sedative, hypnotic, skeletal muscle relaxant, anticonvulsant and amnesic properties. A psychoactive drug, Xanax is commonly used for the medical treatment of panic, anxiety, and social disorders, as well as for most forms of depression. Xanax is one of the top ten selling drugs in the world today.

Chapter Fourteen

Meanwhile back at the hospital, a nurse has wheeled me into an examination room. She prepped me by saying the procedure will take from thirty minutes to an hour and introduced me to the gastroenterologist, his assistant, and the star of the show, the endoscope, who I instantly dubbed Snoopy. I was told to lie on my left side, where a large television screen sat before me, ready to record Snoopy’s walk-about up my anus and through my rectum and large bowel. It was going to be an eye opener.

Snoopy is a long soft flexible tube armed only with a camera and a light, but can perform all sorts of feats. Sort of like a Swiss army knife. As it entered my anus it began to pump air in ahead of itself. The pressure of the air to keep the colon expanded like the ribbed water hose it was described as and the initial entry of the doc’s finger inserting Snoopy were the most uncomfortable parts, but did not really hurt. The cramping that occurred at various times simply felt like the passing of a really bad case of gas.

Because the colon is usually lying flat, the air Snoopy pumps in expands the walls of the colon allowing it to see the now well-lit surfaces.  Any fluids, now lying in pools of yellow brown water, are sucked up and out so that no surface area goes unchecked. The live footage on the big screen became fascinating, especially in Snoopy’s dogged determination to check every surface of my bowel. Could not see his tail wagging, but I bet you it was.

You are asked to change your position a little whenever Snoopy has to make his way around a dogleg of sorts. After the rectum, the course starts with a turn through the sigmoid colon, another turn up through the descending colon, and then across the belly to the entrance of the coiled up small intestine, where a stop sign awaits. Snoopy cleans and inspects on the journey in and inspects again on the way out.

Snoopy is even able to have instruments passed on down within itself. If there is bleeding in the colon, a laser, heater probe or needle to inject certain medicines to stop any bleeding, can be quickly sent along. In case of severe bleeding, Snoopy can tie off a rupture using a loop of blue string. If this does happen one is warned not to worry about the length of blue string that will appear in your stool in about seven days. He can also use a steel clip to stem bleeding, which takes about seven to twenty-four days to make its way out and is also harmless. They suggest if you are having an MRI scan or going through airport security, be sure to tell staff that you have a clip attached to your colon.

Snoopy can also perform a biopsy by taking small tissue samples and removing any abnormal growths, such as the previously mentioned polyps, which can be brought back out and sent to a lab for testing.

Snoopy found a small one in me and went right up to it. It looked like a skin sac hanging from a short umbilical line on the wall of my colon. Snoopy seemed to sniff it then deftly slid a wire loop around the base and tightened it up, pinching it off, then instantly cauterized the base to prevent bleeding. Though I watched it on TV I felt no pain.

Though incredibly good at what they do, during a colonoscopy there is a one in two hundred and fifty chance that there could be a complication, such as reaction to the medication or soreness of anus. And there is a one in one thousand chance of bleeding or puncturing of the bowel, and a slight risk, because of medication given, that your stomach contents will aspirate into one’s lungs if you throw up. But the most important risk is the possibility of Snoopy missing a polyp or small tumor. This is why it is imperative that you have a happy and clean colon. If not, you will have to come back and do it all over again. Supposedly they guarantee that Snoopy will be removed from your ass once the exam is over and samples have been taken. And that he will leave the place as if he wasn’t even there.

Chapter Fifteen

Waving Snoopy good bye, I was wheeled back to the general patient dorm and curtained off. A bit of confusion occurred with the nurses when the first one said they will be allowing me time to relax and come down from the medication. “I did not take any medication”, I reply. She frowned, and then told me she would call the person picking me up from the hospital because I would be still drugged up. She left, but a few moments later returned to confirm I had not taken any medication, but really just wanting to ask, why not? I then explained that I was farting and felt a bit bloated but other than that I was fine and not pregnant or retaining water. She chuckles “that’s good”, and explains it’s probably all right for me to get dressed and wait for my pickup. She leaves.

Another nurse quickly appears and asks if I would like juice or water as I wait for the drugs to dissipate. I said I was not on any drugs. Considering I had not eaten for over twenty-four hours, my bowel had just been cleaned, probed, detailed, and a polyp hanging off its wall had been snipped off, I asked if they had the food of champions and another important food group – chocolate milk. She frowned and smiled at the same time, said no and left me alone to dress.

Thereafter, if you do not get chills, fever, severe belly pain, gas pains that do not go away by farting; shortness of breath; rectal bleeding of more than a half a cup of blood, or black tarry “baby pooh”, you are good to go, and will hear back after Snoopy’s job performance report, and whether his inspecting and tissue retrieval work were up to par and a success.

One is able to eat and drink thirty to sixty minutes after the procedure, so after eventually being released, it was off to a little restaurant where m’lady watched me eat. After being dropped off at my place I just took it easy, though later that afternoon did spend some time stomping foot wide mushrooms, which had blossomed up through the building’s parking lot’s sixty-five year old asphalt layer. As they grew upwards, reaching for the sun, they did not see that they had peeled back three inches of asphalt like petals sprouting from a bud. I was in awe, and sad that they had to go.

That night I dined alone on half of a classic Italian sub from Subway, piles of cottage cheese and potato salad sprinkled with shredded Kale and garlic stuffed olives, a couple of honey garlic pepperoni sticks, two chocolate fudge cookies and a nuked cinnamon roll topped with cream cheese. Later I read in bed munching on a bowl of pecans. Then slept like a baby.

Here in Victoria, the wait for results can take anywhere from three weeks to a couple of months. Mine arrived by phone, by the same bubbly Colon Screening Program Patient Coordinator, who had contacted me in the beginning. Results were negative, meaning good, but it was suggested that I have another one in three to five years. I smiled right back at her over the phone, thanked her very much and sincerely agreed I would.

Chapter Sixteen

So there you go the tail exploits of a physical exam and a colonoscopy. Seriously, if you are an adult over fifty, especially a male, and you have not had a check-up or a colonoscopy recently or ever, and if you are able to afford one or have coverage, do yourself a favour and get one.

Besides watching what one puts into their digestive tracts, take care of your teeth too, they are important in being able to properly chew whatever it is you swallow. Stay away from cigarettes, and exercise the best you can, because heaven knows there is not much in the way of hunting and gathering going on these days to keep us fit.

And although I often don’t practise what I preach, but will never stop trying, once again, please be aware of what you are putting into your body, whether the air you breathe or food and drink you ingest. Try to make it food which is the least compromised by human added hormones, pesticides, herbicides and chemicals. Eat food that still has the earth’s life energy within it. It’s the perfect fuel for the human body’s digestive system. It is easily distributed throughout the body, and leaves all systems running smoothly, with the power behind them making it easier for them to expel any waste, do any repair work, or fight off any germs, and as a reward, you’ll hopefully possess one of the happiest colons around.

One of the best indicators of what is going on in the body and its overall health, besides keeping an eye on what we cough, spit and blow into a tissue is, yep, you guessed it, observe, assess, and report if needed, our bowel movements. Keep an eye on your stool. It can detect all sorts of things, from bacterial infections to cancers, immune dysfunctions, stress levels, hydration and nutrition.

Pooh itself is about 75% water, 25% fibre, dead and living bacteria, other cells and mucus. The perfect stool is a sausage or a snake that squeezes out quite easily like it has a life of its own, and knows where it’s going. Medium brown in colour and possibly up to 45 cm (18 in) long, with a 5 cm (2 in) diameter. To improve on an ideal stool, drink lots of water and chew fibre, especially hemp, flax, psyllium and chia. Of course there should be a slight odor to it, but it shouldn’t reek and peel paint. Remedy is to take a pro-biotic and eat more greens, nuts, and fruit.

Be aware of the colour of your stool. Light to dark brown, even some shades of green are ok. Pretty obvious what the problem is if your stool is red, while a black stool also could mean bleeding or too much meat consumption. Yellow stools typically mean gallbladder issues or parasitic problems, while white or grey, could show liver disease, pancreatic disorder or heavy antacid use.

If stool is under high pressure and dense, it’s often hard to pass, even painful, so take deep breaths to avoid any injuries to anus, and just take it slow. Allow the muscles to expand and do their job.

If the stool is a bunch of little lumps or balls, like deer or rabbit turds, it’s commonly a sign of dehydration and/or lack of fibre. Greasy and hard to flush often means heavy consumption of drugs, inflammation in digestive tract or food intolerance. And a high sugar intake, heavy spices, food sensitivities, especially hot sauces, makes a stool sticky and wetter.

Beyond the stool, we enter the realm of explosions. Smaller explosions out of the anus is often mild food poisoning, too much sugar or food intolerance. Basically, stuff the body is trying to expel as fast as it can. Do take note, when explosion is larger, and diarrhea like, and lies like an oil slick upon the surface of the toilet water. This could either be severe food poisoning, bacterial imbalances, food intolerance or inflammatory bowel disease. Get checked out, seriously.

If there are white spots in your stool and you have one of the itchiest asses around, it is probably a parasitic infection. Get treatment as well, and wash hands more than often. And if you ever wonder why we even eat corn, since it just shows up seemingly intact in our stools, it is because of the most easily ignored, yet most important and best thing we can do to for our digestive tract, is to slow down when eating. Take three deep breaths before you eat and chew each bite and chew it well.

Chapter Seventeen

Thinking back on the whole experience, I will end this essay with what I feel was the ah-ha moment for me.

When Snoopy was almost completely pulled out, but before popping out of my anus, he stopped and slowly arched his back, bending around to take a visual of my anus looking back from whence he came. It reminded me of the Voyager space probes.

Launched in 1977, the 722 kilogram (nearly sixteen hundred pound) robotic spacecraft, the Voyager I, has been using instruments on board, including infrared spectrometer, magnetometer, cosmic ray, radio-astronomy, plasma-wave and photo polariser systems, to study atmospheric properties and the composition of space as it bee-lines away from Earth.

It has been travelling at 67,000 kilometres per hour (40,000 mph) for nearly thirty-eight years and as of September 2015 is currently a staggering, and hard to fathom, nineteen billion km (nearly thirteen billion miles) away. She is followed by her sister, Voyager II, which was launched three weeks before her, but lolly-gagging along about three billion kilometres behind.

It took Voyager I two years to pass Jupiter, three years to pass Saturn, nine years for Uranus, not my anus, and twelve years to pass Neptune. It has also passed over forty-eight moons. To send a signal travelling at the speed of light (approx. 300,000 kilometres a second), to the Voyager I today would take over sixteen hours.

Since 2004 it has been leaving the sun’s solar system and entering interstellar space, the space between the stars, where the outward motion of the solar wind of our star, the sun, ceases. Though most of the Voyager I’s instruments have been shut down, she is estimated to be able to carry on until about 2025. But even if she were able, the next nearest star is about forty thousand years away.

In 1990, when the Voyager I was only about six billion kilometres (four billion miles) away, and after nine years of having its camera turned off, astronomer and author Carl Sagan, Candy Hanson of NASA, Carolyn Porco of the University of Arizona and the rest of the Voyagers team of scientists and engineers turned Voyager I’s fifteen hundred millimetre (fifty-nine inch) high-resolution narrow angle camera back on. Rotating the camera around to face from whence it came, sixty frames were taken and are the last photos from the Voyager I. Sending the frames back to earth took nearly six hours. One of the frames shows a nearly black backdrop with a smattering of light rays from the sun amidst thousands of pricks of light. In the lower left hand corner amongst the six hundred and forty thousand pixels that make up the image is one of those mere points of light. It measures less than a pixel, zero point twelve of a pixel in fact. A tiny dot against the vastness of space, but blown-up and peering really close or using a magnifying glass, one can see that it is pale blue in colour, and happens to be where all of Earth’s history has happened. And if the whole world consumed as much resources as the United States does, we would need four of them.

Within the vastness of space, one little planet out of many. Moving and spinning around at the perfect distance from the sun for the last four and a half billion years. But this little planet is abnormally heating up, much more quickly than in the past. Reason is because of the way only one, of the millions of other living species that inhabit the planet, has lived over the last microsecond of the planet’s history, over the past few hundred years.

But the nearly seven and a half billion people that inhabit the planet today are not entirely to blame for the ever dwindling and extinction of its resources, and changing climate. In fact where population is growing the fastest today, is in Sub-Saharan Africa. Where all the areas, and countries, that lie south of the Sahara desert, include some of the poorest parts of the world, and lowest carbon dioxide emissions producers in the world. The consumption habits of only about 10% of the world’s population of Earth are to blame, and are responsible for the vast majority of both, carbon dioxide emissions, which of course will change things, and wealth.

Whilst believing in unlimited growth in all human endeavours we also believe this is possible upon this one finite planet. But then as American author, philosopher, and libertarian socialist, Noam Chomsky, has stated,

“The general population doesn’t know what’s happening and it doesn’t even know that it doesn’t know.”

This is undoubtedly one of the reasons why, besides the cancers erupting with abandon within us, immune systems dying, toxic digestive tracts, and hearts giving out, the soon-to-be number one health problem for humanity is expected to be, if not already, our state of mind.

The planet on the other hand, is losing its forests, its fresh water, while its seas, rivers, skies, lakes, cities become acidified, and ever quickly changing climates become extreme events. Its resources being consumed by greed, and to feed an ever growing population, both of which are already far larger than what this one small planet can supply. A planet which Carl Sagan describes in his 1994 book, “Pale Blue Dot: A Vision of the Human Future in Space”.

“That’s here. That’s home. That’s us. On it everyone you love, everyone you know, everyone you ever heard of, every human being who ever was, lived out their lives. The aggregate of our joy and suffering, thousands of confident religions, ideologies, and economic doctrines, every hunter and forager, every hero and coward, every creator and destroyer of civilization, every king and peasant, every young couple in love, every mother and father, hopeful child, inventor and explorer, every teacher of morals, every corrupt politician, every “superstar,” every “supreme leader,” every saint and sinner in the history of our species lived there – on a mote of dust suspended in a sunbeam.” 

pale blue dot

Imagine that, as happen stance would have it, a small blue dot called earth, also in dire need of its own colonoscopy, and a date with Snoopy.

09/28/14

Nuke Me Nuke You

NukeBlast

If you are thanking you’re lucky stars for being born in a commonwealth country such as Canada, Australia or New Zealand because, according to the release of The Economist – Intelligence Unit’s, “the best cities to live in the world” report, nine of the top eleven are in these countries, be glad and grateful. Based on stability, healthcare, culture, environment, and including such things as education, what type of crime is prevalent, levels of censorship and availability of good quality housing and goods, the top ten cities to live in the world are Melbourne (Aus), Vienna, Austria, Vancouver (Can), Toronto (Can), Calgary (Can), Adelaide (Aus), Sydney (Aus), Helsinki, Finland, Perth (Aus), and Auckland, New Zealand.  Such places are also some of the most expensive places to live in the world.

If you would like to gloat for awhile, please, I didn’t. Because in reality, no matter where one lives, many find life is a struggle most days, especially trying to keep ones sanity intact. But if you are jumping around and fist-pumping, the following article should perhaps not be read at such a time.

It is a piece that formed in my head August 6th, the day of remembrance of Hiroshima, and I started thinking about some research into radiation sickness I had been doing, my knowledge and research over the decades of the accuracies of World War II, and not the Hollywood version, and how in a heartbeat, everything could change, because a few countries have nuclear power in both warheads and reactors, with most of the reactors run past their forty year life-spans. So if you do not need distraction from your distractions, or your bubble popped, the following might be a downer. But then as stated, it could all shatter in seconds anyways.

Such a looming threat though should only make us more concerned into making each day count, for ourselves and those around us and within our communities, and to be aware of such threats, and most importantly, allowing ourselves to talk about such things. If you are going to venture forth and read further, next time you have to vote, think about to whom you will be bestowing upon such a right and who you are hiring, and that your concerns will be acknowledged.  It’s supposed to be our voice, not theirs. And if being the eternal optimists, to remember it is not too late to stop nuclear madness.

In the final months of World War II the States were in the process of becoming the new and dominant world empire, since the British Empire had torn her guts out over the course of two world wars and had roared its last hurrah. As for those still alive who actually think Germany would have stormed North America, and we’d all be speaking German are delusional. They could not even take Britain. As for the Japanese, they had no interest in North America, there plan was to delay the Americans, while they took control of the natural resources in Southwest Asia. They felt they had only about a year to sixteen months to take what they could, before the industrial might of the States would produce enough to stop them. They were correct. On a side note, if the American carrier fleet was not at sea the day Pearl Harbour was attacked; the Japanese might have had a few more months’ leeway, at the most.

All over the world, many countries were shaken to their cores, on their knees retching after the previous years of war. Some countries lost a generation of their population, especially when the majority of deaths in World War II, by far, were civilians. All together, including deaths from war-related disease, famine, and in captivity, 85 million people died in World War II, nearly four per cent of the world population at the time.

Military deaths totaled 22 to 25 million, the remainder, 55 million, were civilians. It was what war would become in the 20th century. Drop bombs on cities. Where destroying another’s industry, was deemed far more important than nearly exterminating entire populations. And as the war went on, the bombs became only bigger, and more and more civilians felt their wrath.

In Nov 44’ the Americans were close enough in their island hopping to begin fire-bombing Japanese cities. The majority of Japanese homes and businesses were made of wood and paper. It was a turkey shoot.

By March 45’ a typical bombing raid over Japan had escalated to operations such as Operation Meeting House, carried out that month, where 279 B-29’s, flying at an average altitude of about 2100m (7000ft) above Tokyo, would drop 1665 tons (3.3 million lbs) of incendiary bombs, mostly 230kg (500lb) cluster bombs, which would explode at about 659m (2250ft) releasing 38 napalm carrying incendiary bomblets.  The effect was total destruction.  Forty square kilometers (15.8 sq mi) of the center of Tokyo disappeared in firestorm tornados.  Twenty-five per cent of the city ceased to exist. Over 280,000 buildings and homes were destroyed.

At the time, Tokyo was the most densely populated area in the world, with about 103,000 people every 2.59 sq km (one sq mi). And while there is an array of estimated deaths, with such a density, logic would dictate that it was probably much worse than the estimated 90,000 to 150,000 deaths, and over 200,000 injured.  It would become the single most destructive bombing raid on a civilian population in history, more than even Hiroshima and Nagasaki, four months later.

By June 45’ sixty-seven cities had been firebombed in such a way, with over half a million civilian dead, untold numbers injured and burned, and over five million people homeless.  In contrast, and if you do not include the 9,500 members of the US Merchant Marine who died, the States lost only 2,500 civilians over the course of the entire war, while the Soviets lost over 19 million.

After breaking the Japanese military code in 43’ the Americans had been listening in on Japanese communications, and after June 45’ were receiving a lot of traffic concerning the Japanese perhaps surrendering.  Though officially the Japanese, like Winston Churchill, continued to give word that they shall never surrender, behind the scenes steps were being made towards peace.

The Japanese Islands were surrounded, with nothing going in and nothing coming out. Forty per cent of the urban areas of their largest six cities ceased to exist, with the guts of what remained of their industry totally devastated. And having lost nearly five per cent of their population, over twenty-five per cent of both their army and navy, millions injured, and cities no longer existing, there was no doubt the Japanese were losing the ability to continue or even defend their homeland.

Their last ditch effort kamikaze and banzai attacks, expending men, aircraft, and ships were their last gasps. It’s getting desperate when after losing one of the heaviest and most powerful armed battleships ever made, the Musashi, in Oct 44’ during the Battle of Leyte Gulf, sunk after absorbing seventeen bombs and being torpedoed nineteen times, the other, her sister-ship the Yamato, would steam out with a full complement of crew (3,332 men), and a full payload of ammunition on a one way trip to Okinawa in April 45’. The Americans were on her like a pack of wolves, and after eleven torpedoes and six bombs had crashed into her, she keeled over, her magazines exploded and scattered what was left of her into dust and pieces.  Of the crew there were only two hundred and eighty two survivors.

The Japanese and the Americans, also knew that Russia was on its way, with the Trans-Siberian railway running full out since the defeat of Germany in May 45’, as Russian troops and material were being priority posted to their east coast in preparation for the assault on Japan. The Japanese also knew that if the Russians were to assault them, Stalin would not worry about how many of his soldiers died to take Japan.  And no matter how well they defended their island, the Japanese people knew they would no doubt be nearly exterminated. As it turned out, over the coming months the Americans would give a shot at doing the exact same thing.

The Russians had already beaten the other Allies to Berlin, now their intentions were on beating them to Tokyo as well. This was something the American leadership could not accept. So in typical American logic, to speed up any peace negotiations, they decided to obliterate even more Japanese cities and force them to surrender to America alone. Further deciding to drop nuclear bombs instead of conventional bombs, and call them funny names like Little Boy and Fat Man.

But proving karma can very often be a bitch, after delivering parts and enriched uranium for the Little Boy atomic bomb (destined for Hiroshima) to Tinian, in the North Mariana Islands, the heavy cruiser, USS Indianapolis would continue onto Guam, leaving there on July 28th 45’ and steaming for the Philippines.

At ten minutes past midnight on the 30th, the Japanese submarine I-58 would put two torpedoes into the Indianapolis, and a mere twelve minutes later three hundred sailors would go down with her, while the remaining nine hundred went into the water. Four days would go by until by chance, a PV-1 Ventura, patrol bomber on routine patrol would spot men adrift. Doing a flyby, all they could do was to drop a life-raft and a radio transmitter and get the word out. Later that day a PBY Catalina arrived on scene, and against orders landed on the open sea, picking up fifty-six survivors. Thereafter, the destroyer Cecil J. Doyle would show up and begin coordinating the rescue. Within twenty-four hours, six more destroyers would show up to assist.

While nearly nine hundred went into the water ten days previous, by Aug 8th, when the search was called off, only three hundred and seventeen would come out. The sinking of the Indianapolis is the greatest single loss of life at sea in the history of the US Navy.

Meanwhile, on August 6th Little Boy had been put together, armed and loaded into a Boeing B-29 Superfortress bomber, named the Enola Gay. Named by its pilot, Paul Tibbetts, Jr, Enola Gay was his mother’s name, who he honored for her support and strength when earlier he had given up a medical career to become a military pilot. So instead of healing and caring for people, he could instead drop bombs on them.

Before this mission the Enola Gay had practised by participating in the fire bombings of Kobe and Nagoya, two of Japan’s most populated cities. To simulate dropping an atomic bomb, they dropped five-ton pumpkin bombs. Similar in size and shape, as well as ballistic and handling characteristics, they proved to be nearly as destructive, carrying 6,300 lbs of explosives each.

On August 6th, Tibbetts and a crew of eleven would take off from Tinian, and soon rendezvous with two other B-29s, The Great Artiste, carrying instrumentation, and the Necessary Evil, to take photos, because they still did not have any idea how it’d go and how destructive it would be, nor did anyone know anything about how radiation affected humans. They were like babes in the woods thinking they were explorers.

Hiroshima was selected because of the three possible choices, the weather was sunny and clear, which was excellent for the Americans because they wanted to take pictures and see what these atomic bomb things could do. Little Boy was dropped from 9,470m (31,000ft) and detonated at about 600m (1968ft) above Hiroshima, which at the time had a population of about 350,000. Though considered very inefficient, with only perhaps 1.7 per cent of its fissile material (140 lbs of uranium) fissioning, it still created a blast equivalent to sixteen kilotons of TNT (14.5 million kg / 32 million lbs).

One square mile of Hiroshima’s center disappeared, with resulting fires destroying an estimated 12 sq km (4.4 sq mi) of the city. 80,000 people would die, with more than 70,000 people injured and mostly burnt. Nearly 70 per cent of Hiroshima’s buildings ceased to exist.

The Enola Gay was 18.5km (11.5mi) away by the time they felt the shock waves from the blast. Looking back, pilot Tibbetts would describe what he saw as simply “that awful cloud.” It was undoubtedly the moment when some say that the possibility of the apocalypse was passed from the so called gods’ hands, and into our hand.

The next day the longest medical experiment in history would begin and continues to this day. Red Cross Surgeon, Terufumi Sasaki, arrived at Hiroshima and started the first intensive research study to understand the symptoms and dangers of radiation exposure, which we humans had not experienced before at such levels.

In 1946, the States jumped on board and commissioned the Atomic Bomb Casualty Commission (ABCC), of the National Academy of Sciences – National research Council. Made up of scientists, the ABCC felt that a “detailed and long-range study of the biological and medical effects upon the human being” was “of the utmost importance to the United States and mankind in general.” In 1956 a detailed description of all the data they had collected was released.

In 1975 the Atomic Energy Commission would change the administrative organization of the ABCC, where it was to be funded by both the States and Japan and be now called the Radiation Effects Research Foundation (RERF), and which is still in operation today.

Four days after Hiroshima, on August 9th 45’, the B-29 “Bockscar”, piloted by Major Charles Sweeney, dropped Fat Man on the city of Nagasaki. While Little Boy was classed as a simple atomic bomb, Fat Man was a more technologically, sophisticated design, and far more powerful.  Containing a core of about 6.4 kg (14lb) of plutonium, (not uranium like that of Little Boy)  it exploded at 503m (1,650ft) with a blast yield equivalent to 21 kilotons of TNT (19 million kg / 42 million lbs). It generated heat estimated at 3,900 Celsius (7,050 Fahrenheit) and winds estimated at 1,005 km/h (624 mph) at detonation.  As at Hiroshima, one square mile of Nagasaki was instantly destroyed, and then quickly engulfed in ever spreading multiple tornados of fire. Deaths from the blast were estimated in the range of 40,000 to 80,000 people. Dropped 3 km (1.9mi) off the planned center, the surrounding Urakami Valley and its intervening hills protected much of the actual city. The death toll could have been much higher.

Aug 9th was also the day Russia began their, Manchurian Strategic Offensive Operation, which would be the last campaign fought in WWII. Perhaps the horns blew to attack and the tanks moved forward, just after they had all witnessed this second bright flash of light that had burst out from the eastern sky.

Russian troops would take Manchuria, Inner Mongolia and North Korea down to the 38th parallel in eleven days. The Japanese had ten times as many casualties as the Russians, with over 80,000 dead and more than 640,000 troops taken prisoner. It is the worst Japanese army defeat in history.

On August 14th, with the Russian offensive winding down on the mainland, having only taken five days thus far, and ending on the 20th. Keeping the pressure on, and though for all intents and purposes not needed, the Americans would send 828 B-29’s, escorted by 186 fighters over Japan, firebombing  and devastating the cities of Iwakuni, Osaka, and Tokoyama during the day, and Kumagaya and Isesaki that night. Estimated deaths range from 250,000 to 850,000 people.

The next day, Aug 15th, with well over one million of her citizens incinerated over the past nine days, Japan surrendered to the Americans. In reality and confirmed by many who were involved and as already noted, the Japanese were already ready to surrender, whether their remaining cities were further fire-bombed and two atomic bombs dropped on them or not. And in reality, they would have surrendered long before any such American or Russian invasion, because before such an invasion they would have been first bombed back to the Dark Ages, or even earlier.

In fact, America’s original plan was to drop another atomic bomb in the third week of August, three more in September, and if still needed, another three in October. If this had actually happened I wonder if I would be sitting here pecking on a computer, and would you be sitting there reading?

The Russians were extremely disappointed with Japan’s surrender to the Americans, but now realized they themselves will have to start producing their own atomic bombs, much like the Nazi’s were doing before their defeat, and the deadly game began.

In total, the States dropped 160,800 tons of bombs on Japan; ninety per cent of this was dropped in the last five months of the war. Arms manufacturers made over $4 billion (1945 dollars) from these raids. They had also made another $30 billion on bomber operations in Europe. Overall, they made over $330 billion on World War II and thought, why stop there.

Beginning in 1952, the first generation of atomic bombs, those dropped on Hiroshima and Nagasaki, would evolve into thermonuclear weapons, which were developed for maximum weapon energy yield (the amount of energy released when detonated, expressed in TNT equivalent). Such weapons, also known as hydrogen bombs or H-bombs, can have yields greater than 50 kilotons. In comparison, Little Boy was a gun-type uranium-235 fission gravity bomb, and as already mentioned had a yield of about 16 kilotons or 32 million pounds. Fat Man, an implosion type plutonium-239 fission bomb, and had a yield of about 21 kilotons (42 million lbs). Both of these bombs could just about fit into the back of a full size pick-up truck.

From 1946 to 1958 the States would use the Marshall Island group, in the South Pacific, as their testing laboratory, having no consequence or care for the thousands of Marshall Islanders who lived there. Undoubtedly, because of the Americans continued belief in their exceptionalism which allows them to disregard the health and welfare of all others. The human guinea pigs which the Marshall Islanders became were exposed to horrible and often deadly levels of radiation, and used by the Americans for studying the effects of radiation on human beings. The surviving Islanders would eventually all be re-located to the island of Ebeye, be paid $150 million “for all claims, past, present and future”, and delegated to live in a typical American-style slum there.

Exacerbating what has already been done to the Marshall Islanders, today they also have the unfortunate distinction of being at the forefront of global warming and one of the most affected by climate change. The islands that make up their land are on average only about two meters (six feet) above sea level. Through continuing erosion and imminent rising of the sea level, in fifty years nobody will be living there.

The Islanders continue to speak out against the existence of nuclear weapons, and bring their case to the higher courts. For they know all too well the horrifying risk nuclear weapons pose to human beings. They also continue to, in an ever louder voice, speak out against global warming, because they  know the horrifying risk climate change also poses to human beings.

For twelve years the Americans would detonate 67 nuclear devices in the Marshall Islands, the equivalent of one point five Hiroshima bombs daily, including the detonation of the Castle Bravo device in 1954. The scientists expected a yield of about 4 to 8 megatons from the device, but were thrown back when instead they got 15 megatons (15 million tons), their most powerful test to-date. It was more than one thousand times larger than the bomb dropped on Hiroshima. Hooray?

By the early Sixties their new favorite nuclear weapon of choice would become the B41, the most powerful nuclear bomb ever developed by the United States, with a maximum yield of 25 megatons.

Not to be outdone in the race, in 1961, over the Novaya Zemlya archipelago in the Arctic Sea, north of the Arctic Circle, the Russians detonated their Tsar Bomba device. It is the most powerful nuclear weapon ever detonated, with a yield of 50 megatons (50 million tons) which equals over 2,600 Hiroshima’s.

The Russians had tested their first nuclear device in 1949, and besides the Tsar Bomba device, have detonated another 454 devices since then, affecting thousands of people, and much of the local environment around the test sites.

Today there are nine countries that have successfully detonated nuclear weapons. Five of them, the States, Russia, the United Kingdom, France and China are members of the Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT).  India, Pakistan and Israel are not, while North Korea used to be in the NPT, but withdrew in 2003.

Much of the world’s nuclear arsenals today consist of warheads either in the 400 kiloton range, about 200-270 kg (440-600 lbs) in weight, or the B-series of nuclear bombs, which have yields up to 1.2 megatons. Though only weighing just over a ton (2200 lbs), their yields are seventy-five times more powerful than Little Boy’s. All living things within 7.4 km (4.6 miles) would instantly die in a firestorm.

While the smallest nuclear warheads are about 270mm (10.75 inches) diameter, about 400 mm (15.7 inches) long, and weigh around or 23 kg (50 lbs), with an estimated yield of about 10 tons, able to fit into a suitcase or a large backpack and capable of destroying  two square blocks.

Further to perspective, a conventional bomb that contains ten thousand tons of TNT would have to be the size of a cargo train one hundred cars long, and would be hard to launch, or get up to speed. A ten kiloton nuclear device on the other hand will fit into the back of a pick-up.

Such a device would inflict 500,000 to 2 million deaths if released in a large city, killing by blast, fire and radiation, the effects of which cannot be contained in time or space. Besides the immediate deaths, there would also be millions of radioactive fallout casualties, civil liberties would be withheld, privacy would be non-existent, and the world economy would be affected. We have all already seen such scenarios at movie theatres our whole lives, as if being prepared for such an event.

As already mentioned, some of the B-series nuclear devices prevalent in today’s nuclear arsenals are over one megaton (one million tons). When they detonate they are 30 times brighter than the sun, seeing it as it went off from 43km (27mi) away would instantly burn your eyes out.  At its core a firestorm would explode, sucking in oxygen and air and instantly replacing it with carbon dioxide, methane and carbon monoxide. If the initial blast of fire does not kill you, you will immediately die of heat stroke, asphyxiation and/or gas poisoning. All fuel sources for kilometers around, whether cars, trucks, propane tanks, natural gas-lines, and gas stations would immediately explode. Over 9 km (6 mi) away, the heat wave will melt eyeballs, cause third degree burns and instantly ignite any wood. 64 km (40 mi) away, houses will shake, lighting fixtures will crash to the ground, and windows will all be blown out. There will be nothing left hanging on any walls or from exterior of house. Twelve seconds later the shock wave would remove it all.

As for medical care for the survivors, most injuries will be for 2nd and 3rd degree burns. Any with over 50% of their body burned will be left to die or be killed so that they do not die in pain. Thousands in all directions would be homeless, hungry and dazed, in coma-like states of shock and fear.

You could be half a world away and still be affected. Radiation is like that. When released into the air, it becomes minute moisture droplets, which gets inhaled, washed and blown out to sea and soil, contaminating crops, marine life and fresh drinking water. There is no way to decontaminate exposed people and if exposed to high levels of radiation, the human body immediately develops acute radiation sickness.

In two weeks your hair falls out, hemorrhaging under the skin begins, along with severe nausea and diarrhea, and then eventually dying from bleeding or infection. Men are rendered sterile; while women stop menstruating with spontaneous abortions occurring among those pregnant. Nearly everyone will have shortness of breath.

Children and fetuses are affected the quickest because radiation causes changes or mutations in DNA, which may then go on to cause cancer, especially thyroid, bone cancers and leukemia. The human body can repair DNA changes or damage, but only if the repair process happens faster than the time it takes the damaged or mutated DNA material to replicate. But in children and fetuses, their cells divide at a faster rate. Any babies that are born, most likely will be micro-cephalic, with tiny heads and severe mental disabilities.

In five years there will be a major epidemic of leukemia. Ten years later, solid cancers will begin appearing in all the organs, the lungs, breast, thyroid, brain and bone. Genetic diseases like cystic fibrosis, diabetes, dwarfism and metabolic disorders, along with epidemics of malignancy and random unavoidable genetic mutations, will be passed on for generations.

Back in the arms race, by 1960 the Americans had laid a plan for an all-out strike on the Communist world, and not just the Soviet Union. The Soviets also had such a plan, but their plan was based on their belief that it would be the States that would launch first, so their plan was to counter with everything they had, hell be damned, you nuke me I nuke you. Proving both countries’ governments were equally insane.

A year later, the Soviet leader, Khrushchev proposed sharp mutual reductions in offensive weapons. The just elected Kennedy administration rejected it, and instead began the largest strategic and conventional peace-time military build up in world history. The Cold War began.

Khrushchev continued dialogue for reductions in conventional forces and nuclear arms, but being so out-gunned and with his latest offer rejected, it forced him to deter somehow the further build-up of American nuclear weaponry by placing nuclear weapons in Cuba, which coincidence or not, the States had been planning on invading in a few months. But you know what they say about best laid plans.

In October 1962 Khrushchev offered to withdraw missiles from Cuba, if the States would withdraw their missiles out of Turkey. Though Kennedy was counseled that there was a thirty-five to fifty per cent chance that nuclear war would break out, regardless, he refused the offer, and demanded that the Cuban missiles to be the only ones removed.

The Soviet’s indeed removed their nuclear missiles from Cuba, while the States moved a few more Polaris nuclear submarines into the Mediterranean to replace the few out-dated de-commissioned missiles they had in Turkey. With the crisis over but the cold war to continue, America’s attention was removed from Cuba, and was now being focused on Vietnam.

But Khrushchev continued calling for reductions in nuclear warheads, and in 1963, in gesture, he withdrew forces from East Germany and called on the Americans to reciprocate. Once again the States rejected such an offer. Meanwhile the Russians, who had been invaded and nearly completely destroyed many times over the past hundred years, especially the last forty, became ever the more concerned about America’s buildup of its military and nuclear capabilities, and ever the more paranoid about the fact most of the American’s nuclear arsenal was pointed at them.

As tensions rose, accidents began, and continue to happen, for we are but only humans. A close call happened in 1983 when Russia’s early-warning systems picked up an incoming missile strike from the States. Immediately putting their own nuclear systems on high-alert, the Russians prepared to follow protocol and retaliate with a strike of their own.  Russian Officer Stanislav Petrov disobeyed orders and did not report the warnings, and sure enough what was detected was a blip and false. Though he was officially reprimanded, Petrov disobedience might have saved the world.

In 1995 Russian radar mistook a Norwegian weather rocket for an American nuclear missile. While senior military members advised Russian president Boris Yeltsin to immediately launch a counter-strike, he refused.

Close calls with nuclear weapons in the States include, in January 1961, a B-52 bomber broke up over North Carolina, dropping two nuclear bombs on rural Goldsboro County.  Recently released reports have found that “By the slightest margin of chance, literally the failure of two wires to cross, a nuclear explosion was averted.”

Other accidents include an B-47 that crashed into a nuclear weapons storage facility at Royal Air Force base Lakenheath, in Suffolk, England, a hydrogen bomb accidently dropped over Myrtle Beach, South Carolina and not exploding, and in 2007, a B-52 that flew across the States from coast to coast with six nuclear cruise missiles on board, armed and ready to go, which the pilots and crew did not know they had.

The Stockholm International Peace Research Institute’s (SIPRI) 2011 report estimates that there are over 20,000 nuclear weapons in the world. Ninety-five per cent of these weapons are controlled by the States and Russia. At the height of the Cold War there were 70,000 nuclear weapons in the world. Of these weapons only four countries have actual deployed nuclear warheads, meaning warheads that are already placed on missiles or located on bases, close at hand and always ready to launch.

In 2011, there were about 5,027 missiles, deployed on either land or on a submarine, and ready to fire. The States had 2,150 of them, with about 2,000 kept on high operational alert and ready to fire at a moment’s notice. Russia had 2,427, though it is estimated that five years previous, the Russians had only 25 to 50 per cent of their nuclear warheads actually secured and accounted for, which is sort of scary don’t you think?

By 2013 the number of active nuclear warheads had reduced to about 4,100 from the previously mentioned 5,027, and the total number of nuclear warheads in the world dropped from 20,000+ to about 17,300.

Under the terms of the New Start Agreement, ratified in 2010, the States and Russia are supposed to reduce their nuclear arsenals to 1,550 each, by 2017. The other two countries with deployed nuclear weapons are the United Kingdom with 160 deployed weapons and France with 290 deployed weapons.

Besides their deployed nuclear weapons, the States also has an additional 6,350 weapons for a total of 8,500, Russia has another 8,570 weapons for a total stockpile of 11,000, the UK has an additional 65 warheads for a total of 225, and France has another 10 for a total of 300. China has about 240 weapons, India 90, Pakistan 100, and the Israeli’s, supposedly; wink-wink nudge-nudge, 80 weapons are non-deployed. North Korea is also included though the exact number of weapons is very small, probably under 10.

Yes and to a certain extent, the States and Russia have been very modestly reducing their nuclear arsenals over the past few years, but continue to keep them at a ludicrously high level of overkill. The UK, France, China and Israel meanwhile have held steady with their arsenals, while India and Pakistan are locked in a race for even more weapons. Another nuke me nuke you moment waiting to happen.

After the breakup of the USSR in 1991, Kazakhstan, the last of the Soviet republics to declare independence and become the world’s largest landlocked country by land area, and ninth largest country in the world, also inherited over one thousand nuclear warheads, one hundred and ten ballistic missiles, and the nuclear testing infrastructure at Semipalatinsk. But by 1995 they had returned their entire nuclear arsenal, the fourth largest in the world, back to the Russians and closed down all testing facilities. It is a glaring example, because every other nuclear armed country would not dream, nor be allowed to do such a thing. How could they when nearly all their foreign policies are dictated by the military option and deterrence by force.

Even if the intentions of nuclear armed countries are strictly for nuclear deterrence, and have no ambitions to actually use them, the risk is still there of nuclear conflict by accident, miscalculation or by design. It’s why there are only two universally accepted principles of nuclear power. One is that as long as there are nukes someone will always want one, and two, sometime, somewhere, they will be used.

While many experts agree there are far too many nuclear warheads in the world, some believe that nuclear deterrence can still be achieved with less, say anywhere from 900 to 150 warheads globally, with each warhead, on average, six to eight times more powerful than Little Boy or Fat Man, with some, thousands of times more powerful. Such numbers of warheads are still plenty enough to eradicate us and many other species from the face of the planet, but at least not enough to do it thousands of times.

Meanwhile the Americans, increasingly ill-kept nuclear arsenal alone (7000 weapons), could destroy many earths, many times. Despite this, today the States’ nuclear budget is upwards of $56 billion per year. And in typical fashion, in 2014 president Barack Obama, with one side of his mouth saying he is working on abolishing nuclear weapons, announces plans to spend $1 trillion on the American nuclear arsenal in the next thirty years. Then attends the anniversary of Hiroshima, in Japan. I don’t get it.

Instead of some lunatic who gets possession of a smaller nuclear device and is able to set it off in a city, which would by itself kill tens of thousands and injure many more, what about simply just two countries going at it?

According to a computer simulation of the use of one hundred Hiroshima-size nuclear weapons on cities in South Asia, the smoke and ash from the resulting firestorms would fill the upper atmosphere, blocking sun light for perhaps ten years or more, and lowering temperatures to ice age levels. Rainfall will drop to nearly nil, causing most of the key agricultural areas on the planet to have significantly small windows to grow anything. This in turn would cause what the International Physicians for the Prevention of Nuclear War (IPPNW) estimates will be, at least two billion people starving to death in the years following, more than 25 per cent of the world’s population.

As to immediate deaths, in the last two years of WWII one million people were dying each month, in this simulation; the deaths would be a million a minute. To achieve this, the one hundred weapons used, represents only six one-thousandths of the nuclear weapons that exist today. An all-out nuclear war could end civilization and most life on the planet quite easily. Yet countries spend billions upon billions to have such ability, even though they too would be affected. Why oh why are we such a crazy species?  And so much more chimpanzee like than the Bonobo.

We are so powerful we can destroy all the living things on the planet, which includes us, yet are still not smart or moral enough, to control ourselves. We are already doing it to the climate, to each other, hell why not by nukes too. How deluded and arrogant have we become, as we continue shitting on the planet in which we live.

And though we are often reminded that the table is indeed slanted upwards, the nuclear industry, unequal societies, religious madmen, and human-induced climate change are all about our government’s policies, foreign and domestic, and how they are dealing with it, or as most often the case, not.  This will not change because not enough of us are willing to stand up for what matters to us as humans, we are unable to disrupt our daily routines, and because of the sad fact that only about three or four people out of ten actually vote, on a good day. If it is raining this number often drops even lower.

Besides nuclear warheads, nuclear reactors are also scattered across the globe, many of them insanely built on fault lines, and all just as adept at spewing forth radiation into our midst.

In the Seventies, the nuclear industry and their governmental cronies in the States, dreamed of having at least one thousand nuclear plants spread across the country, including one hundred along California’s earthquake-prone coast, up and running by the year 2000. In reality, as of 2014, there are only one hundred reactors in all the United States, many of which are indeed aging, or already past their expiry date.

The energy engineer, and lawyer, David Freeman, encapsulates the history of the nuclear power industry as, “promoted as too cheap to meter, turned out to be too expensive to use, the road to nuclear proliferation, and the creator of radioactive trash that has no place to go.”

Much like the madness of thinking one needs nuclear weapons to feel safe, nuclear reactors are deemed safe energy, and are supported by many governments. Reactors are similar to nuclear weapons, possibly even worse, because in reality they too are uneconomical, uninsurable, unsafe, unnecessary, unprotect able, either from attack or earthquake, and for most of them, if there was an accident, so many people live in the vicinity of most reactors, there is simply too many people to evacuate everyone.  And no matter the technology, another flaw with nuclear power plants, and weapon systems, is that they are operated by humans. It is why the cartoon character Bart Simpson works at one.

In the early Sixties, the Atomic Energy Commission estimated that if a typical nuclear reactor in America suffered a total meltdown, it would make an area the size of Pennsylvania un-inhabitable. Lo and behold, less than twenty years later, in Pennsylvania, in 1979, one of the Three-Mile Island reactors partially melted down because of a stuck cooling valve. Within two hours the top of the core was exposed and turned into 2760 degree Celsius (5,000 degree F) molten lava, which pooled down onto the 15 cm (6 in) carbon steel floor and began burning its way through. It was nearly half way through when somebody finally noticed and the plant was shut down.

If it had kept going, and burnt through the steel bottom of the reactor, then through the concrete floor of the containment building, it would have hit about a meter (1 yard) of water that the stuck valve had amassed there and would explode, blowing it’s containment dome apart and hurling massive amounts of radioactive contaminants into the atmosphere and surrounding area. Eventually the walls , 15 cm (6 in) of stainless steel would also melt into a lava-like pile which when slumping down and making contact with any remaining water or debris would also explode.

The only option is cement and sand being dumped over the entire area, to somehow keep it contained over its millions of year’s half lives. No matter how well protected, all who do the laying of cement and sand will die.  As to the radiation that got away, nothing can ever be done about that.

To this day the radiation released at Three Mile, and how far it expanded outward is still totally up in the air, as it were. While thousands of Pennsylvania down-winders have tried class-action suits, they have been thwarted each time by federal judges dictating from their benches that not enough radiation had escaped to harm anyone. Many others have taken the millions of hush money the owners of Three Mile Island have discreetly handed out over the years.

A few years after the accident at Three Mile, the state of Pennsylvania rescinded its cancerous tumor registry, saying that there was no evidence of anyone having been killed. Yet many other studies have confirmed heightened infant death rates and excessive cancers among those downwind of Three Mile, even the Pennsylvania Department of Agriculture has confirmed of excessive death, mutation and disease rates among local animals.

In 1986, in the Ukraine, at the Chernobyl power plant, due to power surges in its core, one of the reactors exploded, which set off a nuclear chain reaction, but was cut short by another explosion three seconds later. More than 400 times more radioactive material than Hiroshima began to be dispersed into the atmosphere and surrounding lands. The fallout encompassed more than 100,000 sq km (3861 sq mi), blanketing Belarus, Ukraine and Russia. In all, 40 per cent of Europe, including the British Isles, was contaminated at some level.

The initial blast killed more than fifty people, with over four thousand quickly developing cancers. Overall deaths attributed to Chernobyl’s fallout are estimated to eventually be from 250,000 to 500,000 people according to some reports, and in excess of one million people by others.

The children of course have been the most affected, with some 80 per cent of children born downwind of Chernobyl damaged by birth defects, thyroid cancer, long term heart and respiratory problems, and mental illness. Even today, studies have shown that only one in five children living downwind of Chernobyl can be deemed healthy.

In 2011, three of the six reactors at the Fukushima Daiichi plant in Japan, melted down, including their outer walls, which exposed their fuel rod pools, which are now in constant risk of not being cooled enough. Each reactor core at the plant contains as much radiation as one thousand Hiroshima bombs, with their spent rod pools containing two to ten times more radiation than that. Though the accident was caused by an earthquake that devastated the region, it blatantly exposed the weakness of greed and ego which is the nuclear industry in Japan, and elsewhere.

The place is still so dangerous that even cameras do not last. Cleanup to plant, maybe get fuel rods under control, and try to figure out what to do with the ever growing in number of radioactive cooling water containment tanks, will take an estimated forty to fifty years. The cost of the cleanup is estimated to cost billions upon billions of dollars. Wherever the debris is buried, it will still last millions of years, while the radiation released into the atmosphere will mix with the radiation isotopes already there, from natural sources, Chernobyl, Three Mile, and all the nuclear testing from decades ago, and continue to circulate around the globe. Along with what was released into the air, millions of gallons of highly contaminated water, continues to flow from the crippled reactors, mix with groundwater and stream into the ocean. The latest leak was not noticed for nearly a month and a half.

Three years now and counting, after the disaster at Fukushima, thyroid rates among children affected by the fallout are now forty times normal. Of the 375,000 people who lived nearby and survived the quake, about 200,000 kids have been tested and suffer from pre-cancerous thyroid abnormalities, such as nodules and cysts. The rate is accelerating as time goes on. According to the Radiation and Public Health Project, where only three types of cancer are expected among children, more than 120 childhood cancers have been indicated.

And though over 60 per cent of the Japanese population are opposed to their government re-starting up many of the 48 nuclear reactors shut down in the wake of the disaster, and despite worldwide disapproval and concern over inadequate oversight or safety precautions, the government and the Tokyo Electric Power Company are pushing for a restart.

Meanwhile the radiation plume from Fukushima is now (summer of 2014), finally blowing over North America’s west coast, but both the Canadian and American governments have no interest in any meaningful testing of how much is arriving, especially in the water, so the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution in Woods Hole, Massachusetts, has stepped up with a crowd-funded research project, offering to assist citizens along the coast with monitoring isotopes levels.

To date extremely low trace amounts have been detected, and are well within safety guidelines for drinking water. But as Ken Buesseler of Woods Hole has stated “When you don’t know, people can speculate all kinds of things, so I think it’s important to get measurements, and since the governments aren’t doing it, we thought the public has a large concern we’d ask them help collect and fund the sampling.”

Sadly, no matter how many hundreds of tonnes of radioactive water have been released from Fukushima into the ocean, and to what effects it has on sea life and ourselves, it still pales in comparison to the acidification of the earth’s oceans by the billions of tonnes of carbon dioxide being absorbed by sea water every single day, emphasizing even further our collective ignorance.

In summary, with everything else going on in the world today, including our moral compass’s no longer working, we still have the threat of nuclear annihilation, whether it’s a limited strike between India and Pakistan, a few reactors exploding, or just one nuclear weapon in the hands of terrorists. We have somehow ignored such dangers since the end of the Cold War, but such complacency has not taken away the fact each and every city in the world is still vulnerable to nuclear destruction.

Since the summer of 1945, when the apocalypse became human property with the splitting of the atom, and the full exploitation of extracting fossil fuels began in earnest, we have had our heads in the sand of capitalism, consumerism and ego. Indeed, we have been very well distracted, but with all that life is, who wakes up every morning thinking they will be fried that day. Nuclear annihilation is far too much to contemplate when all the while the fragmentation of human affairs continues within our communities and homes.

But, the nuclear threat still very much exists. As for fossil fuels, the extraction continues, but now from ever more difficult places and using far more destructive means to do so, such as fracking. By way of a vast array of coal mines, oil and natural gas wells, on land at sea, and under the ice, the power of a very small number of big energy companies and energy states like Saudi Arabia, Russia and the United States, now has the capability of leaving human life on this planet in ruins. Especially since the bulk of the energy resources extracted is used up by the world’s military industrial complex, through perpetual war.

Part of me believes that all these issues can be dealt with, not through violence, but by being accountable for our own lives and voting for people who will be your voice. Policy will not change until we the citizens can turn our ideas and opinions into actions. This is where a nation’s true power exists. But then another part of me feels the corporate and military factions have already won even though everyone, including themselves, will lose in the end.

But in truth, history has shown that motivated and disciplined people with a collective grievance against something that is wrong, often times on many levels, are the biggest threat to any government. In Erica Chenoweth and Maria Stephan’s 2011 book, “Why Civil Resistance Works,” they studied 323 specific goal orientated campaigns that have been started by citizens to overthrow either a dictatorship, or an authoritarian regime, throughout the world, and found that nonviolent people-power movements were twice as likely to succeed as violent insurgencies.

If we do not care about our humanity, a changing earth certainly does not, nor do the corporate elite. An exploding nuclear device definitely will not give a care in the world as to our feelings, or where we live, whether it is the best place on earth or not.

Further linked reading,

Union of Concerned Scientists

Nuclear Information and Resource Center

Greenpeace

World Information Service on Energy

Canadian Coalition for Nuclear Responsibility

International Network of Engineers and Scientists for Global Responsibility

06/13/14

Prologue to Plague of Guns – A Dense Essay

The border between Canada and the United States is nearly invisible when compared to the sieve of a steel and concrete wall being built between the States and their southern neighbor Mexico. And though there are many similarities between Canada and the States, there are also just as many differences. For instance, Canadians are clearly distinctive, while Americans have to tell everyone that they are. Canadians are also very aware, thus, cautious and resistant to being assimilated by the Americans. At least that’s what we’d like to think. If others look at Canadians and Americans as being cut from the same cloth, they would be grossly mistaken.

The States seems to be filled with characters written by someone else for their own reality show. Their corporate and government leadership and oligarchy obviously psychotic, much like Canada’s as of late. All so out of whack from reality that many of them actually believe they will come out on top even after the earth’s climate is devastated. They trust that they’ll be able to withstand monster tornados, food shortages, earthquakes, oil spills, or a lack of drinking water, or the insanity of the current gun epidemic. And still make money doing it.

But no matter the shock or what the Americans do and say, we watch them like we watch for a train wreck. And though we still peek through our fingers, their ever increasing immoral societal stench those at the top have created, keeps our noses turned away, but you can still smell it. Not only does it cloak us Canadians, but also people all over the world. They have no idea how ignorant they look on the world stage, nor how much their fear and hopelessness is shining through what is a closing window, which when closed, furious anger will shatter.

Their blatantly obvious psychopathic military industrial complex’s foreign policy has made them simply bullies, creating mortal enemies worldwide, which will last generations, all to keep America safe and secure, and of course creating perpetual profits for the American arms-manufacturers.

Guns in particular, have become a plague upon the planet, especially in the States, to the point of being a flesh-eating disease. And much like some other diseases; obesity, consumerism, perpetual war, incarceration, addiction, and ever growing disaster capitalism, the gun epidemic has become a highly profitable venture to a few, while wounding or killing the rest of us, kind of like cigarettes.Plague Mask

With almost as many guns produced during Obama’s first four years of office than in all eight years of George W. Bush’s administration, such a love and proliferation of guns has brought only blindness to the reality that America’s gun epidemic has also become one of its biggest health crisis, something Obamacare could never cure. And even though over 70 percent of Americans want gun reform and more controls, the right-wing white guys will never let it happen. Indeed, the majority of the population in many democracies, including Canada, have no impact on public policy, economic elites like organized lobbying interest groups do.

With cracks in the fabric of present day society splaying out in all directions at a cheetah’s pace when in pursuit of their next meal, the States has become a country that one could swear is either trying to act out a national suicide attempt, or trying to pull off the largest home grown terrorism operation of all time. Like Jim Jones in Guyana, but on a much grander scale, because the kool-aid has already been greedily gulped back. Much of this has to do with the abundance of guns now available, because when unbridled capitalism, marketing, firearms manufacturers, the Republican right wing and the NRA, along with hundreds of their lawyers, got together in the seventies, the epidemic of gun violence in the States began to ever increase in frequency.

These mad organizations and economic systems which have created the current gun violence epidemic, the differences in gun laws in the States and Canada, and remedies and suggestions will be covered in the Epilogue of this essay. A brief history of Canada and the States before and after, the Second Amendment of the U.S. Constitution was enacted, will be discussed in the middle of this essay, in what I call the Background Check, because how each country was raised has a lot to do with the perceived need to be armed or not today. This Prologue will let the numbers tell more of the story.

What got me shaking my head, lighting up a candle and pulling out the quill and ink in the first place, was finding out that in the United States there now is nearly one gun for every man, woman and child with little or no regulation in how to obtain one. It was a cry and laugh moment. It is insanity.

When speaking of guns I am including handguns, rifles, shotguns and certain assault weapons, which Americans need in case one of the few remaining big-game animals or a lone rabbit bobbed and weaved fast enough that the first twenty rounds missed it. But I’d also like to add that hunting has never been the issue with guns. It’s been what other people do with them and how easily available they are that has been and is the issue.

In my article, Murder by Gun, posted in September, 2011, I cited the gun numbers at the time; 45 million Americans possessed over 200 million firearms, including 66 million handguns. Nearly three years later, with a current population of 317 million, American citizens now own well over 300 million guns, including 115 million handguns. A further half a million guns are bought by Americans every year, and shockingly, only 12 percent of all these guns are registered.

In comparison, the second most armed country in the world is India. Their current population is 1.27 billion, with over 6 million more people added each year, and yet they only possess 45 million guns.  Today there is one gun for every ten people on the planet. If you include the States in the statistics, that changes the ratio to about seven guns for every ten people in the world.

Over 47 percent of households in America own at least one gun, with 20 percent of the population owning a handgun, which many can walk around with at any time, because of course, just in case. National Rifle Association vice-president, spiritual leader to some, and Mad Hatter of the club Wayne LaPierre, refers to ownership of a firearm as morally obligated vigilantism. Vigilantism I suppose against an out of control federal government, whatever the party, or against perceived enemies, which can only be themselves, and their fellow Americans.

But then LaPierre also sees the world as a place: “where there are terrorists and home invaders and drug cartels and car-jackers and knock-out gamers and rapers, haters, campus killers, airport killers, shopping-mall killers, road-rage killers, and killers who scheme to destroy our country with massive storms of violence against our power grids, or vicious waves of chemicals or disease that could collapse the society that sustains us all”, but fails to mention and include the paranoid and psychopathic, which would sum up his breed nicely, as well as his followers. And the fact that all those killers he mentioned are American. While in reality studies show that the gun the American suburban family buys to protect itself and which is kept in the home, is 43 times more likely to kill a household member than to be used in self-defense.

In Canada, with a current population of 35 million, there are about 9.9 million guns, including 1.1 million handguns (a restricted weapon in Canada). Nearly two million Canadians (5.4 percent of the population) currently hold a valid firearms license for almost 7.5 million registered firearms and 350,000 are handguns. Only 15 percent of Canadian households own a long gun, and only 3 percent possessing a handgun. Overall, it works out to about 23 guns per 100 Canadians, while in America, as already noted, there are now basically 100 guns for every 100 Americans.

The American military possesses three million guns, in addition to everything else they have acquired, including the world’s largest nuclear arsenal. They work with an annual budget of $750 billion (20 percent of their country’s federal budget), which is more than the next 16 largest military budgeted countries combined. And though they are not threatened by any nation and are a military without equal, supposedly fighting the war on terror by way of protecting American and corporate economic interests globally, yet totally ignoring the fearful commercial interests, ineffectual politicians and government officials, and the home-grown terrorist, back in the States. And though the States have the most heavily armed populace in the world, their people still live in fear and continue to be the utmost in paranoia and narcissism in one fell swoop.

China has the second highest military budget in the world, spending $119 billion a year, with Russia spending only $59 billion. Canada’s military budget is $20 billion, with the military in possession of 233,949 firearms.

American Law Enforcement who try to keep it together and protect citizens, instead, are faced with two out of every three 911 calls being concerned with addiction and mental illness. This is also the situation in Canada, but in the States the police forces are increasingly being made up of ex-military personnel with skeletons and demons rattling in their own closets as a result of their war experiences. These people possess over one million guns. And much like the country’s military, they exist in perpetual war. In Canada the police forces hold 124,270 firearms.

The States don’t just use their guns to kill each other though; they also produce enough to supply the world. They are the biggest provider of guns globally, selling 70 percent of all guns made. To feed these guns, 14 billion rounds are manufactured worldwide every year, enough bullets to shoot every human on the planet, twice. The States provides 40 percent of them (5.6 billion), or enough bullets to shoot every American 17 times.

Because the States has weak gun laws and few controls regarding access to guns, what an American can buy easily and legally is often just as easily sold illegally to a country like Canada which has more controls. In many States one could buy a handgun every week. Why one person would need perhaps fifty handguns every year is anybody’s guess. But some States have recently “come down hard” and have changed this rule to where a person can only buy one handgun a month. I know. Wow and big deal.

Of the handguns seized in the course of a crime by the Toronto Police in 2010, 70 percent originated in the States and were trafficked illegally to Canada. In Mexico, 68,000 people have died from guns since 2006. Of the guns recovered, over 90 percent were smuggled from the States.

The majority of industrialized countries have some form of gun licensing and registration of firearms, with strict controls on access to assault weapons and handguns. However, only two countries, the United States and Yemen, treat gun ownership as a basic right. The remaining countries view gun ownership as a privilege.

Therein lays America’s problem. In the States nearly every citizen living their life within a society on a planet swirling down the toilet of environmental and moral disaster can get a gun. Furthering the madness, since 1980, forty-four states have passed some form of law that allows gun owners to carry concealed weapons outside their homes for personal protection, while in eighteen States; you can walk around in public with a gun on your hip. So of course it is more often the norm that over half of homicides happen after or during an argument between two people who know each other.


There are believed to be about 30,000+ deaths by gun every year in the States, about 20,000+ by suicide / 10,000+ by homicide, with 2 percent of them being children. Guns currently kill more children than cancer does. Not included in this number are the additional 1,000+ deaths per year from unintentional firearm injuries. In Chicago in 2012 alone, 500 people were murdered by gun. This by itself is more than double Canada’s total gun homicides in any given year of about 200 people, or 0.6 people per 100,000. The States averages about six gun homicides per 100,000.

Since 1960, there have been 1.3 million gun deaths in America. Currently 282 people are shot every day; of these, 32 are murdered, with another 51 committing suicide. Examples for context, in Vietnam from 1955 – 1975, 58,000 American soldiers died. These numbers match the American civilian population that dies by gunshot every two years. In the first seven years of the Iraq debacle, 4,400 US soldiers died, the same number of civilians currently killed by gun in the US every seven weeks.

Sadly, considering the States is perhaps the most economically advanced nation in the world, there have been about two mass shootings every month over the past five years, with Americans 20 times more likely to die of gun violence than those of all other developed nations. As it stands today, one in three Americans knows someone who has been shot. While every year on average, roughly a hundred thousand Americans are killed or wounded by guns.

American males have a 1 in 2,317 chance of being shot at least once in their lives. While the odds of either winning a lottery or dying in a terrorist act in North America, is the same, about 1 in 20+ million. And while one person out of every 100,000 dies by bee sting, at least five people out of every 100,000 will die by gun.

According to the U.S. Department of Justice, there are about 5.4 million violent crimes committed in the United States every year. These include simple/aggravated assaults, robberies, sexual assaults, rapes, and murders.  Of these, about 436,000 or 8 percent were committed by offenders armed with a gun. And though the US homicide rate (per 100,000), committed without guns, is less than twice the Canadian rate. The rate of homicide with guns in the US is six times higher than Canada’s, with American homicides with handguns seven times higher than Canada’s. This pattern can also be seen in robberies without firearms where the rates are comparable for the two countries, yet in the States, of the half a million robberies every year, 36 percent of them are committed with a gun, a rate of 55 per 100,000. In Canada there are about 32,200 robberies each year, with only 14 percent of them involving a firearm, a rate of only 13 per 100,000.

Though the States has higher homicide, aggravated assault and robbery rates than does Canada, Canada has higher rates of motor vehicle thefts, break and entering, and arsons, with both countries sharing the same rates for theft, about 2,300 cases for every 100,000 people.


Another big difference between these societies relates to the issue of privilege versus right. Holding a driver’s licence and owning a gun should be privileges not rights. No one should be allowed to carry or shoot off a gun or drive a car without proving to the public that he or she can safely and responsibly do so.

The States has 679 impaired drivers per 100,000. Canada’s rate is 277 per 100,000. And while drunk-driving fatalities have decreased over the last couple of decades in both countries, in the States they still represent 31 percent of the over 33,000 traffic deaths in the States each year. Today about 10,000 people die in motor vehicle crashes that involve an alcohol-impaired driver, 30 people every day, one death every 48 minutes. This is coincidently, the same number of homicide deaths by gun each year.

Of the 1,200 traffic deaths involving children younger than 14 years, 17 percent were caused by an alcohol-impaired driver. And while 1.4 million Americans are arrested for driving drunk each year, it only represents about 1 percent of the 112 million self-reported episodes of alcohol-impaired driving among adults. The annual cost of alcohol-related crashes, injuries and property damage in the States totals more than $51 billion.

In 2010, of the nearly 300,000 Canadians injured in motor vehicle crashes 2,541 died, and of these fatalities 1,082 were impairment-related. It’s estimated that about 63,800 injuries happen every year due to impairment related crashes in Canada – roughly 175 per day. The annual cost of alcohol-related crashes, injuries and property damage in Canada, is estimated to be about $20 billion.


Much like the alcohol and drug addiction epidemic, from drunk drivers to crack heads, America’s gun epidemic is not a race problem either. Guns offer equal opportunity tragedies, no matter what the mainstream media crows. And though Afro-Americans do indeed account for the vast majority of homicides by gun, a white person is almost six times more likely to be killed by another white person than by a black person. According to FBI homicide data, in 2011 there were more cases of whites killing whites than there were of blacks killing blacks.

Within corporate-mainstream media, gang-related deaths in the States are thought of as an Afro-American problem, while in fact, according to the Bureau of Justice Statistics, for the period of 1980 to 2008, a majority (53.3 percent) of gang homicides were committed by white offenders and the majority of gang homicide victims (56.5 percent) were in fact white. According to statistics from the Justice Department collected from 1980 to 2008, white men are more likely to kill than any other racial group. However in gun related homicides, black men outnumber whites, especially when it comes to drug-related offenses. White men top the list in most of the other categories, showing that they were more likely to kill children, the elderly, family members, and their significant others, and tend to commit more sex-related crimes and gang related crimes, and are more likely to kill at their places of employment, than Afro-Americans. Most gun murders involving Afro-Americans are between men and usually over a drug deal. And despite racial biases, studies show that Afro-Americans are no more likely than whites to use or sell drugs, in fact, Afro-Americans make up only 14 percent of addicted American drug users.

Eighty-three percent of gun deaths by white people are suicides, 14 percent homicides, and two percent accidents, with a white person five times as likely to commit suicide with a gun, as opposed to being shot with a gun. For each Afro-American who uses a gun to commit suicide, five are killed by other people with guns, the gist being that whites are far more likely to shoot themselves, while blacks are far more likely to shoot others.

In Canada, there are approximately 600 suicides by gun each year or 1.79 per 100,000. In the States there are 20,000 suicides by gun each year (6.03 per 100,000) and as previously mentioned, over 80 percent are white males. One can also include the twenty-two American military veterans who are currently taking their own lives with a bullet every month. Men and women who enlist to serve their country, to make a difference, be deployed to another country and culture, which in most cases are people who wish they could be simply left alone, and hope to help, lend a helping hand and give guidance. Unfortunately they try to accomplish this while holding an automatic assault weapon in their hands. After they come back heavy guilt enshrouds their lives, the nearly schizophrenic disconnect from being told you were helping and defending America, but knowing deep down you were not doing either.

Although the number of suicides by gun is double that of homicides by the same means, they tend to be subdued tragedies, very hush-hush affairs, and only whispered about between family and friends, if talked about at all, though a celebrity taking their own life is big news. Suicide is also absent from any discussion of gun policy, instead it is all about murders, especially mass killings. Yet reality dictates that the availability of guns does indeed increase the risk of suicide, because it allows for impulsive suicides that otherwise might not occur. And while 2 percent of Americans do kill themselves every year, heart disease and cancer still accounts for nearly 48 percent of all deaths in the States and in most of the industrialized countries of the world.

Then there are the non-fatal gunshot wounds. For every two firearm deaths, there are five non-fatal firearm injuries. Of the 30,000+ people who die by gun every year, an additional 65,000+ are treated in emergency rooms for non-fatal gun injuries, while over 30 percent of traumatic brain injuries and 15 percent of all spinal cord injuries in America are caused by gunshot wounds. It is estimated that another 24,000+ gun wounds were either superficial or treated privately. Direct medical costs for non-fatal gunshot wounds tops $6 million per day and are the leading source of uninsured hospital stays, of which half are paid by the taxpayer.


There has been much recently in global news, of the escalating wave of mass killings involving guns. In the States from 1982 to 2012, over one thousand people have been killed or injured in 62 mass killings and counting, with this number rising every month, and as of late, nearly every week. One in five who are killed are 12 years of age or younger.

Half of these mass killings happened in the last seven years. Yet over the same time frame, more people died from migraines and accidents than by mass murderers. In fact, three times as many people died from sunstroke. But still, fifteen of the worst mass shootings in the last 50 years among developed countries happened in the States, with Finland in second place. The States is currently three times more violent than most of the developed world, with the most violence taking place in their southern States. But then American society was built upon slavery, genocide, aggressive racism, euro centralism, and exceptionalism, so what would one expect?

According to the FBI, a mass shooting is where at least four people die and is usually at the hands of a lone shooter, who blasts away in a public space, half the time doing so in a school or workplace. Of the past 62 mass murderers, 48 were white and only one was a woman. Average age was 35 years, with the majority having problems in their lives, just like everybody else. Seventy-one of the 143 weapons used were semi-auto handguns, along with 20 assault weapons and 42 weapons which had multiple, high capacity magazines. The vast majority of weapons used in these cases were obtained legally, only twelve were not.

Yet compared to all gun related homicides, mass killings only account for less than 1 percent of all deaths by gun. But the corporate controlled media loves telling the repeated and hyped-up stories about them, as we obediently follow along, enrapt, and inching ever closer into thinking that perhaps we too should buy a gun – you know, just in case. It’s called marketing.

How we treat mass killings via mainstream group-think, is we focus on the shooters’ skin color (mostly white), or their manner of killing, such as gruesome violence, or whether children are involved, or religion, or national identity. Such events are looked at as simply being a bunch of disconnected incidents that can’t be helped and have nothing to do with each other. Besides, mass killings are always done by the lone shooter, a terrorist, or someone mentally ill, thus, the “crazy man.” But you’ve got to wonder, killings or assassinations, especially when most of the victims in mass killings are either Muslims, immigrants (illegal or not), gays, liberals, women, intellectuals, comrades in arms, students or Afro-Americans.

Many of the mass killings over the last couple of years, especially in the States and Europe, were carried out by white men who often are a member of the racist radical right, and who either immediately killed themselves afterwards or surrendered, mugging proudly for the camera – a terrorist claiming to be a patriot, with their acts not thought of as terrorizing anyone, but instead, hate crimes.


The American laws in some States are such that you can be packing while enmeshed in road rage and completely out of control, or dealing with neighbours, especially if they are a different colour, or the kids in the truck next to you whose music is too loud, or simply someone who’s pissed you off and you feel threatened, as you shout-spit in their face, as a matter of fact, I do own the fucking road and what are you going to do about it. Or as is often the case, with gun in hand, they manage their nagging spouse, because for some Americans, it seems to be in their nature that only through violence and threat of force can they communicate with people. They already entertain themselves in such a way.

The right of every individual to possess a gun in the States also allows people who might be depressed about their life or with lack of future opportunities, at least can own a gun. One can also be panicked and armed, confused and armed, dying for your next crack hit and armed, in a jealous rage, or lost in body and soul, and simply overwhelmed with life, but be packing. In reality, the vast majority of deaths by gun are committed by very sane people, who feel weak or threatened or just pissed off with their life, and have the capability and power that they lack, to even up the score by the use of a handgun that can fire off huge numbers of rounds in a heartbeat.

Such a distorted world view, especially in the southern States, is fueled by intense anger and impotence in controlling one’s own life, which leads to, it’s always somebody else’s fault: the fault of the “other.” People are unaware of having been programmed to act in such a way. Chauvinism, cruel retribution, a perverted Christianity, and the celebration of a mythical white Anglo-Saxon history through cinema, have separated these people from reality, with the next destination along their road – American fascism. They’ve become unrepentant of the past and misinterpret the expectations of a privileged society, simply because one is white. They are also scared of the future, and with their ignorance still believe that a white man’s life exists at the center of the universe.

Most of the people defined above don’t look at the gun epidemic as a problem at all; rather their concern is the right to have a gun epidemic. America has become orthodoxy, where they actually believe they are the greatest country, not only presently, but in all of human history. From the git go, American society has viewed itself superior to other classes, races, origins, habits, diets, cultures and political preferences. They are taught to believe in their own subjective superiority. They feel unique and nearly a divine race. I call it arrogance of the ignorant, simple bravado. And it has distracted them from hearing that the toilet has been flushed on their society.

This facet of American society is, unfortunately, the driver behind their country’s gun problem, because beneath it all there’s nothing but fear and helplessness, with hope and love seemingly unattainable anymore. In the countries in the world where there is an ever widening gap between those who have money and the vast majority who do not, such as in the States and Canada, research shows that more begin to suffer health and social problems, lower life expectancy, higher infant mortality rates, more suicides, more murders, imprisonment, teenage births, less trust, obesity, mental illness and drug and alcohol addiction, than other developed countries. If you add in the fact that people have little or no influence over government policy, with most political decisions being made with no thought to the people. And an ever widening social polarization, deep racism, disintegrating family values, hunger, joblessness, and violence, it’s no wonder many Americans believe that to be disarmed means being further disempowered. But whether actually psychopathic, mentally ill, uneducated, ignorant, abused, or just having a bad day, an American can be reassured that they will survive, as long as they are armed. “Having a gun in one’s hand erases human inequality and alters human possibility.”


As mentioned, mass killings are always big news, good for the advertisers who support the media business, and a boon to the cinema and television industries, because they know such things as evil and madness contain the elements of the unintelligible, things which resist explanation. We watch, grimly fascinated, by such events, yet also feeling guilty for it for some reason, perhaps because we ourselves feel the fear and helplessness against such evil and look for an answer based on the killer’s upbringing and psychological history, desperately seeking an explanation on why they choose that victim, when in fact, an explanation may not exist. And at the same time knowing each one of us has such evil within us, and the ability to lose control or exact revenge. It’s all about how it can be controlled, and having the daily discipline to do so. It is hard work, but peace and love have always worked pretty good.

Some look at mass killers as individuals who are simply responding to the world in which they live, revolting against an injustice upon themselves, whether imagined or otherwise. Individuals confused about their identity, yet fatalistic at the same time, believing they are creating their own actions, thus their own destiny. Others believe a mass killer’s violence comes from conspiracy or influence, where the killer’s self is moulded by others, and somehow deemed more meaningful.

Someone, often adolescent, immature and white, who walks into a school or theatre and starts indiscriminately blasting away, has probably done the same thing on video games hundreds of times already. He has, no doubt, since birth seen literally thousands of images of death, killing, and guns on all sizes of screens, fiction or otherwise, and just maybe, had a typically bad childhood where he was abused, beaten and bullied, and though that person might not even have serious mental problems, we must say they do, and say they are serious ones at that.

A 2001 study done by the U.S. National Library of Medicine looked specifically at 34 adolescent mass murderers (under 19 years) between 1958 and 1999. All were male, 70 percent were described as a loner, 61.5 percent had problems with substance abuse, 48 percent had preoccupations with weapons, and 43.5 percent had been victims of bullying. Three out of four did not have a documented psychiatric history of any kind.

In the States, 6 percent of their population suffers from serious mental health illnesses. If one were to include minor mental health disorders, 26 percent of their population or 58 million people have to deal with this form of illness. In fact the leading cause of disability in the States and Canada today, is major depressive disorder. But these people are not all running around shooting people, far from it. But in the States, when they do decide to kill, they are able to kill in greater numbers because they are armed with a gun, which is usually plural.

Dr. Jeffrey Swanson, a professor in psychiatry and behavioral sciences at the Duke University School of Medicine, and one of the leading researchers on mental health and violence says that:

“just because someone has a mental illness and they committed a crime, the illness isn’t necessarily why they did it. Among these people with serious mental illness, the risk factors for committing a violent crime appeared to have more to do with the overall risk factors for violence: being young, male, socially disadvantaged, and involved with substance misuse. But on the face of it, a mass shooting (for example) is the product of a disordered mental process. You don’t have to be a psychiatrist: what normal person would go out and shoot a bunch of strangers?” “People with serious mental illness are 3 to 4 times more likely to be violent than those who aren’t. But the vast majority of people with mental illness are not violent and never will be. Most violence in society is caused by other things. Even if we had a perfect mental health-care system, it won’t solve our gun violence problem. If we were able to magically cure schizophrenia, bipolar disorder and major depression, which would be wonderful, but overall violence, would go down by only about 4 percent. I’ve done these back-of-the envelope calculations. If you were to back out all the risk associated with mental illness that’s contributing to the 300,000 people killed by gunshot wounds in the last ten years, you could probably reduce deaths by about 100,000 people. Ninety-five percent of the reduction would be from suicide. Only 5 percent would be from reducing homicide. Mental illness is a strong risk factor for suicide. It’s not a strong risk factor for homicide.”


When we humans are evil, as many of us can be, I’m sure we tend toward being slightly psychopathic for brief moments, for some it can be ongoing, but such behaviour as murdering a group of one’s fellow citizens is not a mystery so much, because it can be socially explained; it is a reflection of our societies. Bad people in the world doing bad things to others are more often than not, simply products of today’s society, with logic dictating that when guns are prevalent there will be more killing, whether mentally ill, or as in most cases, not.

While the adage, that if everyone was armed it would be a real safe place to raise the kids, is utter bullshit. If every talking, stumbling, imperfect, smarter than we need to be human being surviving today’s quickly changing world were armed, the only thing holding our societies back from a blood bath would be for everyone to trust each other unambiguously, and actually expect everyone to act sensibly, empathic, calm, and in control of their emotions: In other words, pure fantasy.

Meanwhile we believe every mass killing is committed by a crazy person, because it makes us feel better. But if the mass murderer is a young Arab man we deem him a terrorist, while a white extremist bombing a mosque or abortion clinic is a hate crime. One of the murderers of the five hundred killed in Chicago in 2012 is a just a gangster. The distraught father killing his family, he seemed like such a good hard working man his neighbours refrain. An American who joins the military and participates in unspeakable actions overseas, returns with no support from government and is often times trying to cope with serious issues in their head, and prone to shooting themselves once returned home, a hero.

The current gun laws in the States, of course also allow the monsters and psychopaths to be armed, for they have every right to do so, though many of them don’t need to be armed, because they surround themselves with bodyguards and henchmen. In fact, many of them are those manufacturing the guns and passing them out like party favours. And though psychopaths by nature are morally insane, they are usually people who “are intellectually above average and understand the nature and practical consequences of acts that are forbidden by law and society, and although they are often highly intelligent, they are simply unable to accept the moral nature of their choices”.


When we humans were still hunters and gatherers, the ones with psychopathic natures were made to disappear and/or be banished, because often their decisions would, could and did, affect the safety and survival of the group. But ever since we began gathering in villages and towns, the psychopaths took control of the food and water and rose to the top of society. Like the gods they created to control us, we can no longer banish them, lock them all up, or make them disappear, because it would decimate Wall St, Washington D.C., offices in Ottawa, and most of the corporate elite, including many dictators, prime ministers and presidents of the world. Though not all are insane, many are undoubtedly highly psychopathic, if we abide by the definition. I am referring to the true definition and not slang. That “People who are psychopathic prey ruthlessly on others, using charm, deceit, violence or other methods that allow them to get with they want. The symptoms of psychopaths include: lack of a conscience or sense of guilt, lack of empathy, egocentricity, pathological lying, repeated violations of social norms, disregard for the law, shallow emotions, and a history of victimizing others.” It is also not curable, because being psychopathic is not a mental illness.

Though there is no treatment for it, eminent criminal psychology researcher, author, and Order of Canada member, from the University of British Columbia, Dr Robert Hare, stresses that most psychopaths don’t commit murder, but are all social predators, pointing out that, “Much of a psychopath’s behaviour, even the neurobiological patterns we observe, could be because they’re using different strategies to get around the world. These strategies don’t have to involve faulty wiring, just different wiring.”

I bring up the topic of psychopaths within this article on gun violence, not because they are running around shooting everybody in sight because they’re not. Most of them are simply human sharks, moving through their communities, taking what they can from usually the weak and unaware, strictly for their own gratification and egos. And yes many are also at the top of society, who feel and act similarly, with each having their own projects to work on and corporations and governments to run. They operate with greed dictating their methods, no longer worrying about a curtain to shield them from our view, or considering an iota of anyone’s feelings, and are supported by legions of drone-like underlings consisting of lawyers, managers, brokers, bankers, and middle managers.

Two of the worst psychopaths running around today, are the American weapon manufacturers and the National Rifle Association, who have combined to bastardize the Second Amendment of the American Constitution to basically achieve sales targets and ever more vast amounts of cash, which is actually being very American. This is all accomplished because those elected, rather, those who have spent the most money get elected by getting people to vote for them by promising the world. Then when in office they abide by what young bureaucratic whips, party leadership and lobbyists, who have paid the most, tell them what to say and do. What has been produced by such people has created the world’s current gun epidemic. They deal in death for the almighty dollar and nothing else.

In reality, the majority of homicides, whether by gun or not,  arise from arguments, fights, drug deals and domestic disputes, while half of all murders involve a family member or intimate partner. We kill those closest to us. If guns are easily accessible, of course they will be used.

Gun violence is happening around the world, but it should not be so surprising that much of it is happening in totalitarian states disguised as democratic industrialized nations, populated by people who have simply become self-sufficient individuals, who only hang out with others who make similar personal consumer choices. Most are living paycheck to paycheck, if you got one, in a world that has become but a marketplace, which itself is based on fantasy and celebrity culture, with many brainwashed into thinking guns are cool. Many of us are living in communities where the politics are warped, and common sense, morality, and empathy have been lost or significantly undermined. Throughout the population, people are strutting around like it’s all about them, staring deeply into their phones, possessing the personalities of peacocks and attention spans of hummingbirds, maybe even thinking a camera crew is following them around,  This is not the case everywhere of course, but it is spreading as fast as obesity.

All the while climate change continues to affect our only true necessities as human beings, food and water, as our urban infrastructures, social services, education and health care erodes and fall down around us. But we still put on a mask each day and go to work. We are programmed to be proud of what we do, no matter what that may entail. Meanwhile everyone is so overwhelmed with information that they are stupefied, and finding it ever harder to believe what they are told. Underlying all this is what is hidden and ignored, and what is damaging us mentally, the reality that the majority of us are nothing but slaves, with little or no passion, nor love or peace left anymore in what we do; instead many of us are left with nothing but lust and greed for all the things out of our reach. And yes, many of us are depressed in some way, and yes, many of us will experience what could be classed as breakdowns or psychotic breaks from trying to fathom the contradictions that make up our lives where nothing is black and white anymore, just a sickly grey. Into this mixture the States adds insanely vast numbers of guns, colouring the world a far deathlier shade of grey, which inevitably bleeds red.

 

To be continued………

 

 

06/17/13

An Essay on Democratic Dysfunction, the 2013 BC Election, Lack of Voting and Status Quo.

“Bad politicians are sent to government by good people who don’t vote.”
William E. Simon, philanthropist, businessman, and Secretary of Treasury of the US from 1974 to 1977 during the Nixon administration.

“In a democratic government, the right of decision belongs to the majority, but the right of representation belongs to all.”
Ernest Naville, 1865.

victoria legislature

One hundred and forty-two years after John Foster McCreight (1827-1913), an MLA (member of legislature) for Victoria City, was elected British Columbia’s first premier, of its first parliament, Premier Christy Clark and the Liberal Party of BC, which is not affiliated with the federal Liberal party in any way, shape or form, nor the federal Progressive Conservatives, and quite unlike the Provincial Conservative Party, but a little like the old Social Credit party, won BC’s 2013 provincial elections. They rejoice with their hands in the air, goofy soma-like smiles on their faces, yelling the sound-bite, “the people of BC have spoken,” and proud that they now have the mandate to govern as they see fit. While in actual fact not very many British Columbians had actually voted for them.

But for the fourth consecutive time, the popular vote within our current voting system has declared them a majority government, and it’s once again status quo, here we go. It is not so much the idea that not very many people have to vote anymore to achieve such status quo, it’s that unfortunately, here and elsewhere, when using the first-past-the-post system of the Westminster form of government, the majority of the people who do get out and vote don’t count.

Federally it’s just as bad. The current Harper Conservative government are an absolute majority government even though, of those who actually voted, only 39.6% voted for them, which meant over 62% of all eligible voters were pushed aside. The fact is that at all levels of government across Canada the norm is about 30% of the population have the majority of representation in the legislatures, while 70% of Canadians do not. And it’s been going on for quite awhile.

In 1972, in British Columbia, Dave Barrett formed the first BC NDP (New Democratic Party) government with just 39.6% of the vote. In 1991, New Democrat, Mike Harcourt formed government with 40.7% of the vote. In the next election, the NDP under Glen Clark received the majority of seats (39) yet were second in the popular vote, losing 12 seats to the Liberals, under Campbell, who had gained 16 seats with 41.82% of the vote, but only won 36 seats and became the opposition. In 1999, Glen Clark resigned over the “fast ferries” and bribery scandals, and the respected New Democrat Dan Miller, followed by Ujjal Dosanjh, adeptly stepped into the breach as interim leaders and ran the province until the next election in 2001, where the Liberals, again under Campbell, won all but two seats of the then 79 seat legislature, with 57% of all the votes. By 2009 the NDP under Carole James would get back up to 35 seats but still lose to Campbell’s 49 seats.

Since the sixties, the pattern has been that the NDP get about 40-41% of the vote, while the Liberals consistently get about 45% of the vote. There have been only two anomalies, in 1972, where the NDP under Dave Barrett earned 38 seats and in 1991 with the Mike Harcourt led New Democrats, winning 51 seats. The highest per cent age of voters the NDP have ever received was in 1979 with 46% of the vote, but still lost the election, while their lowest was in 2001 where they dropped to 21.65% of the vote.

After the election, Clark jubilantly announced, with that ever effervescent smile and giggle, as if she had just gotten high, “We can now change the future of our country. We can become the economic engine that drives Canada, and for the first time in the history of Confederation, we can step up and punch our weight in this Confederation. We can be the ones who lead this country for the first time in British Columbia’s history and it will be up to us, because British Columbians want that. That is what they voted for. They didn’t vote for perfection, they voted for hope.”

From here on in, I will be bringing up even more numbers, sorry, but we are talking politics here. Problem is once you bring up numbers and percentages, people’s eyes begin to glaze over. I see it all the time and get kidded by my friends when I bring them up. I am told in equal representation that the numbers are confusing me from seeing reality, that the status quo way of doing things, in this case, as to how our electoral process works, is “just the way it is”, and that besides, “it’s all we got.” I don’t buy that and feel such dysfunction is not written in stone, but is merely what’s been advertised as such, because we allow it to happen. With this I am told I’m being un-Canadian. But just like a great picture, numbers can also bring about a thousand words, though I shall not be so well winded. Though I must admit, far too often, my spinnaker is billowing out too forcefully in front of me to back off.

Though the Liberals were re-elected as the “majority government”, their leader, Christy Clark, lost her riding, and is currently not an elected official. In fact and oddly enough she has never been elected by the populace to be premier, but she is BC’s 35th premier, of its 40th parliament, and representing more than 4.6 million British Columbians. Of these, 3.1 million are registered voters, but only 1.6 million of them (54% of eligible voters) made the effort and voted, 706,240 (44.14%) of which voted Liberal, which gave them 49 seats, and a 58% majority of the 85 seat legislature. The NDP were given 34 seats, with 39.7% of the vote, the Green Party had 8.1% of the votes and gained one seat in Oak Bay-Gordon Head riding, and the final seat went to re-elected Independent Vicki Huntington in Delta South, who received 4.8% of the total votes. Interestingly, other than the Green Party’s Andrew Weaver in Oak Bay-Gordon Head, this is exactly how the last election in 2009 ended up.

Born in 1965 in Burnaby BC, Ms Clark attended Simon Fraser University (SFU), the Sorbonne, in France, and the University of Edinburgh in Scotland, never graduating with a degree in anything. She was the MLA for Port Moody-Burnaby Mountain from 1996 to 2005, serving as Deputy Premier under Gordon Campbell in his first term as leader, from 2001 to 2005.

In 2001, as Minister of Education, she introduced changes that proved to be very unpopular, with teachers, parents and the public at large. The changes were challenged by the BC Teachers Federation through the court system, and eventually found to be unconstitutional. In 2002 Clark introduced Bills 27/28 forcing striking teachers back to work, and it would take the BC Supreme Court nine years to arrive at the decision that Clark’s decision to do so was also unconstitutional. During the BC Rail scandal, Clark was deputy premier, and though there were allegations that she participated in the scandal, nothing has been proven or tested in a court of law, and it was deemed that there was no need for a public inquiry.

BC Rail was a BC Crown Corporation and was promised numerous times by the government to never be sold. But after decades of shoddy and somewhat unscrupulous bookkeeping, and the public being told that it was always losing money, it was put up for sale. There were many bidding for the purchase, and the shady bookkeeping spilled over into shady dealings and lobbying. It ended up being sold/ leased for 990 years to CN Rail for $1 billion, though the actual track and other assets such as real estate and a marine division remain in public coffers. Miraculously, since CN Rail took control of the line, it generates profits of about $25 million per year.

In 2003, due to suspected improper conduct and corruption by government officials, including Premier Gordon Campbell, deputy premier Christy Clark, and their advisors, search warrants were brought about and executed on the legislature of BC. Among others, ministerial aides, David Basi and Robert Virk were charged in 2004 with two counts each of Breach of Trust, covering their nefarious behaviour, leaking insider information, and for receiving bribes. The next year Clark resigned her position and left politics to become a radio talk show host, after first trying to run for mayor of Vancouver, but losing to Sam Sullivan in Sept. 2005.

The Basi-Virk trial took six years to get underway. As the trial started in May 2010 a publication ban was put on it and then, the day before the trial was to end in Oct 2010, Basi and Virk both pled guilty to lesser charges and sentenced to two years less a day house arrest, with Basi being fined $75,600. With a straight face and hidden tongue in cheek, Premier Campbell angrily announces that “they’ve (Basi /Virk) spent the last seven years claiming to be innocent when they know they were guilty, costing taxpayers literally millions of dollars, when they knew they were guilty.” He punishes them, by of course not only having to pay his government’s prosecuting fees of $14 million, but also paying Basi and Virk’s $6 million in legal fees too. In Jan 2013, the B.C. Supreme Court dismissed auditor general John Doyle’s application for government documents concerning the paying of Basi and Virk’s fees, because it would be an invasion of solicitor-client privilege. So we will probably never know what really transpired.

At the same time, Mr. Campbell was also feeling the heat and backlash of promising in the previous election that he would not bring about a consumption tax, called the HST (Harmonized Sales Tax), but soon after he was elected he came out and indeed implemented it. He then dismantled the Children’s Commission, which pushed 700 unfinished child-death review cases into a dark closet.

In early 2011, a few months after the Basi/Virk trial ended, Campbell, leader of the BC Liberal Party for 17 years and premier for nine resigned his position. Six months later, in Sept. 2011, it was announced that he would be received into the Order of British Columbia, for “demonstrating the greatest distinction and excellence in a field of endeavour which benefits the people of BC.” The same month he was given the role of Canadian High Commissioner to the United Kingdom, and moved to London, family in tow.

After Campbell announced his resignation, Clark pushes aside her microphone at the radio station and declares that she wants to be leader of the Liberal Party and premier, though at the time not even having a seat in the legislature.

At a Liberal leadership meeting in March 2011, the party membership voted for Ms Clark to be their leader and swore her in. Still needing a seat in government, a by-election was run in ex-premier Campbell’s old riding of Vancouver-Point Grey, and Clark beats New Democrat, David Eby by 595 votes. It’s the first time a governing party had won a by-election in 30 years.

David Eby is a civil rights lawyer, Professor of law at UBC, and a research associate with Canadian Centre for Policy Alternatives. He has also served as president of the Canadian HIV/Aids Legal Network and is the past executive director of the BC Civil Liberties Association. And tit for tat, two years later, in the election just completed, Eby defeated Clark by more than a thousand votes, leaving Clark once again with no seat.

In June 2013, re-elected Liberal MLA, party whip, and millionaire wine-maker, Ben Stewart stepped down so that Clark could possibly be elected in his riding of Westside-Kelowna in an up-coming by-election. Westside-Kelowna is a good location for Clark’s attempt to be elected. Stewart won this year’s election with over 58% of the votes, but the riding, a land of vineyards, retirement communities and a large Native reserve, also had one of the lowest voter turnouts in the province, with just over 40%. So all Clark needs is for two out of every ten eligible voters to vote for her and she’s in. Until such time, she is not permitted to enter the legislature, but oddly enough can still dictate policy, and still receives a paycheck. Because in 2007, all of the MLA’s at the time got together and implemented a new plan for severance pay for those who lose their ridings or retire. Soon after, everyone’s salaries magically increased 29% and their infamous gold-plated pension plans were restored. Five years later, amidst a recall vote over the HST mess, in 2012, the MLA’s at the time secretly met once again, and voted to extend the severance to also include any member who happens to be recalled for dubious behaviour.

Update: July 10th, 2013. Ms Clark wins by-election in Westside-Kelowna. With 46,000 voters eligible to vote, only 17,012 (37%) made the effort. Clark recieved 10,666 votes, 62% of those who voted, but only 23% of all registered voters (less than one in four of eligible voters). Great for Clark and the Liberals, not so much for democracy.

Eligible MLA’s receive their $101,859 base annual salary ($6,790 per month) for 15 months, while they look for other work. With Clark losing her seat, the transitional allowance automatically kicked in, but three weeks after the fact, she announced that she will pay back what has been paid to her since that time. Meanwhile she continues to be paid a $91,673 annual salary that comes with being the premier. Perhaps this is another reason she’s smiling all the time and so bubbly.

Two incumbents in the past election, New Democrats, Joe Trasolini and Gwen O’Mahoney, were on the job only 13 months and were defeated in their ridings, but both are eligible to continue receiving their hundred plus grand salaries for the next 15 months. As to just regular folk working as government employees, when their jobs are terminated they receive four weeks’ severance for every four years worked.

Of the three other major parties, the leader of the BC Conservatives, John Cummings was defeated in his riding of Langley, while the leader of the BC Green Party, Jane Verk, was defeated in New Democrat Carole James’ riding of Victoria-Beacon Hill. Currently the only party leader to actually hold a seat in the legislature is the NDP’s Adrian Dix, because enough people actually voted for him.

Mr. Dix was re-elected MLA for Vancouver/Kingsway, getting 57% of the votes in his riding. He has been the riding’s MLA since 2005. As a thirty-five year old, chief of staff to Premier Glen Clark from 1996-1999, he was dismissed for back-dating a memo, and went on to become a political commentator until 2005, when he first ran in Vancouver/Kingsway. Though not necessarily possessing much charisma, or a Clark smile, it’s been said he is deadpan funny man and thinks before he speaks. Fluently bilingual, having lived in France, Dix is afflicted with type-1 diabetes, and was born and raised in Vancouver. Married to a poet and writer, he studied history and political science at the University of British Columbia. He ran for the leadership of the NDP party in 2011 on a platform of rolling back reductions in the corporate tax rate, supporting the redirection of carbon tax revenue to pay for public transit and infrastructure that reduces greenhouse gas emissions, supporting an increase in the minimum wage rate, creating a provincial child care system, restoring grants to post-secondary students, reducing interest on student loans, and restoring the corporation capital tax on financial institutions.

A week after the election he addressed the media for the first time, admitting that he and his party simply did not do their jobs well enough, especially when it came to holding the Liberals accountable for the flaws in there definition of policy, and for taking the “high road” and not calling the Liberals on their attack ads and smear campaign. He promised a comprehensive review, stating “I can assure you this review will spare nothing and no one, least of all me.” Saying he is but a servant of his party’s caucus and members, he hopes the party will learn the lessons before them. Staying on as party leader until the mandatory leadership review in November allows his party to decide the future and direction in which they feel they should go.

Overall the BC election was of the vein of judging candidates by their charisma, personal charm, and personality, instead of the issues in our lives. Liberals were allowed to advertise any way they liked, even if much of it flew in the face of truth or reality. The NDP didn’t question or respond to the Liberals advertising, no matter how low they went, which in the end might have been what would have made a difference. The Liberals went with the “Strong economy. Secure future” as in securing their place as a party associated with business, capitalism, status, success, and wealth, no matter how much a pipe dream it has become, with climate change and the planet’s environmental crisis, never entering the picture.

For the most part the election campaign played out like a really bad reality show and often seemed surreal. It’s like you see their lips moving but just can’t pickup what they are saying, though you do notice their smile and what they are wearing and feel you know them because you have watched multiple times, the ads they produced and acted in. Learning about the candidates and not the issues, in ten second sound bites and then on game day, not even bothering to vote.

This is the problem with politics in most developed and supposedly democratic societies. As Bill Durodie, the program head of Conflict Analysis and Management Programs at Royal Roads University’s School of Peace and Conflict Management, has said, in many of these countries, especially at the local, municipal, and provincial/state levels, “none of the major parties could even manage 10 per cent of the available votes, and end up effectively representing nobody but themselves.” He believes society has become disengaged from politics, which we have, and that the fundamental problem for modern politics is that, “there are few with any resolute and identifiable principles anymore, either among the parties or the voters.” All over the developed world, the people that do vote do so based on their feelings about the candidate and their party and what is reported about them, with “image and style trumping insight and substance at every turn.”

As mentioned earlier, in this election 54% (1.6 million) of eligible voters made it their duty to vote and be engaged. Nearly one and a half  million others decided to sit this one out, meaning only 54 of every 100 eligible voters actually did so. Out of these 54 citizens, not even 24 of them voted Liberal. In all, 706,240 people voted Liberal, only 22% of all eligible voters, or about 6% of the population.  Breaking it down even further to make it more Orwellian, less than three out of ten eligible voters voted for the current majority government. Winning a popular vote with two out of ten people voting for you seems more like a dictatorship than a democracy. But once again, status quo, don’t you know. Interestingly enough, status quo comes from the Latin phrase “in stat quo res errant ante bellum”, “in the state in which things were before the war.”

Geographically, the interior and North East areas of BC, where the dams are built, the jobs are, where the pipelines hopeBCMapto run, the fracking for natural gas continues, and the fresh water supply becomes ever more toxic, voted Liberal. As to the 59% of BC’s population who live in the Lower mainland, Downtown Vancouver, East Vancouver, New Westminster and Vancouver’s eastern suburbs voted BC NDP, with the Fraser Valley, Richmond and parts of Delta all voting Liberal. Vancouver Island and BC’s coastline ridings were overwhelmingly, either NDP or the Green Party, except for the Comox Valley and Parksville-Qualicum, who voted for Liberal candidates.

On Vancouver Island, where 16% of the population of BC live, there are 14 ridings, eleven went NDP, including ex-premier Carole James, in her riding of Victoria-Beacon Hill, two went Liberal, and one went Green. With a population of 344,630, Greater Victoria and its city, Victoria, the capital of British Columbia and where the legislature sits, will not have a voice at the government caucus table for the first time in 60 years. But then even in the upper chamber of the Federal government, in the appointed and not elected Senate, there is no one representing the 750,000 people of Vancouver Island, yet comparatively, Prince Edward Island has 145,000 people and four senators. New Brunswick has the same population as Vancouver Island and has 10 senators.

As to the exact goings-ons of our latest attempt for democracy in BC and how it all went down per individual ridings, those who gathered the most votes in their ridings include Liberal Stephanie Cadieux, in one of the largest ridings, Surrey-Cloverdale, with 59.46% (18,000) of the votes from a total of 51,000 registered voters, second was Liberal Rich Coleman, Fort Langley- Aldergrove, with 15,989 votes, and third with most votes, was Liberal Ralph Sutton, in West Vancouver-Capilano, with 15,777 votes.

As to the largest share of the votes in a riding, the just mentioned, Ralph Sutton was at the top with 67.03%, but was followed closely by NDP Jenny Kwan, with 64.32% of the votes in her riding, Liberal Andrew Wilkinson in Vancouver-Quilchena with 64.32%, NDP Katrine Conroy in Kootenay West with 63.04%, Liberal Bill Bennett in Kootenay East with 63.01 %, and NDP Bruce Ralston of Surrey-Whalley with 61.43%. Those close to 60% were NDP Shane Simpson of Vancouver-Hastings (59.46%) and Liberal Stephanie Cadieux Surrey-Cloverdale (59.46%). Interesting about the Kootenays, Kootenay West had the fourth largest share of votes in a riding and went NDP, while the fifth largest share of votes happened in Kootenay East, and went Liberal.

All parties picked up more votes than in the election in 2009. The BC Conservatives led, picking up 51,332 more votes, to go from 2% of the votes in 2009 to 4.8%, Liberals received 44,285 more votes, but dropped from 45.8% of the total votes in 2009 down to 44.1% this year. The NDP received 24,435 more votes, but dropped to 39.7% this year, and the Green Party had 11,991 more votes than they did in 2009, but went from 8.2% of the votes to 8.1%.

The top two ridings for voter participation were ridings where there was a strong Green candidate running. Most fully engaged was Oak Bay- Gordon Head with 71% voter turnout and where Green candidate, Andrew Weaver, was elected as MLA.

Mr. Weaver is one of Canada’s top scientists and is a Fellow of the American Meteorological Society, the Royal Society of Canada and a member of the Order of British Columbia. He holds the Canada Research Chair in Climate Modelling and Analysis at the University of Victoria. In 2007, Weaver was a contributing member of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change, and who, along with former US vice president Al Gore and others were awarded the Nobel Peace Prize. Now deputy leader of Canada’s Green Party, since Jane Sterk was unable to land a seat, he and Green Party leader, MP (Member of Parliament) Ms Elizabeth May, are Canada’s only Green Party elected representatives.

Ms May, executive director of the Sierra Club of Canada from 1989 to 2006, was elected in 2011 in the Saanich-Gulf Islands riding, as MP. She is a respected environmentalist, writer, activist, and lawyer. Her permanent residence is in her riding, the town of Sidney, just up the road a bit from Oak Bay-Gordon Head. She was recently voted “Hardest Working MP” and “Best Constituency MP” by fellow members of the Federal government, which makes sense considering that though she alone sits representing her party, she seems to make more of a difference with her time in parliament than most all of the silenced backbenchers combined, especially the Conservatives. Being open and transparent, having moral rectitude, a backbone, character, and thinking before speaking in a language a non-politician can actually understand, goes a long way it seems.

Second best voter turnout was in Saanich North and the Islands with 70.02% of eligible voters making the effort. It was a very close race, with all three candidates picking up over 10,000 votes each, with the margin between first and third only 379 votes, and was between NDP, Liberal, and Green. New Democrat Gary Holman was awarded the seat.

Third in turnout was in Delta South, where independent Vicki Huntington won re-election with a 69.03% turnout. Of the top five highest turnouts, four were on Vancouver Island.

Meanwhile many of the largest populated ridings had the lowest voter turnout. And I’m just saying, but it could be because of language barriers and cultural differences. Worst voter turnout, at 43%, was Richmond Center, followed by Surrey-Whalley, Richmond-East, Kelowna-Lake Country, Burnaby-Deer Lake, Vancouver-Kingsway, Burnaby-Edmonds, and Westside-Kelowna, all having well below 50% turnout. Hovering at 50-51% voter turnout were Vancouver-Mount Pleasant, Vancouver-False Creek and Vancouver-West End.

The Liberal’s list of promises during the election was lengthy and was never questioned enough, especially by the NDP. Most of the promises were based on the assumption, and myth, that capitalism and unlimited growth work will win the day. Her party’s platform is based on increasing natural resource development, especially liquefied natural gas (LNG), and holding the line on taxes, by not expanding the carbon tax, or instituting a capital tax on financial institutions. She also promised a five-year freeze on personal income tax, with the exception of the highest income earners, a $250- per child back-to-school tax credit for parents, a $500 tax credit for teachers who coach, dropping the small business tax from 2.5% to 1.5% as of 2017, dropping the corporate tax rate down to 10% by 2018, training more doctors, increasing hospice spaces, expanding the BC Training Tax Credit, opening a BC film office in L.A California, and to conduct annual forest industry trade missions to Asia.

After the Liberals won, Clark stated that her economy driven mandate will only work if her MLA’s start saying “no a lot more than they say yes.” She has promised economic security based on new jobs, infrastructure, investment and royalties. To build the province’s “new economy” the Liberals are banking on the LNG industry, and the revenues from which they say will pay down BC’s debt within 15 years.

The day after becoming an MLA, someone who knows a bit about the world’s natural resources, Green Party’s Andrew Weaver, declared that the current predictions of provincial revenues from natural gas are a “fantasy” and it makes no sense to invest in the expansion of natural gas with the intention to sell to Asian markets, because Russia, which has 20 times the natural gas resources of Canada, has just recently signed long term export agreements with China and other Asian countries.

There are of course plenty of other Asian markets that are perfectly willing to buy up all of our limited natural resources. Though the question remains, what happens to us when the resource is gone, forever, in 20 to 30 years? But then look at BC’s forestry business, where instead of more wood products, such as furniture or lumber that a British Columbian could actually afford, and not have to buy plywood from North Carolina or some other place instead because it’s cheaper, no, we chop down our trees, take off the limbs and send the whole log overseas.

Though I’ve got to hand it to Clark, after being elected, she did declare opposition to the proposed Enbridge oilsands crude pipeline, that would run 1600 km across BC, pumping 550,000 barrels per day to Kitimat, on the coast, then perilously make its way by tanker to open water and beeline for China. A parallel pipeline would run back to Alberta, carrying imported diluents, a flammable liquid mixture of hydrocarbons, which will help the heavy sludge of oilsands crude flow along the pipeline. Clark declared there are simply too many unanswered questions about how Enbridge will respond to a spill. Though she also left the door open to see what Enbridge’s response will be to her opposition. Which is very noble and all, especially considering most British Columbians do not want the pipeline. But in reality, whether a pipeline is built or not in BC is not up to us, it’s up to the Harper Federal government. Clark and the Liberals gave up the right to have more influence in the matter over a year ago. In spite, I suppose Alberta could now decide to start charging BC for it’s already in place LNG pipelines, running from Northern BC across Alberta to the United States.

The centerpiece of the Liberal’s platform is debt reduction, and they have promised to dedicate half of future surpluses to it, enact more balanced budget legislation, and include penalties for ministers who do not meet their budget targets. But no matter what is promised as to balancing the budget or not, or controlling spending or not, the reality is that in most industrialized and democratic societies, the amount of debt and spending is over the top, and there is nothing more corrosive to the future of any economy if debt continues to accumulate through a succession of operating deficits. And as in most other industrialized countries, whether at the federal or local level, government is creating huge debt, and will continue to do so because they have all become so concerned and preoccupied with salaries, pensions and perks, instead of infrastructure and the needs of the people.

Over the past ten years, if you factor in both operating expenses and capital spending on schools and infrastructure, the BC Liberals have over spent $14 billion, bringing BC’s total accumulated operating and capital debt over the past fifty years to nearly $40 billion, or $8,300 per British Columbian, and which has been determined to have a 54% chance of defaulting within 30 years. Our current overall debt is more than $62 billion. Interest charges alone are about $1.9 billion per year, more than the entire budget for the Ministry of Children and Family Development. But Clark promises balanced budgets in each of the next three years. Great idea, except it will mean borrowing another $3.5 billion to do so.

Clark would later announce straight-faced, that the government’s budget will also be based on three themes, “giving children more opportunities than we had, caring for those who cared for us and leaving BC as beautiful as we found it.” Oxymoron doesn’t even get close to explaining this comment.

But then our economy is mostly determined by what happens elsewhere in the world anyways, no matter what three year plan the Liberals have, because nothing in government is long term. As we all know their wheel is geared to run for about three years then switch and spend the final year campaigning.

In the very near future, the economic reality for Canada and the world will have everything to do with the emerging countries in Asia, Africa and Latin America, who today combined, represent a third of the world’s economy. The Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD), the international body which promotes policies that they feel will improve the economic and social well being around the world, estimates that in seven years, in 2020, these countries will be the second biggest driving force of the world’s economy.

Capitalistic democratic countries such as Canada, the United States and those in Europe, operate with such short term focus because they judge time quarterly, perhaps proving that the concept of living for the moment is actually something really irrational. Government is now big business, unfortunately it’s not run by business people, but by lawyers and bureaucrats, and without the profit part. They are also forgetting that life is about people and with continuing high unemployment and growing income equalities; you’d think they would worry about that. But then, heck, they even ignore the fact that the Earth is but one planet.

And yes, of course economic development is important, but it must also mean sustainable development that respects the wishes of all those who live there, and the environment in which they live in. With most of voters in the most recent election voting for either the New Democrats or the Greens, this obviously shows that the majority of people in BC want investment and jobs that produce clean energy. But if the goal is not to reverse the destruction of the earth’s ecosystems, all else, including life, becomes moot.

The only thing decided in the 2013 BC election was that we will be maintaining things as they were, with a few deciding its status quo for everybody. Just like most all levels of government in Canada, where we are ruled most often by simple reactionary governments run by despots, who possess far too much power for anyone’s good. Just like the Romans, you would have thought we had learned that lesson and gotten past it, silly us. Leaders who have their own mandates, and who keep their members in check and obedient by the unelected party whips, by being told how to vote, what questions to ask, and how to beg and bark like a dog. Their governments far too often, will only consider action on just about anything until the corporations, financial institutions or foreign interests, whom already own too much of Canada’s resources, say so.

The BC Liberals will continue to protect the existing systems of power and the future of the economy, they will promise accountability and sustainability and truly believe that capitalism’s economics will win over good sense and foresight when it comes to coping with any problems along the way, arrogantly believing that the ability of engineering and technology will save the day. Much like the thinking of CEO Rex Tillerson at Exxon-Mobil’s 2013 annual general meeting, “What good is it to save the planet if humanity suffers?” obviously not aware whatsoever that a simple share dividend or larger market share, doesn’t mean anything, if it has no planet to survive on.

In reality the continuously expanding bubble is actually beginning to hiss and becoming a permanent contraction. The essential resources for economic expansion and survival, that are abundant, accessible and safe to obtain, are nearly all gone. Our government knows this, but will never admit it. But then we don’t want to admit it to ourselves either it would seem. For many it’s far too much to handle, we are overwhelmed. And is undoubtedly one of the main reasons of low voter turnout, and for the acceptance of our current voting system as “oh well that’s just the way things are.” More like it’s just the way the government likes it. There are alternatives of course, there always are.

More than 33 countries worldwide use the Westminster form of government. This democratic parliamentary system of government is where there is an executive branch which derives its democratic legitimacy from, and held accountable to, the legislature/parliament. Amongst these countries there are at least four different voting systems used.

In 2005, and recommended by the BC Citizens’ Assembly on Electoral Reform, 57% of British Columbian voters, voted to get rid of our current first-past-the-post (FPTP) system and replace it with the proportional voting system, the single transferable vote (STV). However, just before the final vote was to be taken, the majority government, who were elected as such with only 45% of the votes, and somehow gained 97% of the seats in the legislature, declared that a 60% minimum threshold was needed, so the idea was rejected. Another vote for STV was taken in 2009, and was nothing but a misinformation campaign, using words, numbers and grammar improperly and making it perhaps too complicated in its description for most people, and there was mass confusion, especially for non-English speaking citizens. It also failed.

Operating a first-past-the-post system, with just one winner in each riding means half of voters don’t actually elect anyone. In the 2011 Federal election seven million votes elected no one. In the 2008 Federal election nearly one million people voted Green, yet no one was elected, while in Alberta alone, about 700,000 voters allowed Harper’s Conservatives to gain 27 seats in parliament. In the Prairies, the Conservatives received nearly twice as many votes as Liberal and NDP combined, but somehow took seven times as many seats. In fact, that same year, more Canadians voted in the finals of the Canadian Idol TV program, than had in the election.

Thus our provincial and federal governments have no idea what the majority of Canadians need and want, nor who we are, especially with them also getting rid of the long-form census. Sadly, even if more people voted using our current voting system, it would still not create fair representation of the majority of the people.

Comparatively, in 2011, in Ireland, and using the STV system, only 18% of those who voted did not have a candidate that won. The same year in New Zealand, and also using the STV, only 3% voted for losers.

The STV system works with voters in combined local districts getting to elect anywhere from five to seven representatives instead of just one. On each ballet is listed all the individual politicians, from all parties, of that local area. A voter then lists these candidates by order of preference, 1st choice, 2nd, and so on. If your first choice doesn’t have enough votes to be elected and sure to lose, your vote is then transferred to your 2nd choice, and so on. Similarly, if your first choice has more than enough votes to win, your vote is transferred to your next favorite candidate, and so on. Each vote ends up where it’s most needed to get the group of representatives most wanted. No vote is wasted on a candidate that has no hope in being elected, and with every vote having an equal impact on the outcome, one can vote their conscience. All results would be totally proportional. The best person that represents the needs of the community is chosen, not the person who best represents their party. The legislature and parliament would represent nearly everyone, which is called a democracy.

Such proportional representation, awarding seats in the legislature on the percentage of votes received, equals fair representation. Over 80 countries use elements of proportionality in their voting systems. Australia has used such a system since 1918, and is used at all levels of government, including their senate. No candidate can win if they do not have a true majority of over 51% of the vote, and there cannot be a majority government with less than 51% of the vote. Compulsory voting was enacted in 1924, and began with an average of 95% of registered voters doing so. If one fails to vote and is not able to provide a reasonable explanation for not voting, they are fined $20. But like elsewhere, Australia has been seeing a drop in the numbers of those who vote. In the past few elections, some municipality’s votes are down to 80-85 %, which is still far better than Canada’s (50%) ,which ranks among the lowest in voter turnout in all the industrialized countries of the world. In contrast and besides Australia, Belgium and Denmark have 80% of the voters showing up.

According to Fair Vote Canada, if the proportional STV system, based on fair representation, was used in the 2013 BC election, the vote would have been 41 Liberal seats, 33 NDP, six Greens, and four Conservatives, instead of its outcome of 49 seats for the Liberals, 34 for the NDP, one Green, one Independent, and zero Conservatives.

Online voting, meanwhile, is a good idea because we’d then be able to be more informed, as an uninformed choice is not a choice at all, and we’d be able to vote on other issues as well, instead of just once every three to four years. But voting should never be taken for granted nor should it simply become an inconvenience, where in-between tweeting and texting friends every four to five minutes, answering e-mails, or playing with you new phone app, you have to take a second to vote, just to get it over with. Voting should be both, a right to fair representation and a duty to participate.

But whether proportional voting, first-to-the-post, online and/or mandatory, they are all simply systems trying to deal with the same problem, which is not enough people vote to properly determine our futures. Standing by and allowing a very few to make the decisions for us, and tell us what road we will travel, and how we are to behave is so bovine. If only but a few of us vote, the people elected, whether ruling or opposition, go to government and vote according to their party and their ideology, and not to the wishes of the constituents, who really, don’t number that many anyway. They decide what the interest of the people shall be. If this is the case, it is not a democracy but a republic.

It seems that British Columbians will occasionally, about every ten years or so, get riled up enough to go to the polls and hope for change or salvation. Unfortunately this is not the place where such things reside anymore. Another reason so few vote anymore is because we are busy in our own lives and place in society and have realized that voting doesn’t change anything, especially when over 70% of the population’s votes don’t mean anything when they do. We have become alienated and disaffected from the whole political process.

It also doesn’t help that the country to the south of us is so dysfunctional and spiralling down a toilet, and that whenever they speak, especially if it’s a Republican senator, it is filled with contradiction and ignorance, and everyone looks at each other, asking, did they just say that in their out-loud voice. They feel they can run around and try to control the world when they can’t even control themselves, while in reality they are controlled by an “intelligence community” and Wall Street. They make democracy something obscene; with the way their citizens have given up their rights and freedoms in order to feel secure and safe, but unemployed, dissatisfied with life, violent-prone, fat and hungry.

If we continue to become disengaged within our own communities, how on earth are we to become engaged in politics, when it has simply become another reality show, with really bad actors, using the same old script?

Integrity and character has been replaced with entitlement and personality, with too many politicians possessing the charisma of street walkers and used car salesmen, but unlike such working citizens, believing they are not accountable at all, and are so very far out of touch. They are often having difficulties with their expenses, which any politician has a right to claim, but they instead ignore the obligation of disclosure to whom pays the bills, which is we the people, and through it all, a never ending stream of scandal, with one abuse of privilege after another.

Consider those who vote the least, 18 to 24 year olds. Less than a third of them vote, while in 1980, two-thirds of the same age group voted. The difference is that today any expectations for “participation, self-realization and control over their lives” cannot be gained through our current electoral machine. Many see that besides the erosion of democracy, the basics of society, such as freedom of the press, having a system that is not corrupt, the right to peaceful protest, and having a rule of law which is the same for everybody, are being undermined, and they understand that ultimately elections do not usually affect such things.

We have become either not interested, too busy, or simply don’t care to vote anymore, by not being informed rationally or honestly, thus not being motivated to vote. This is good for the one party who operates within a system where, once again, as long as they get 2 or 3 people out of 10 to vote for them, they’re in. We’ve become disgusted with a politician’s behaviour, lack of scruples and integrity, sociopathic tendencies and sense of self entitlement. A sense of powerlessness pervades over us, but is kept at bay with a status quo of style over substance.

In BC and Canada, and other than the couple of Green members and a few independents, the leaders of both the ruling and opposition governments and their ministers, chiefs of staff and party whips, nearly every other MLA or MP backbencher, sit back like trained seals, occasionally roaring out “hear hear”, stomping their feet or pounding their desks. Their sense of entitlement gained from a, “set for life pension”, excellent pay and all the most lavish of perks, is actually the near rotten fish tossed their way, which they have eagerly gulped back.

The elite of the world and the governments they control are simply out of control. And really don’t care if the great curtain of Oz is lying on the floor like a dirty rag. Far too often the stench of blatant corruption, immorality, greed and a total lack of empathy permeate everything they do, say and touch.

In Canada the government mimes other capitalistic democracies by slashing guidelines for corporate behaviour, removing any accountability that they might have, and are ever more controlled by corporate lobbyists to micromanage the provinces and country. They would also like to privatize everything as soon as possible, which is not a bad thing, except the fact the privatizing is going to foreign interests. As to public service, it is becoming both private and secret.

Frustration reigns supreme above all else because the economic standing that a large lower-middle class, and working class once had has been slowly erased over the past thirty years. At the same time “the wealth and income derived from labor, which is how we citizens pay our way, has been transferred to capital, while the growth of productivity doesn’t translate into wage gains anymore”, because it’s usually transferred overseas.

Further frustration comes from the myriad of contradictions in government spending, such as, in BC, each MLA receives $19,000 a year for accommodation in Victoria when the legislature meets. Over the past few years, on average, they gather together about 40 days a year. Staying in a nice place on the inner harbour for 40 nights, using the “government rate”, costs about $8,000. Meanwhile a British Columbian living on disability income is expected to find accommodation with $4,500 per year; or that the chiefs of staffs and some MLAs are making upwards of $10,000 a month, while the majority of the province are trying to make do with $28,000 a year; or that BC has the lowest corporate tax rates in Canada, as well as having, for over ten years now, the highest child-poverty rate in Canada. In reality there is really no poverty per se, in any democratic country, just poor distribution of the wealth.

Our current democratic dysfunction is affecting the pulse of our collective consciousness. Instead of meaning and purpose it’s leaving us awash in a feeling of emptiness and unease. The distractions put in our faces are gladly taken, but deep down we are longing for change and reform. The distractions paralyze us to act for the now, not even wanting to think about the future. The only two roads being offered are either just sucking it up, turning ourselves off and pretending that everything’s okay, or standing up and acting. Unfortunately standing up and being heard can bring much to bear against you, too much than most people are willing to absorb and pay for, especially if it disrupts their daily lives or takes away any of their stuff. It’s why there is a lack of leadership in the world today. For anyone who is truly righteous and who stands up for others, we have a tendency as a society to marginalize, ostracize, defame and/or assassinate them, before they do too much damage to the status quo. And we must especially remember that whenever the word revolution is bandied about, there must be a very concise and exacting explanation for what that means.

Because our corporate governments are mostly being driven by capitalistic greed, the powers that be and who control them, will never allow their power to wane. Indeed many of the largest controlling institutions are, as they say, too big to fail. But capitalism gets away with its growing violence to both the environment and the fabric of our societies, much like the Bible got away with its extreme violence, degradation of women, and declaration that the planet’s resources are god given and meant to be used up as it see fit, because most times governments back it up, through repression of their people.

Far too many of us actually believe we can successfully, psychologically ignore and deny the planet is changing. Where escalating heat waves, droughts, floods and destructive mega storms have simply become natural events, and we are more mesmerized by the latest fashion or phone app. But it has been proven that messages based on fear, such as climate change, can cause people to feel dis-empowered and less likely to take action at all. That is why governments always promote a fear of something, whether it’s the Huns, Nazis, Communists, terrorists, crime, drugs or other religions and races.

Those who have just given up, have not only given up on themselves, but have also damned their children and their grandchildren as well. We have raised the standards of living so high over the past fifty years, and so gorged on the earth’s limited resources that future generations have no hope in hell of living in similar high fashion.

There is also the train of thought that there is such low voter turnout here in Canada, and elsewhere, because it’s a sign our political system is stable and that nobody votes because we are all relatively happy with our government; that life isn’t so bad and people do not see much significance in what the government is doing, and as long as we can continue to cheaply fill our gas tanks, we’re good to go.

The only problem with people today going merrily on their way seeking happiness is that most often we are seeking it in all the wrong places. Deep down we are all so very terribly bored, and so we think by making everyday distractions important they become a part of our daily routine, which makes it easier to get through the day. As deep is the reality that, as a biological species we simply need food, water, a roof over our head, and to be loved. But as long as we keep giving ourselves over to booze, pot, pills, celebrity fascination, the hope of winning a lottery ticket, that our car defines us, and that as long as we are able to maintain all of the other material comforts of our lives, we’ll accept most things without complaint.

So it comes down to, people don’t vote because they are happy with their lot in life, as long as something doesn’t happen in their own backyard, or understand that elections don’t really change anything in their daily lives, unless one becomes ill, hurt, abused or assaulted, of course, and can’t pay for the repairs. Or people don’t vote because they don’t give a shit and usually live their lives as such. Or people don’t vote because they look at the candidates and their parties and nothing meaningful is there to vote for. This I feel is the biggest reason many don’t bother to vote, for though society is crying out for leaders, there aren’t any.

What is needed, especially today when decisions are often needed to be made quickly for our futures sake, are individuals who bring forethought to the changes needed in our modern society and changing planet, and who understand what it might mean for democracy and basic human rights. Leaders willing to do battle in the only war any civilization needs to fight today, the one between the public good and private profits. It’s too bad that very few politicians today draft and pass mandates with positive results, which become a part of their legacy long after they are gone from office. Needed are leaders who are willing to bring about reform, no matter how bumpy the road might be, nor how many arrows glance off their brows. Men and women who are willing to speak for all citizens, not only those that support them, and who understand the importance of transparency and accountability, and who will promote policies that will improve the economic and social well being of the world. Someone who doesn’t cheat, steal or lie would be a huge evolutionary step forward.

In the 2013 BC election there were many talented individuals who were able to gain a seat in our legislature. Many are very qualified people, with business degrees and political science majors, and who are accountants, lawyers, and managers. All I’m sure having the best of intentions, and are very intelligent, which is often the problem, because more often than not it’s the really smart individual that is needed instead. And yes, there is a difference. But of all of those elected, there weren’t very many leaders. Someone the true majority of British Columbians believes in.

Premier Christy Clark may be the leader of the BC Liberals by way of our current voting system, but is she really the honourable leader we need in this changing world, or just the CEO of the government of BC, who on the world stage is a somewhat charismatic, teen-like, bubbly, minor celebrity with a nice smile who may or may not make any difference at all.

No matter Ms Clark, or the Liberal party’s intentions, are they strong enough in their convictions to represent all British Columbians, or just the princes of capitalism, or will they succumb to the problem that has followed politicians around since the first civilizations, in that power nearly always corrupts. As the Greek historian, Herodotus, explained in the 4th century BC, “Even the best of men, were he granted such power would alter the train of his thoughts. Insolence will be engendered in him by the advantages of his position, and envy …With these two in his soul he is filled with every wickedness, for insolence will cause him to break into many acts of wantonness, and envy into many more.”

I’ll end this essay with the issues of our sense of being overwhelmed, and the common adage, why bother to vote when it won’t mean anything. In our current voting system this is true, as is the reality that whoever of the two or three mainstream parties are in power in BC, nothing will change. The Liberals will continue to sit in the back seat of the speeding capitalism high-end sedan, as it hurls towards the edge of the cliff, with them all fighting over who can sit up front, and the New Democrats won’t stray too far from the middle of the road in their mid size “working man’s” pickup truck. Neither is what we need nor want, for we need action and reform. Meanwhile the Greens will cruise along in the latest hybrid, giving sage advice and sound alternatives.

But at any intersection, with the light switching to amber, the Greens slow down and stop just as it turns red, and take a look around. The New Democrats weave around them, quickly look left, then right, and boot through the amber. A few seconds after the light turned red, the Liberal sedan comes racing through the intersection nearly clipping an elderly man using a walker, just missing running over a university student, and nearly t-boning a local beer truck, but without even a glance or acknowledgement continues on, leaving the chaos in their dust.

Over the past hundred years, societies have had to deal with many issues, each separate and distinct as they usually happened piecemeal, from world wars to civil rights, the right to vote, women’s rights and the environment. Today is like a perfect storm arising seemingly just off in the distance, while in actuality is closer than we think. Income and wealth disparity, lack of accountability, corporate generated repression, blind greed, entitlement, consumerism, endless war, too big to fail institutions, crumbling infrastructure and climate change, all blending into one all-encompassing planetary crisis. Issues that need to be confronted by strong leadership and a populace willing to change, not for our sake, for we will be dead before it gets totally out of control, but for our children and their children. It would be completely irresponsible, immoral, suicidal, and just plain mean to leave such societal and political dysfunction and a deteriorating planet to future generations.

Distractions indeed have kept us busy. Our repression of anxiety, anguish, grief, and our natural human instincts and feelings, have sucked any courage we might have had right out of us. We have become, what was once sung “comfortably numb.”

We must not lose sight of the concepts of one small step at a time, but at the same time admitting that we must also confront the issues before us rather quickly, and have the courage to do so. For every action there is a potential reaction, with the future not yet written nor known. We must never forget that you who are reading these words, matter, we matter, and we are never too old or young to act, stand up and speak. Most importantly we must remember that hope is harvested, not given nor elected.

 

Further perusing – Tom Englelhardt  “Acts Of Courage”   TomDispatch.com

 

12/26/12

The Borborygmus that is Palestine – An Essay on Apartheid

Chapter 1

The first time, the area between what was Phoenicia (today – northern Lebanon and Syria), and Egypt to the south, and from the Mediterranean Sea to the Jordan River, was clearly called Palestine was by the Greeks in the

5th century BC. Though Palestine had always been there and has been called many other names. The region was among the earliest to see human habitation, animal domestication, agricultural communities and civilization.

The descendants of earlier peoples, such as the Kebarian culture, who lived in the area from about 20,000 to 12,000 years ago, were the hunters and gatherers, the Natufian, who created an Eastern Mediterranean culture which would be the first to implement the concepts of agriculture; originally developed to feed their livestock, and the first cultivation of cereals, specifically rye. The Natufian dominance lasted from 14,500 to 11,500 years ago. One of its settlements, now called Jericho, is the oldest inhabited city in the world. It lies near the Jordan River in the West Bank.

The next peoples were the Canaanites, a mix of many tribes, whose languages and cultures would be influenced by the civilizations of Ancient Mesopotamia, Egypt, Phoenicia, Minoan Crete and Syria. Later, the region would be controlled by the Babylonians, Persians, Ancient Greeks and Romans.

About 4,000 years ago, other groups of people began to arrive from the Aegean Sea region of Greece and Turkey and mix with the tribes of Canaanites and over the next couple of centuries, the many tribes of Palestine would become collectively known as the Philistines. Many of the people of Palestine had by now inhabited the area for over eight thousand years and were living predominately within small city-states and while the area was once covered in cedar and pine forests, over the centuries it had been nearly stripped clean by various empires, specifically the Ancient Egyptians, and the area had become a barren, eroded, hilly country with few and limited resources, nothing but a narrow ribbon of land squeezed between desert and sea, as little as 65 kilometres (40 miles). It also possesses the saltiest body of water on the planet, and the lowest point on its surface, that being the Red Sea, at 412m (1352ft) below sea level.

At about the same time, around 1900 BC, in Upper Mesopotamia (present day Kurdistan and Northern Iraq), an Ur, of the tribe of the Chaldees, and descendant of the ancient Sumerians, began to have visions, and a voice in his head telling him of a new promised land to the west. The voice told him that his tribe were the chosen people, and that they would have to toss aside their devotion to their numerous pagan gods and believe in only one god, which the Ur called El. After the death of his father, this Ur, forever known as Abraham, gathered up the few small tribes of the Chaldees and left their ancestral lands forever. Already being somewhat of a nomadic people, they migrated out of Mesopotamia, constantly wandering about in search of water and grazing land for their flocks of goats and sheep. Making their way through Syria and Jordan, they would eventually end up in Egypt, where after only a few years would be banished for “indifference” to the pharaoh at the time, Nebkaure Khety IV. They gathered their flocks and headed into the Sinai wilderness and onwards to the land of Canaan, which they entered for the first time, eventually settling down in Hebron, about 30 km (19 mi) from Jerusalem, in about 1850BC.

Both very elderly by now, Abraham and his first wife, Sarah, had never been able to have children together, though Abraham had gathered many wives. One of them, Hagar, had given birth to his first son, who had been named Ishmael. Sarah, now well past child bearing years became spiteful and talked Abraham into banishing Hagar and Ishmael from the tribe. It is said that with a heavy heart, Abraham banished them both into the Arabian Peninsula. But Hagar and Ishmael survived, with folklore and oral traditions recognizing Ishmael as the founder of the Arab nation.

Abraham had continued to have visions and spoke with his god El often, who one day told Abraham that Sarah, though very old, would produce a son as a “gift from God”, in his appreciation of Abraham’s obedience and discipline. Sure enough Sarah gave birth to her first child, a son whom they named Isaac. Still jealous and resentful of  Abraham’s other wives, Sarah became ever more protective of her son’s inheritance, and once again talked Abraham into banishing another favourite wife of his, Keturah, along with the six sons she and Abraham had together. This was also carried out, and Keturah, her sons and a small group of supporters headed out into the Arabian wilderness, where they would eventually become the ancestral tribal leaders of the Midian, in north-west Saudi Arabia. where 3,000 years later, the prophet Muhammad and Islam would be born. Dying in about 1830 BC, Abraham and Sarah were buried in the cave of Machpelah, in Hebron. A Muslim mosque marks the spot today. Abraham would become the patriarch of Judaism, Christianity and Islam. Isaac meanwhile, would lead his father’s tribes into becoming the Hebrew.

It is said, that this is the point in time where the seed of hatred began between Arab and Jew and would accumulate, and cause all the future confrontations between them, even up to the present day in the Israeli-Arab conflict, where they wish each other to be erased off of the planet. Four thousand years of resentment and loathing caused by, basically, a family feud and what particular god each family believed in.

 

Chapter 2

Meanwhile, Canaan at the time was inhabited by dozens of tribes, split between nomadic herders, and farmers huddled around springs and wells. Most all of Canaan’s city states would grow up either on or near a well, where eventually walls would be built to protect the precious water from the goats and sheep of the herders. Because of this and either times of unrest, famine or drought, the herders had to often immigrate to surrounding areas to feed and water their flocks and themselves, or just as often becoming enslaved and relocating as refugees or slaves.

With one of the first civilizations in the world, the Sumer of Mesopotamia, disappearing into history and the Egyptian pyramids already more than 800 years old, many tribes in Canaan, including the Hebrew would end up in Egypt, as slaves, farmers, herders and craftsmen.

The Hebrew tribes emigrated, perhaps enslaved, to Egypt a couple of centuries after Abraham’s death and would stay for two hundred years. Over the generations the majority of them in fact did quite well, with many arising to respectful positions as craftsmen, traders, scribes and advisers to the Egyptian Royal Courts. One of the Hebrew, Moses, had been raised by the pharaoh’s daughter and had become a prince of the Royal Court, as well as a respected military commander. But after killing an Egyptian for beating a slave, Moses headed for the hills. Over the next few years he became a herdsman and wandered the hilly desert country as a nomad. Meeting other Hebrew herders and their small clans, Moses came to learn that the Hebrew people were descendants of Abraham, the patriarch with whom their one god had formed a covenant. Growing up reading and writing various texts and languages, he had studied ancient Sumerian, Ur and Babylonian tablets, which told epic stories of great floods and described the laws of the earlier Sumerian people. Linking oral traditions of Moses’ ancestors and earlier cultures, along with these readings, he began to discover his own roots and the origins of his own people, as well as enhancing earlier ideologies into the narrative which would become the concepts of Judaeo and Christian traditions. He also began to have visions and a voice in his head, which also spoke to him through his staff, rocks and burning bushes. Moses was told that he should lead the Hebrew back to their promised land. The voice in his head introduced himself as Yahweh, the only one true god of the Hebrew.

Around 1400 BC, Egypt entered a time of environmental and economic collapse, which coincided with one of the largest volcanic eruptions in recorded history, the Santorini or Thera eruption, which destroyed the Minoan civilization, and effected most all the populations of the Eastern Mediterranean area. It was at this time that Moses would return from his self-exile and then lead the Hebrew tribes out of Egypt.

After leaving Egypt, the Hebrew would spend the next fifty years wandering about the Sinai wilderness. Moses explained to his people that Yahweh not only promised them their land around Hebron, but all of Palestine, and that it was their divine right. But they could not enter their promised land until the generation of people that had come out of Egypt with Moses, along with their ungodliness behaviour and attitude began to die off and a new generation could emerge to carry out their god’s will. And sure enough, soon after Moses died the tribes of Hebrew would swarm out of the hills of the Sinai and sweep across Palestine, bent on war and conquest. The earlier aspects of their faith – extinction of will, passive meditation, mournfulness, mysticism, and the softness of the Sun of Abraham’s time, would not do. To achieve victory they now needed their god Yahweh to become a fierce and jealous god of vengeance with an “eye for eye” brutality. And he did.

Palestine was inhabited at the time by many powerful and prosperous kings, in strong walled cities surrounded by agricultural communities, the population a melting pot of tribes, including the Ishmaelite, Edomites, Moabites, Ammonites, Midianite, and Qahtanites, with much of the population still living on lands where thousands of generations of their ancestors had lived, hundreds of centuries before Abraham.

But over the next four hundred years, the Hebrew would pillage, raze cities and towns to the ground, and beat much of Palestine into submission. Attacking the peoples that had always lived in these lands with the modus operandi; after conquering a farm, village or city, every man, woman, child, and domesticated animal, be put to the sword. It worked. By 900 BC many of the original inhabitants of Palestine had been killed, displaced or assimilated into the surrounding populations, losing nearly all of their distinctive and vibrant cultures. Eventually the loose confederation of Hebrew tribes would unite to become a nation themselves. Samuel, a religious judge, was appointed the king of the new united kingdom of Israel. With Saul, of the tribe of Benjamin proclaimed king and war-leader soon after.

 

Chapter 3

The still being written books that would make up their bible, the Torah (Old Testament), gave birth to their distinct religion, which they called Judaism and themselves, Jews. From the beginning they placed themselves apart from all other humans and religions, by making Judaism only for their race and no other, and very unique at the time, they only had the one god. Though the Torah speaks about tolerance, this attitude of Judaism would foster racism and the Jewish people would from then on become persecuted for such beliefs.

In about 600 BC, the Babylonians would invade Palestine and Israel, and then return to Babylon with nearly half the Jewish population in tow as slaves, though many would return over the next decades, with many having worked once again as scribes and advisers, and studied in the greatest libraries in the world at the time, in the greatest city of it’s time Babylon. Soon after returning, the books that make up the Torah would be copied and edited a few more times and eventually became the collection of books it is today.

Less than five hundred years later a greater Diaspora would occur when the Romans, having already conquered and attempted to subdue Palestine, would squash the rising of the Jews fighting against the oppression of Roman tyranny and the Jews would leave Palestine en mass. During the hostilities and rebellions, a Jew called Jesus was crucified, and nearly a hundred years later another new religion would come into being, centred on both, the Torah and the teachings of Jesus, and be called Christianity. At about the same time the Diaspora had run its course and very few Jews were left in Palestine after 100 AD.

Over the next 1800 plus years, the Palestinian people would be controlled by the Byzantines, the Sunni Arab Caliphates, the Shia Fatimid Caliphate, Crusaders, Mameluks and Ottomans. During the “war to end all wars” in 1917, the British captured Palestine and Jerusalem from the Ottomans-Turks and were awarded a mandate to govern the region in 1922, though revolts by non-Jewish Palestinians were a continuous thorn in their side, the way they carried on about wanting rights and such things.

In 1920, the League of Nations reported that there were 700,000 people living in Palestine, with 80% being Muslim, including small groups of Arab Bedouin and peoples of mixed races. There were some 77,000 Orthodox Christians, who also spoke Arabic, and other minorities of Latin and Greek Catholics, while the Jewish population was about 76,000.

From about 100 to 1850 there were always only a handful of Jews in Palestine, by the end of the 19th century perhaps a couple of hundred, but after the persecutions in Russia and especially after World War Two and the holocaust, the Jewish people began to return to Palestine in greater numbers. By 1948 the population of Palestine had risen to 1.9 million, of whom 68% were Arabs and 32% Jews. The intolerance, racism and hatred each race held for each other, and the British, escalated and continued unabated until 1947, when the British had had enough and wished to terminate the mandate.

The United Nations General Assembly recommended partitioning Palestine into an Arab state, a Jewish state and a resolution that the city of Jerusalem be designated a Special International Regime. The Jewish leaders agreed while the Arab leaders did not, and the day after the establishment of the State of Israel was declared in 1948, civil war began before the sun was up. More than 700,000 Palestinians had to flee or were driven from their ancestral homes and would be never allowed to return. More than 110,000 refugees made their way into Lebanon, the rest into Jordan, Syria and Egypt, while in the three years after the war, about the same number of Jews would immigrate to Israel from surrounding Arabian areas. The Arab-Israeli war of 1948 would last for nine months with over 15,000 deaths and many times more causalities. When the smoke cleared, Israel kept all the area given to them by the UN, took control of almost 60% of the land that was given to the proposed Arab state, including Jaffa, Galilee and territories in the West Bank and captured West Jerusalem. Jordan captured the remainder of the West Bank and East-Jerusalem, while Egypt took the Gaza Strip. No Palestinian state was created.

The heart of Palestine has always been Jerusalem, the holy city of Judaism, Christianity and Islam. During its long history, Jerusalem has been completely destroyed, twice, withered under siege 23 times, attacked over 50 times, and captured and recaptured 44 times. The place may be the shrine of the three main religions but the stench of violence, hatred and intolerance that pervades over it forever lingers. Even today, the status of Jerusalem is one of the core issues in the Israeli-Palestinian conflict.

Nineteen years later, during the 1967 Six-Day War, Israel would capture East Jerusalem and then annex it, though the international community rejected this annexation as illegal and consider East Jerusalem a Palestinian territory under Israeli military occupation. Israel refers to Jerusalem as their “undivided capital” even if no one else does, and though all branches of the Israeli government are located there, Israel’s commercial capital city is Tel-Aviv. Today there are more than 720,000 people living in Jerusalem; 465,000 are Jews, mostly living in West Jerusalem and about 250,000 Palestinians, mostly Muslim and mostly living in East Jerusalem.

Besides East Jerusalem, the Israelis would also capture the West Bank from Jordan, the Gaza Strip and the Sinai Peninsula from Egypt, and the Golan Heights from Syria. Overall, Israel’s territory grew by a factor of three, gaining at least 300 km in the south, 60 km to the east, and 20 km in the north. And though the Camp David Accords of 1978 would return the Sinai to Egypt, Israel would keep the rest, for as US president John F. Kennedy stated years earlier, “Israel was not created in order to disappear, Israel will endure and flourish. It is the child of hope and the home of the brave. It can neither be broken by adversity nor demoralized by success. It carries the shield of democracy and it honors the sword of freedom.”

Israeli casualties numbered about 800 killed, 4,500 wounded, 15 captured, with 46 aircraft destroyed. In contrast, Egypt alone had 10-15,000 killed or missing. All be told, Egypt, Jordan, Syria and Iraq’s casualties were over 22,000 killed, 5,000 captured and untold numbers of wounded. They also lost hundreds of tanks and had an estimated 452 aircraft destroyed. For every Israeli who was killed, 27 Arabs would lose their lives. But then as proven 3000 years ago when the Israeli’s first conquered Palestine, they are very adept at killing fellow human beings and would ever become more proficient at it as time went on.

 

Chapter 4

The Palestinians, now led by the Palestine Liberation Organization (PLO), were devastated, with over one million Palestinian Arabs placed under Israeli military control in the newly captured territories. The PLO would relocate its headquarters to Jordan, already home to thousands of Palestinian refugees. During the war 300,000 Palestinians had fled from the West Bank and Gaza to Jordan, Egypt and other Arab countries, while in the Golan Heights about 100,000 Syrians also had to flee. The end of the Six-Day war launched new Israeli policy to secure their captured territories through the process of creating permanent settlements. Dozens of villages were destroyed, both as punishment and to chase away those who lived there. In a few cities a third of the homes would be razed to the ground, evicting thousands of Palestinians. In the Jericho area alone, over 70,000 Palestinians had to flee; altogether, over 25% of the population of the West Bank were either forced and intimidated to leave or fled voluntarily in panic and fear. Though a few months later Israel announced that it would allow the return of these refugees, in reality perhaps 16,000 were allowed back.

The PLO, founded in 1964 by Yasser Arafat, Palestinian leader and President of the Fatah political party (founded in 1959), would grow in importance and strength after the Six-Day War, with Arafat spending much of his life fighting  for Palestinian self-determination; “where a state has the right to freely choose their sovereignty and international political status, with no external compulsion or interference so long as such rights are based on respect for the principle of equal rights and fair equality of opportunity, with no concern as to how the decision is to be made, or what the outcome should be, whether it be independence, protection, some form of autonomy or even full assimilation.”- Geneva Convention.

The PLO’s ideology would further embrace the concept and political strategy of what would become known as Sumud, meaning “steadfast perseverance” or “firm and unwavering,” through the understanding of the nature of “logical argumentation of oppression and resistance.” There are two forms of Sumud. The first is “static Sumud” which is passive and defined as the “maintenance of Palestinians on their land.” The second is “resistance Sumud” which is much more forceful and whose aim is to seek ways of building alternative institutions to resist and undermine the occupation of their lands.

By September 1970, King Hussein of Jordan felt he was losing control over his monarchy with the influx of hundreds of thousands of Palestinian refugees, and moved to suppress the militancy of Palestinian organizations operating within his borders. Thousands, especially Palestinians, died. By July 1971, the PLO and thousands of its fighters would be finally driven out of Jordan. They would flee to Southern Lebanon, joining hundreds of thousands of fellow Palestinian refugees from the war in 1967.

By 1975 there were over 300,000 refugees in southern Lebanon, with the PLO creating a state within a state, which caused a demographic imbalance within Lebanese society and its democratic institutions. With the PLO’s arrival, fighting along the Israeli-Lebanese border escalated. The PLO would align themselves with the Lebanese National Movement, a coalition of Muslims, and Arab nationalists and leftists who opposed the rightist, Christian, ancestral Maronite-dominated government of Lebanon, and before too long civil war broke out in Lebanon which would fulminate for ten plus years. Eventually Iranian-supported Shi’a militant groups from Syria would also join in on the fighting.

In 1982, with the civil war spilling over its border and concern over Syrian influence of Lebanon, Israel invaded southern Lebanon. Initially Israel’s objective was to push the PLO forces back 40km (25mi) to the north but after attacking the PLO, Syrian, leftist and Muslim Lebanese forces, they found themselves occupying all of southern Lebanon. After surrounding the remaining PLO and elements of the Syrian army in West Beirut, the Israeli’s laid siege, killing upwards of 5,000 fighters and civilians. Under a truce and International peacekeeper protection, Arafat and the PLO were allowed to relocate to Tripoli and within a few weeks of fighting, Israel’s forces would defeat most of the Palestinian militants left in Lebanon. By 1985, with continuing international outrage over Israel’s role in Christian led massacres of Palestinian refugees, as well as the Israeli population’s disillusionment with the war,  Israel would withdraw to a 10km (6mi) occupied strip of South Lebanon.

The 1982 Lebanon War lasted but a few months while the actual conflict would continue on in seemingly tit for tat skirmishes up to the present day. The human cost of the war was typical for this holiest of lands; either 368 or 657 Israeli’s killed versus 9,800 Syrian and Palestinian combatants, along with perhaps 16,000 Lebanese civilians, with over 30,000 wounded.

The resistance movement of Islamic militant groups, such as the Shi’a and other Palestinian guerrilla forces, would consolidate with the Shi’a political party, Hezbollah, and the Lebanese party, Amal, and with remnants of the PLO, would carry out guerrilla warfare against Israel over this tiny occupied strip of southern Lebanon for the next 18 years. Though by the early 1990’s, the Palestinian organization’s political and military infrastructures in Lebanon, which had taken 15 years to build, ceased to exist. The Lebanese civil war abated in 1990 when Syria would establish complete dominance over Lebanon.

The Palestinians, in their ongoing struggle for national liberation and an end to the Israeli illegal occupation of the West Bank and Gaza would continue to fight and retaliate up to the present day, countering apartheid and the Israeli “defence forces” might and technology, with everything from armed attacks on Israeli soldiers, police and civilians to suicide bombings, launching rockets and mortars into Israel, kidnapping of soldiers, shootings, assassinations, stabbings, stoning and lynching to non-violent actions such as civil disobedience and resistance, mass protests, general strikes, graffiti and barricades.

To counter the Palestinians wrath, the Israeli’s created their “Iron Fist” policy. A policy devoted to erasing any idea of Palestinian nationalism whatsoever. A policy “founded on brute force, repression and fear, collaboration and treachery, beatings and torture chambers, and daily intimidation, humiliation, and manipulation,” with an “all-pervading element of humiliation.” Over a six year period in the eighties the Israelis would arrest more than 120,000 Palestinians. By 1990, one Israeli prison alone, in the Negev, held about one out of every 50 West Bank and Gazan males older than 16 years. Israeli tactics also included seriously curbing Palestinians movements, with checkpoints and enforcing a strict curfew in certain areas. This was accompanied by economic integration and increasing Israeli settlements such that, the Jewish settler population in the West Bank alone, nearly doubled from 35,000 in 1984, to 64,000 in 1988, reaching 130,000 by the mid nineties. With both sides guaranteeing that all future generations of both Muslim and Jew would grow up with continuing anger, racism and hatred towards each other just from the daily stress of potential conflict.

 

Chapter 5

Since 1988, when the Palestinians put forth their “Palestinian Declaration of Independence,” three-quarters of the world’s countries recognize the West Bank and Gaza as being the State of Palestine, except by the United Nations, Israel, the United States, Canada and a few other Western nations. To this day Palestine has more ambassadors around the world than Israel does. In 1993, for the first time face to face, Israel would meet with the PLO, the representative of the Palestinian people, in what would become known as the Oslo Accords. It provided the creation of a Palestinian interim self-government, the Palestinian National Authority (PNA), who would be responsible for the administration of the territory under its control. The Accord also called for the withdrawal of Israel from parts of the Gaza Strip and West Bank. Main issues such as Jerusalem, Palestinian refugees, Israeli settlements, and security was not discussed and neither the Oslo Accords nor the 1995 Oslo II Accords, promised Palestinian statehood. As to the Gaza Strip, Israel would finally get around to withdrawing their settlers and military presence in 2005, though maintained control of the airspace and coast, while they continue to systematically set up illegal settlements in the West Bank.

The Oslo Accords also declared that the West Bank territory to be divided into three separate areas and administration divisions. Area A, covering about 18% of Palestinian land and 55% of the Palestinian West Bank population, would be under the control of the Palestinian Authority and include most of the major Palestinian cities, the PA would also be responsible for security control. Area B covers 21% of the territory and about 44% of West Bank Palestinians and is mostly  rural communities, under Palestinian civil administration and joint Israeli security control, while Area C is under complete control by the Israeli’s and includes all the areas they have established settlements. Today Area C encompasses more than 60% of Palestinian territory, yet only 4% (about 150,000) of the Palestinian population live there because they face severe restrictions on planning, building and accessing services and the area’s natural resources, with 70% of the area off-limits to Palestinian construction and a further 29% heavily restricted. Israeli plans call for less than 1% of Area C to be for Palestinian development.

There are now about 350,000 Jewish-Israeli settlers who live in Area C, with about 15,000 added every year. As of 2010, there were 192,000 Israeli’s living in settlements in East Jerusalem, with a further 100 settlements not officially recognized by Israel and which are illegal under both the Geneva Convention and even Israeli law, but none the less have been provided with infrastructure, water, sewage and other services by the Israeli authorities. In 2011 alone, Israel demolished more than 560 Palestinian structures, including 46 rainwater collection pools, in Area C, instantly making more than 1,200 people homeless. Today more than half a million Israel settlers are living in enclaves within the Palestinian territories. The consensus of the United Nations, the European Union, the Arab league and the majority of legal scholars, hold that all Israeli settlements on the West Bank beyond the Green Line (the demarcation line set out in 1949) are illegal under international law.

The eventual conclusion for Area C, according to Israel, is for all the Palestinians still living there to move to Areas A and B, where it will be easier to contain them, a’la Gaza. But truth be told, they need the land for their ever growing population. Make no mistake; Israel’s number one concern is its maintenance of its Jewish demographic majority. Indeed much of their policy making is based on the threat of non-Jewish population growth, immigration and water rights. While the key issues we are told through the media are mutual recognition, borders and security, control of Jerusalem, Israeli settlements and Palestinian freedom of movement.

The governments of Palestine and specifically Israel are placing incredible pressure on the current stress levels of their populations and environment, especially considering how small the area is and how densely packed their cities are. Including the Golan Heights and East Jerusalem, Israel covers 22,072 square km (8,522 sq mi), with a population of 7,933,200 people as of 2012 and is the 34th most densely crowded country in the world. 78% are Jewish, (nearly 6.2 million), 20 % are Arabs (just over 1.4 million), while the remaining population is listed as “others.” In contrast, the Palestinian territories cover 6,220 sq km (2400 sq mi) with a population of an estimated 3.8 million people, including the 1.7 million living in the open air prison called the Gaza Strip, with 10 to 11 million Palestinian refugees, scattered in nearby countries and around the world.

In comparison, the largest island on the west coast of North America is Vancouver Island, at over 32,000 sq km (20,000 sq mi) with a population of 759,366 people. An area larger than Palestine and Israel combined. Most Vancouver islanders live on its southern tip, in the 13 municipalities which make up the Greater Victoria District, an area covering 2,341 sq km (903 sq mi), though metro Victoria actually covers only about 696 sq km (268 sq mi), with a combined population of just over 340,000 people. The Gaza Strip meanwhile is only 41km (25mi) long, 6 to 12km (3-7mi) wide and a total area of 365sqkm (141sqmi), one-sixth the size of the Greater Victoria district, but with a population of 1.7 million.

Though many attempts have been made for a Palestinian state, with the reasonable and logical solution of a two-state solution, the fighting is seemingly never ending, whether conducted by regular armies, paramilitary groups, terror cells, secret police or individuals. Not only do the Israeli military and Palestinian freedom fighters loathe each other to the point where they view each other as not being human beings, their societies despise each other as well, even though, according to a number of polls taken in 2007, the majority of both Israelis and Palestinians prefer the two-state solution as the means to resolve the conflict. An independent Palestinian state living alongside an independent Israeli state is a great idea, the most logical for sure. But with only about 3.8 million Palestinians still existing by surviving in the present day territories and Israel bulging at the seams with its ever growing population of  7 million and need for land, water and resources, I sadly see why the Israelis do what they do, which causes retaliation and ever more hatred. I am sure they would love to just go for it all and erase the Palestinian people off the planet by however means and then just move in. And then after another decade, their population growth and need for resources and water would dictate they expand even more, maybe Lebanon or Jordan or even Syria would be next.

 

Chapter 6

The most significant threats to a two-state solution are the Israeli settlements within Palestine, the number of Palestinian refugees, and as mentioned, water. First off, the enclaves that Israel sets up in occupied territories are populated with “settlers” we are told. The word bringing up thoughts of families made up of good and hard-working folks, moving into the frontier to create a life for themselves, a just, empathic, tolerant and law-abiding people, simple homesteaders. While in reality any “settler” who decides to move onto land that is not theirs, and which was only recently vacated of its native population through incitement and cruel violence would have to be psychotic. Each “settler” knows very well what environment they are entering and are no doubt very well prepared, supported and armed. Then after moving in they often wake up in fear of their very own survival. Not a place for a family or a “settler,” but as already mentioned, in May 2012, over half a million Israeli settlers illegally live on Palestinian soil. To-date Israel has ignored nearly 100 UN Security Council resolutions calling for them to withdraw to pre-67’ borders. In May 2012, 27 ministers of the European Union condemned the escalating incitement and settler violence. Israel paid them no mind.

In 2008, the Association for Civil Rights in Israel, determined that; the segregated road network in the West Bank, with 500-600 checkpoints throughout the territories; the continuous construction of separation walls of monolithic proportions; the expansion of Israeli settlements and restriction of growth of Palestinian towns; the discrimination in granting of services, budgets and access to natural resources; blatant violations of human dignity; and the ethnically cleansing underway in Jerusalem is “reminiscent of the Apartheid regime in South Africa.”

Today there are approximately 4.7 million Palestinian refugees, 1 .5 million of them living in refugee camps, scattered throughout, Jordan, Lebanon, Syria and the West Bank. Most were born outside of Israel, but are the descendants of the original Palestinian refugees who had to flee in 1948 when their land was given to the Israelis. Israel, above all else, is a country which lives in constant fear of the Palestinians returning to their original lands en force. But this would not be allowed to happen because realistically, two to five million Palestinians returning to Israel would be the end of Israel.

As to water, Israel receives most all of its water from two large underground aquifers, both running under the 1948 boundary, the Green Line, and into the West Bank. Israel consumes 95% of the output of the Western Aquifer and 82% of the North-eastern Aquifer, not leaving much for the millions of Palestinians in the West bank and Gaza. In 2012 it was reported that the 450,000 settlers living in the West Bank used more water than the 2.3 million Palestinians who also live there. Because of climate change, where in 2012 the Jordan River ran at its lowest level in recorded history, water will become much more an issue in the near future, not only for Israel and Palestine, but for many areas of the planet. Globally, wars over water are already being fought, with many more just around the corner, for as the population of the planet escalates each artificially distinct society of the one species of man will want to be the lone survivor.

The estimates for people killed between 1948 and 2009 in Palestine vary from 13,000 to 30,000 though these numbers are even more inaccurate when taking into account the true civilian death toll, which most always seems just a guess and/or afterthought, and the unknown hundreds, perhaps thousands of deaths from landmines and explosive remnants of war. After reading multiple lists and numbers, it seems the “official” death toll, from direct conflict between Israeli and Palestinian for the fifteen years between 1987 and 2011, and attributed to either Israeli military operations, artillery shelling, rocket attacks, search and arrest campaigns, barrier demonstrations, targeted killing and settler violence, is 8,096 Palestinians killed, 1,633 of them under 16 yr s, with 1,514 Israelis killed, 147 of them under 16 yr s. More recent estimates determine that altogether, deaths from the Israeli-Arab wars from 1945 to 2010, exceeds 92,000 people.

 

Chapter 7

Then there is the Israeli controlled ghetto, the Gaza Strip; 41 kilometres (25 miles) of beach, 6 to 12 kilometres (3 to 7 miles) wide; with a 11 km (6 mi) southern border with Egypt, a 51 km (32 mi) western and northern border with Israel, a population of 1.7 million Palestinians and a 3.2% growth rate, the 7th highest in the world. Israel withdrew from Gaza in 2005, but remained in control of anything or anyone going in or out of Gaza, whether by air, land or sea. In the 2006 Palestinian legislative elections, the Palestinian Sunni Islamic organization Hamas, garnered the majority of votes and by 2007, after scrapes and skirmishes with the Palestinian political party Fatah and the Palestine Authority, held control of the Gaza Strip. Israel, United States, Canada, the European Union and Japan classify Hamas as a terrorist organization, countries that do not include Iran, Russia, Turkey and several Arab countries. Hamas was freely elected by the majority of Palestinians in Gaza to be their government on a platform based on their reputation for brutal honesty and that they are averse to corruption. Ever since, the Israeli’s have carried out a systematic, collective punishment on Gaza’s population while pretending to focus on the lunatic extremists that live within. While in reality Israel is creating terrorists faster than they can kill them, with their treatment of all non-Jewish people in Gaza about the same as South Africa’s treatment of non-whites was.

Daily life for a Palestinian living in Gaza is often made up of being harassed at checkpoints, imprisoned arbitrarily, denied clean water and sanitation, induced malnutrition and stressed of air bombardment or ground invasion that could happen at any time. Most of the population are permanently mentally scarred, living each day with the sound of either, jets, helicopters or drones overhead, twenty four hours a day, seven days a week. There are no safe places in Gaza.

In June 2005 there were 3900 factories operating in Gaza with over 35,000 employed, by June 2007 only 195 factories were still operating with 1750 employed and only at 25% to 50% operating capacity. That same year Israel banned most all imports and exports and suspended 95% of Gaza’s industrial operations. In Feb.2008 Israel reduces electricity it sells to Gaza by 10%. The month before, knowing  a person  needs a minimum of 1200 calories per day to prevent a humanitarian crisis; Israel subtracts 8% to adjust for the “culture and experience of the Gazans” by intentionally allowing fewer trucks and supplies in to meet that need. While in the West, a Burger King Triple Whopper is 1,240 calories alone. In 2010 Gaza’s unemployment rate was 40% with 80% of its population living on less than $2.00 a day. Imports such as pipe and other building materials, which are being destroyed each time the Israelis strike, but which Israel deems could be used to make weapons, are banned.

In 2008-09, the 1st Gaza War, which the Israelis called “Operation Cast Lead” was fought and lasted three weeks, with over 1,400 Palestinians killed, including 930 civilians, and  9 Israeli deaths (3 civilian), 4 of which were from friendly fire. Of the Palestinian deaths, what sort of stands out is the seemingly intentional targeting of its hospitals and ambulances, with 17 health personnel killed and 26 injured, with a total of  29 ambulances damaged or destroyed by bombs or crushed by armoured vehicles. Emergency vehicles were often denied access to sites until it was too late to save the wounded, and then once they received clearance to enter, the Israelis would fire upon the site for the second time. Altogether 48% of Gaza health facilities were directly or indirectly hit by shelling.

Later that year, in Nov. 2009, a panel of international jurists, all veterans of human rights investigations in Sudan, Rwanda, and the former Yugoslavia, along with a detailed UN sponsored investigation which confirmed human rights abuse, came to the conclusion that war crimes were being committed by both Israel and Palestine. The United States immediately condemned the decision for failing to absolve Israel of any responsibility and blocked the United Nations from investigating.

The 2nd Gaza War,” called “Pillar of Cloud”, a “defensive action” by the Israelis, was fought from Nov. 14th to the 21st, 2012. It started weeks before, with Israel indiscriminately killing Palestinian civilians in several isolated incidents, including the deaths of a couple of youths out kicking a ball around, and then began in earnest after they assassinated the chief of Hama’s military wing. Gaza retaliated, duh. Israel stated that their aims were to stop such indiscriminate rocket attacks from Gaza and to disrupt the capabilities of extremist organizations operating within Gaza. Hamas declared that they, being victims living under violent occupation had the right to defend its people and respond to Israeli attacks. Indeed, the Article 1 (4) of protocol 1 of the Geneva Convention states that even a non-state, such as Palestine, or “any state or people under oppressive occupation, has the right to resist and use force to pursue the right of self-determination.” To suppress such actions goes against the Geneva Convention, UN Charter, Universal Declaration of Human Rights, and the Declaration on the Granting of Independence to Colonial Countries and Peoples. Though in this case, and once again, The United States, United Kingdom, Canada, Germany and other Western countries supported Israel’s right to defend itself, even though Israel is the oppressive occupier.

The Israeli military struck over 1,500 targets in Gaza, none being surgical in nature, for with Gaza being so dense, even one grenade takes out many and damages much. The strikes paid no heed to collateral damage such as actual people, targeting houses, apartment blocks, civil institutions, police stations, farms, the Islamic National bank, and numerous offices housing Hamas government ministries. Also hit were media outlets, suspected rocket launch pads, cache sites and Hamas command posts. The bombardment of Gaza was by air, land and sea, with the sky abuzz with drones, helicopter gunships and jets. Many neighbourhoods were reduced to rubble, displacing more than 10,000 Palestinians. In eight days of fighting, over 160 Palestinians would be killed, 90 of them being civilians, including over 30 children. An estimated 1,300 to 1,500 Palestinians were injured. For the population it would have been very hard to even just think clearly under such conditions, let alone survive through the trauma of each day. It has been estimated that the majority of the 1.7 million people and nearly all the children in Gaza suffer from Post Traumatic Stress Syndrome (PTSD).

At the same time, Palestinian militant groups fired over 1,400 rockets into Israel, with another 142 falling short and exploding within Gaza itself, killing Palestinians. Of the rest, 875 rockets fell in “open areas”, 58 actually hit urban areas in Israel, and more than 302 were shot down by Israel’s Iron Dome missile defence system. All told, Palestinian rockets killed four Israeli civilians, three of them in a direct hit on a home, two Israeli soldiers and an unknown number of Palestinian civilians. Israel announced afterwards that there were 21 Israeli’s injured by shrapnel, 28 injured during alarms and in the rush to hide, and more than 200 Israelis treated for anxiety. Since 2007, when Hamas came into power, up to Dec. 2012, the total number of Israelis killed by rocket, mortar or anti-tank fire from Gaza- 56, the number of Palestinians in Gaza killed by Israeli fire over that same time- 3,054.

The Palestinians in Gaza have no army, air-force or navy, nor airport or seaport. Their fighters consist of approximately 10,000 al-Qassam (Hamas) militant brigades, 10,000 other security forces and about 8,000 extreme Islam Jihadists. Israel had their entire Southern Command participating as well as 75,000 reservists prepared and ready to go on a moment’s notice. The deadliest weapon Hamas possesses is the longer range, 75km (46 mile), Fajr-5 rocket with an explosive payload of 175 kg (385 lb), the Israeli military prefers to strike back using their own MPR-500 advanced-penetration precision-guided bomb, which carries an explosive payload of 900 kilos (2,000lbs); and then there are the physical characteristics of the area, in that Gaza is only 365 sq km (141 sq mi), while Israel is over 20,000 sq km (7,900 sq mi).

Israel’s new toy, the U.S. backed Iron Dome missile defence system, consists of five truck-towed batteries of radar-guided interceptor missiles which engage only when rockets threaten populated areas of Israel and often will fire two interceptor missiles at once. Each battery costs about $50 million, each missile $62,000, while the estimated cost of one short-range Qassam M-75 rocket built in a Gaza workshop or garage, about $800. Israel has plans to eventually have 13 batteries in its Iron Dome system. During Pillar of Cloud they shot off about $30 million worth of missiles. But with overwhelming American support, in vast amounts of money and arms from their industrial military complex, Israel sees no reason to quit in its goal to become a colonial empire and fortress in the Middle East. In fact, besides the $3 billion per year the U.S gives to the Israeli military machine, two weeks after Palestine was recognized as a non-member state in the UN, the United States agreed to sell Israel $647 million in munitions to make up for what Israel expended during the eight-day Pillar of Cloud ravaging of Gaza. The deal included 6,900 precision bomb kits and 10,000 bombs of various kits. It is generous of the States, the three or four of the richest corporations in America will become even richer. Hell, weapons manufacturers and NRA (National Rifle Association) lobbyists in the States are making billions from their own population alone, not including the trillions that American weapons manufacturers and security companies are making and have made in Iraq and Afghanistan. With no iota of concern for such things as deaths, especially children, it is simply the cost of doing business.

During the Pillar of Cloud operations, 35 Palestinian children died from Israeli bombardments, of armaments mostly made in the United States. Five times the number of all Israeli deaths combined, which included no children. Meanwhile the United States has killed 168 children by drone attacks in Pakistan since 2006; another 231 children killed in Afghanistan in the first 6 months of this year alone, and another 921 children killed by US air strikes against insurgents in Iraq; in Yemen the numbers could be higher. While at home they are just as proficient. There have been 16 mass shootings in the U.S. just this year, leaving 88 people dead, including the 20 children killed with a military semi-auto in Newtown, Connecticut, where some of the children killed were shot up to 11 times, at point blank range. If one were to add the other 400 children in the US under the age of 15 who die from gunshot wounds each year and the tens of thousands of adults shot and killed, one could say the NRA and America’s leaders are responsible for killing more Americans in one year, than their enemies, real or imagined, even bin Laden, had at any time over the past twenty years. As it is, a gun kills someone in the United States every 20 minutes; twice the death rate of AIDS. In Duval County, in Florida, there have been 100 murders by guns in the past year, more than all of Britain, a nation of 63 million people. As one can see, wars don’t kill Americans, Americans kill Americans.

 

Chapter 8

While in Palestine, over 53% of Palestinians are under the age of 18, growing up in basically concentration camps, with limited access to necessities like running water, food, electricity and education. Their daily lives are filled with the pressures of persecution, brutality, hatred, coercion and injustice, each child trying to deal with the stress from the ever potentiality of conflict, bombardment, and/or extinction of their race. It is estimated that over 92% of Palestinian children are coping with some sort of trauma, while the cloaking smell of revenge, oppression and death is quickly erasing their dreams of peace and security in their future. They are of a generation who are becoming numb to further pain and suffering. A generation of children who not only have abandoned hope for a better life but who also have had their dreams taken away from them, a life where common sense and compassion do not exist any more.

Other ways Israel is defending itself, before, during and after the latest Gaza War, include the concepts – since 70% of Palestinians in Gaza live on fishing, their fleet is limited to fish only up to 4.8 km (3 mi) offshore, instead of the Oslo Accords guaranteed 32 km (20 mi) limit. Often fired upon, the fleet is totally blockaded from leaving the beach at least a couple of times per month, though for only 2 to 3 days at a time, with the Israeli’s knowing full well if such blockades go longer than 4 days, people in Gaza would start starving to death, and people would complain. As it is about 80% of Palestinians in Gaza exist on food aid, with an anaemia epidemic running out of control. Another reason for the 3 mile limit could be because 5 km (3.5 mi) off Gaza lies a natural gas offshore drilling rig, which in reality should be a Palestinian drilling rig.

After a ceasefire was reached in the latest hostilities, Israel seized 35% of the agricultural land in Gaza, as a “buffer zone.” Any Palestinian farmer who gets too close to the newly erected fence is shot without warning of any kind. Israel also seized aquifers and seawater desalination plants which is quickly turning much of Gaza’s water supply into a health hazard, though many areas of Gaza have had no running water for years, while current and escalating restrictions have created such a breakdown of sewage infrastructure, that within ten years, Gaza could very well be not fit to be lived in. Another technique the Israeli’s employ is, in areas of Palestine and Gaza under night time curfew, anyone outside after dark is shot without warning, and then regardless of who they are, is listed as a terrorist. And lastly, Israel controls the Gaza economy, what little there is left, by occasionally withholding import taxes. What it all means is that Israel has dehumanized their prey, just like all true killers do. And yes, Palestinians dehumanize, retaliate and become killers as well.

This is not saying all Jews and Muslims of Israel and Palestine are psychotic serial killers, far from it, but when Israel states they are defending themselves by punishing an entire population and occupying Palestinian territory is simply wrong and immoral. In reality much of the violence and overwhelming suffering  in Israel and Palestine is not created by the general population, but rather by fanatic extremist jihadists that Hamas cannot control, and other groups, such as the out of control and vicious Jewish settlers, whom Israel can’t or won’t control, and its racist military. And though both sides have committed great immoral transgressions against one another, Israel is much more capable in the killing department. Israel is by far the strongest military in the entire Middle East, in fact, the 2012 Global Militarisation Index, put out by the Bonn International Centre for Conversion, listed Israel as the world’s most militarised nation, followed by Singapore, Syria, Russia, Jordan and Cyprus. Israel also has one of the world’s highest standards of living and is heavily supported by the fading superpower, the United States. The Gaza Strip meanwhile is but an oppressed, impoverished ghetto with a weak government barely in control, making it through a complete and total blockade, living one day at a time, alongside a few thousand madmen.

While Israel and its Pillar of Cloud defensive operation was blitzkrieging Gaza, with Hamas and other Palestinian groups continuing to retaliate and fight for their independence and freedom, the Palestinian Authority was preparing for the upcoming meeting of the U.N., where it would be put to vote whether or not to give Palestine, United Nations “non-member observer state status”, and confirmation its state includes the West Bank, Gaza and East Jerusalem. You’d think this would no doubt force the resumption of a peace deal and get both sides talking as grown-ups should, abiding by international laws and values of humanity. But after decades of trying to negotiate an agreement with Israel to stop annexation and settlement in the West Bank and though they have, by as much as they can control, cooperated on many levels with both Israeli and American security forces, they have never even come close to getting an agreement or even initial dialogue with Israel for a formal two-state settlement. With Israel it is never going to happen, because it goes against its manifest destiny vision of a “Greater Israel” which includes all the Palestinian territories.

Before Pillar of Cloud, the Palestinian people were very aware of the upcoming UN decision, the Palestinian Authority had been working on it for decades, trying their best to stay off the angry road Israel strutted, and to instead pursue state status at the UN by adopting the non-violent, diplomatic and multilateral approach to gaining their freedom and dignity back, while at the same time trying to control the often foreign, gathering of lunatic extremist groups within their own population, and withstanding the extreme oppression of their people by Israel.

Preparing for the forthcoming UN decision, it was reported that the Palestine Authority, the military wing of Hamas and several Israeli civilian peacemakers were close to creating an agreement for a long-term ceasefire, while the world contemplated their hoped for status in the UN. For one reason or another, this was proving difficult to reach, but a short-term ceasefire agreement was being agreed upon. But just before such an agreement could be signed, the Hamas military’s leader was assassinated by an Israeli jet launched missile that bulls-eyed his car, as he drove downs a busy street in Gaza. Pillar of Cloud began soon after.

Eight days after the Pillar of Cloud Israeli assault on Gaza began a cease-fire was reached, negotiated by Egypt’s fundamentalist president, Mohamed Morsi. Then eight days after that, on Nov 29/12, the UN’s General Assembly met in New York City, 65 years to the day since Palestine was first partitioned by the UN. One hundred and eighty-eight countries of the world participated in deciding whether Palestine would be elevated to a “non-member observer state.” Of these, 138 nations, including the European nations France, Italy, Spain, Norway, Denmark and Switzerland voted yes, 41 nations, including Britain and Germany abstained, while only 9 nations voted unequivocally no – Israel, the US, Canada, the Czech Republic, Panama, the Federated State of Micronesia; which the US is wholly responsible for their defence,  the Pacific islands, Marshall and Palau; also influenced by the US, which provides both with defence, funding grants and access to social services, and another Micronesian nation, Nauri, the world’s smallest republic covering 21 sq km (8.1sqmi), with a population of just over 9,000 people. Also located within the Micronesian group of islands is Wake Island, the US Air Force base, airfield and missile facility.

 

Chapter 9

Another recent UN resolution, approved by a vote of 174-6 with 6 abstentions, called on Israel to join the Nuclear Non-proliferation Treaty (NPT) “without further delay” and open its nuclear facilities for inspection by the International Atomic Energy Agency. Joining Israel in the negative vote were once again, the United States, Canada, Marshall Islands, Micronesia and Palau.

The NPT was a treaty signed in 1970 aimed at preventing the spread of nuclear weapons and technology and to promote peaceful uses of nuclear energy. As of 2012, 190 parties have joined, including the five permanent members of the UN Security Council, the United States, Russia, France, the UK and China. More countries have ratified the NPT than any other arms limitation and disarmament agreement in history. Not in the NPT are India, Pakistan, and North Korea, with all three having openly declared they do indeed have nuclear weapons and have openly tested them. Israel stands alone, admitting nothing behind an opaque curtain. At the same time they demand that other Middle Eastern countries do not, under any circumstances, develop nuclear technology.  Estimates of Israel’s nuclear capacity range from 75 to 400 nuclear warheads, capable of being delivered by intercontinental missile, aircraft, and submarine. Israel most worries about Iran and its nuclear program, originally started and financed by the US and other Western European countries in the 1950’s and ending with the Shah of Iran’s exit in 1979, at which time the Iranians themselves continued any development and research. Israel worries of the Iranian rhetoric about wanting to erase Israel off the planet, while in reality if Iran ever did develop a weapon, somehow tested one, and then fired off a couple at Israel, they would, within seconds, be taken out themselves, entirely and completely, seriously, not a win-win situation. But then when has madness made any sense.

Though Palestine still cannot vote at the General Assembly, becoming a state rather than an entity does allow them other benefits such as membership in other UN agencies and organizations like the International Criminal Court (ICC), which scares the bejesus out of Israel. The fear that Palestine will bring forth a case over the illegal annexations and construction of Jewish settlements in the West Bank and/or the attacks on the West Bank and Gaza and/or war crimes, is one of the main reasons Israel and its supporters were adamantly against the General Assembly’s passing of the resolution. Palestinian officials have since stated that they have no immediate intentions to take such a road.

After the vote was taken, the Palestinian Authority Chairman, Mahmoud Abbas, addressed the representatives of 188 countries; “The moment has arrived for the world to say clearly: enough of aggression, settlements and occupation.” He also spoke about the need to resume negotiations with Israel and called the successful resolution the “birth certificate of the reality of Palestine,” at the conclusion of his speech the seated members of the UN General Assembly rose to a standing ovation, while those who voted against stayed seated and became invisible. It is clear that the Palestinians are trying to “create momentum for progress and credibility for legal and political solutions.” For beneath the hatred, oppression and persecution, the Israelis and Palestinians themselves are the ones who have to start listening to each other and find a way to live side by side. But for any negotiations to work Israel and Palestine, must start abiding by the laws of nations and humanity itself, and to know, like any human, we are or rather should be, held accountable for our actions. Their disgust for each other, the extreme ingrained insecurity they both possess, and plainly show to the world, and how both of their hypocritical scriptures have somehow replaced sorrow, compassion and empathy with hatred is beginning to wear thin with many fellow inhabitants of the earth. Collective disgust towards Israel and Palestine is accumulating the world over, unfortunately history has proven the next step is most always, more and more people will simply stop caring.

The countries who voted against the UN resolution were livid. US lawmakers, both Democratic and Republican voted that they would cut-off aid if the Palestinians used their new-found status against Israel in any way. Palestine I am sure is well aware of the cost they will be further taking. In 2011 Palestine was granted membership in the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO), in retaliation Israel withheld millions of dollars in tax transfers to the Palestinian Authority, which is always in financial distress, with the US following along and withholding millions of dollars in aid to the Palestinians, as well as cutting off their financing to UNESCO entirely.

Canada announced angrily that they will take “retaliatory measures against the Palestinians for forcing the statehood issue onto the world stage.” Though not revealed, the most obvious option would be for them to suspend aid to the Palestinians, even though on the Canadian Foreign Affairs website it states that, “Canada believes that both Israel and the Palestinian Authority must fully respect international human rights and humanitarian law which is key to ensuring the protection of civilians, and can contribute to the creation of a climate conducive to achieving a just, lasting and comprehensive peace settlement.” The tongue in cheek was well hidden, considering both Canada and the US have no qualms about looking the other way whenever Israel decides it should defend itself.

Israel declared that, “The Palestinians unilateral step at the UN is a blatant and fundamental violation of the agreements vouched on by the international community.” The next day they announced their plans to unilaterally build 3,000 new homes/enclaves within the area of East Jerusalem and the West Bank, called the E1 corridor, the illegal settlements would for all intents and purposes permanently slice the West Bank in half. As if human rights violations and breaches of international humanitarian law are not unilateral enough.

Both the US and Canada had to back pedal a bit. Condemning the move, they called Israeli ambassadors in to have a little chat. But Israel would go on to remind the world that “no matter the symbolic political games the UN General Assembly wishes to play, Israel alone controls the land, water and air of the Palestinian territories and will not waver on their intentions to permanently annex all three” and that the economic blockade of the Gaza Strip will continue. A few days after the UN resolution passing, Israel would confiscate over $118 million of tax revenues that they collected for the Palestinian Authority for the month of November, stating it was to offset continuing Palestinian debt to the Israel Electric Corporation.

Chapter 10

Israel’s tone continues to clearly show they have no intentions of allowing talks about any peace process and seem to be literally dead set against one. The arrogance of Israel’s ethnicity and religious beliefs has blinded them. They continue to be oblivious to many aspects of the realities of human behaviour, such as when people realize that they are a part of the problem, only then do they tend to then become a part of the solution, and that those who gain the greatest opportunities and accomplishments in life and society are those who master the “we.” Or further, that the most respected leaders’ minds work selflessly, with mutual respect for mutual benefit, and understand that influence only begins when a person or population feels they are being listened to and that they are understood. They also understand that compromise is rarely win-win, because rarely are both sides truly pleased, but that creative cooperation most always leads to success. Proving such realities have been thrown to the side of the road years ago, not only in Israel but nearly everywhere else in the world as well, especially in the US and Canada, an Israeli government minister declared during the attack on Gaza, that Israel should “send Gaza back to the Middle Ages,” and when a popular Israeli model admitted she had prayed for the welfare of the people on both sides in the conflict, she was accused of being “an enemy of the state.”

As to Hamas, which combines Palestinian nationalism with Islamic fundamentalism, it is the bee in Israel’s bonnet. Israel may not agree much with Hama’s ideology and policies, but terrorizing an entire population is not the remedy for such a situation, especially considering that, though deemed terrorists by Israel and her allies, in reality Hamas devotes 90% of their estimated $70 million annual budget to social, welfare, cultural and educational services. Most of their budget comes from Saudi Arabia, other Arab countries, Muslim charities, Palestinians living abroad and which is the ire of Israel, they receive about $20-30 million from Iran. But since the situation in Syria started in 2011, Hamas, the majority of which are Sunni-Islamic, have distanced themselves from Shia-Islamic dominated Iran due to their support of the Syrian dictator al-Assad. And in the past couple of years it seems their disposition towards a more central-is tic decision making process is growing rather than diminishing, with the rhetoric of their founding charter calling for the destruction of Israel slowly changing and becoming old news. They have recently stated that they would promote a resolution to the Arab-Israeli conflict and accept a Palestinian state based on 1967 borders. Israel would rather this fact not be broadcast too loudly, once again totally ignoring the fact a two-state solution is the only answer.

The people of Palestine, and no doubt most decent Israelis, wish for peace and to simply just getting along as neighbours should, where the citizens of each have a sense of shared values. They obey the laws and act peacefully within their society, which hopefully possesses a certain degree of equality, and where unrealistic fears are diminished so that racism and abhorrence to a fellow human being’s existence passes and empathy moves in and embraces. Instead of comparing the best of one’s own ethnic culture to the worst of another, Palestinian Arab and Israeli Jew must somehow wake up and realize they are both of the same species, with the same needs, wants and desires, with the majority of each other’s populations innocent.

The problems lie with the hateful, egotistical and ambitious elite at the top pulling the strings and playing games. Living within a realm where there is no differentiation between politics, religion and business, for they are all but engines of consumerism, with the industrial military complex making the majority of the money by influencing government leaders to continue to seed their populations with fear, anger and insecurity. As the collapse of the international economy continues and climate change escalates, in droughts, flooding, the decline in crop yields, rising food prices and dwindling fresh water, the elites become an ever more secluded group, living within protected enclaves and fenced compounds gorging themselves on nothing but the best and lots of it. Meanwhile enraged populations the world over have become even more enraged as their societies break down. To keep the current inequality and severe imbalance in place between the haves and the never-will haves, the new paradigm of “modern warlords awash in terrifying technologies and weapons,” is turning many countries in the world into fascist police states, where freedom is lost and replaced with security.

Will Israel’s diplomatic, financial and military supporters continue to ignore, seemingly with near disdain, international law and basic human rights and continue funding Israel’s apartheid-like ways? As a Canadian I can say that though Canada has stated they will support Israel in its defence, whenever it goes on the offensive, it is a decision made by the Harper government of Canada alone. I and my fellow Canadians were certainly not asked of our opinion, much like also not being asked our opinion of how embarrassing Canada’s behaviour and attitude is at every international meeting that is dealing with climate change or how proud we are of being awarded the “Dodo Award” from the international environmental community.

If Israel, with its extreme nationalistic Zionism as its official value system, which opposes the assimilation of Jews into other societies and makes a key legal distinction between “Jew” and “Non-Jew”, continues unabated the end game is a Greater Israel that is erased of all non-Jewish peoples and settled by the Jewish people alone. Much like South Africa’s original intentions under their official value system of apartheid and which also made a key legal distinction but between “white,” “coloured,” “Indian” and “Black.”

 

Chapter 11

Today Israel stands at a crossroads. One road leads to the above. It would be a violent road. Each step it took Israel would be increasingly at odds with civil society and then, hopefully, with other governments, as it takes over Palestine, expelling and killing every non-Jew in their path or who resists. Devastating sanctions would be made against Israel, much like what is now done to Syria, North Korea and Iran. In reality such a thing happening, as in Israel fulfilling their “destiny”, would involve so much maniacal violence and ethnic-al cleansing that peoples and countries would be unable to support them and not just stand aside and allow it to continue. At least one can only hope. Because the question remains, will enough people finally stand up, ignore the 24 hour news cycle, and demand their will upon their leaders to have the courage to do what is right for humanity and not for corporate, soulless entities?

Another road for Israel, which would also lead to violence and further bloodshed, is the road of not trying to exterminate the Palestinian people outright, but just take complete control of all Palestine. This would still create a Greater Israel, but the Jewish people could become a minority very quickly, just by the birth rate alone, and this goes against all that is Zionism. The entire area would become palaces, Jewish enclaves and city-forts, ghettos and the largest concentration camp ever, all on complete security lock down, with a population densely packed together like a Gaza Strip on steroids. Hatred, racism, revenge and intolerance would continue dripping off of people, as it does today, generation after generation.

The only solution is two distinct and separate countries living beside each other, just like the rest of the world does and for the most part quite peacefully. Security would be easier to establish and each country would then be judged on its own intrinsic worth and not by how much violence each one could inflict on the other.

Sadly, this will not happen, no matter how much the Palestinian Authorities become recognized and go about their quest for the right to self govern themselves in their rightful lands through the courts of international law and the United Nations. Because the Israelis continue to elect right-wing fanatical governments who still feel they need to strut around like the typical bully, and who have become both, very predictable and ever the more isolated. But then being imaginative and willing to engage in dialogue has never been one of the Israeli’s strong points. They also do not understand that in the reality that is war, even when you win, on many levels you lose. Indeed, I’m sure to many people all over the world who might care or have even heard of the Arab-Jewish conflict, Israel and Palestine have become yet another pair of bad actors, in an often repeated bad film where everyone knows how it will end and everybody dies.

While the Israeli, American and Canadian leaders were condemning Hamas, who were being merciless bombarded “hopefully back to the dark ages” in the latest Gaza war, not one of them realized that the true threat to Israel comes not from tiny, impoverished and oppressed Gaza but from the policies of the Israeli government itself. The holocaust of the Second World War we are told should forever be remembered so that it will never happen again. Yet it has happened many times since, from Cambodia to Rwanda to Serbia and to the Sudan, and it is what is happening in Palestine today, just not so quickly, but more apartheid-like, so nobody notices as much.

When Israel, and the few remaining countries in the world that support them, say the Palestinians should just go back from whence they came and allow a Greater Israel state to be created, there is a serious disconnect happening, while the words – delusional and ignorant – spring to mind. Because where the Palestinians came from is exactly where they are living now and therefore, there is nowhere else for them to go. So either the occupation ends and a two-state agreement is signed or everyone should just step aside and allow the Israelis to continue to immorally ethnically cleanse the territories they illegally occupy to the very point of Palestinian extermination. Then let the world condemn them for their actions, and at the same time allow the Palestinians the right to fight for their lives, their land and their existence by all means possible. Would they then be condemned by the world for their re-actions? The stench of unmentionable horrors each side would inflict on each other would bring outsiders into the fray, especially religious and corporate psychopaths. Then the supposedly holiest place on the planet would continue to be one of the most unholiest and nothing but a black hole of violence and hatred, while the rest of the world stands on the sidelines and watches. And then after the dust settles we’ll tell ourselves that we must remember what just happened and never forget, lest it ever happen again.

“Elites Will Make Gazans of Us All”,   Chris Hedges

It’s mostly punishment…. Testimonies by Veterans of the Israeli Defense Forces from Gaza and the Occupied Territories, Oded Na’aman

Ten voices on the Palestinian bid for UN membership, CBC News